JP2022001094A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of optimizing a button function pertaining to a performance.SOLUTION: A sub/main board can control a performance display device so as to detect a player's operation and execute a front button performance capable of causing a change in a performance with the player's operation as an opportunity, the player's operation includes a single operation by a single number of times of an operation and a successive hitting operation by plural number of times of an operation, and the sub/main board allows the performance display device to execute a pre-operation performance including display of a button image for promoting the player's operation as a performance included in the front button performance, to execute a performance during normal successive hitting in a situation in which a successive hitting operation is detected, and to execute an auto successive hitting performance with contents for expressing a meaning that successive hitting operation is performed when long-pressing is detected even if the successive hitting operation is not detected in a situation in which the performance during normal continuous hitting can be performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium.

In general, some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines are provided with operation buttons called chance buttons so that the player can change the production by operating the chance buttons (paragraph of Patent Document 1). 0012 etc.). Further, some gaming machines can be set to an environment for adjusting the volume and amount of light of the effect by the operation of the player (also, paragraph 0246 of Patent Document 1, FIG. 19 (b), etc.). ..
Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-164587

By the way, in recent gaming machines, the function of utilizing the button operation of the player for the production is indispensable for improving the taste. For this reason, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to determine in more detail the control mode related to the button operation and the effect so that the unexpected operation is not performed in association with the button operation. In addition, since the player's button operation is also performed in the environment setting for adjusting the volume and the amount of light of the effect, it is desirable to determine an appropriate control mode for many situations involving the button operation.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the button function related to the production.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the present invention, a game using a game medium (game ball, etc.) is performed, and when the game medium enters the starting port, the symbol is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode.
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Equipped with operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
If the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is not satisfied even if the game medium wins the start opening, the reserved storage information related to the variable display is reserved and stored within a predetermined number.
It is possible to perform a look-ahead effect that suggests the execution expectation of the special game related to the reserved storage information between the time when the reserved storage information is stored on hold and the time when the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information is started. can be,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: one-shot operation effects that can accept a single player operation and continuous hit operation effects that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) to encourage the player's operation.
When a player operation is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the multiple player operations (normal continuous striking effect, etc.).
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, if the singular player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), the player operation is performed a plurality of times. It is possible to display an effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to the fact that the player operation is regarded as being performed and the player operation is performed continuously for a predetermined time or longer.
A first effect pattern (front button effect, etc.) that displays the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed, and a second effect pattern (back button effect, etc.) that does not display the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed. And have
As the type of the look-ahead effect, at least a predetermined look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect B (heated background look-ahead effect), etc.) is provided.
In the previous variation display when a predetermined look-ahead effect is executed in the variation display (variation display of pre-target variation, etc.) prior to the variation display corresponding to certain reserved storage information (variation display of target variation, etc.) The difference between the execution rate of the first effect pattern and the execution rate of the first effect pattern in the variation display, and the predetermined look-ahead effect are executed in the variation display before the variation display corresponding to a certain reserved storage information. This is a gaming machine characterized in that the difference between the execution rate of the second effect pattern in the previous variation display and the execution rate of the second effect pattern in the variation display is different.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the button function related to the effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the main board composition of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a front view showing a substrate case in a state where a main substrate is housed, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view schematically showing a portion along line AA in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board, a sub-main board, and a sub-sub board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main symbol display board of the main control display device. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example while the effect symbol is changing in the effect display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example while the effect symbol is also stopped. (A) is a chart showing a hit / fail determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for loss. (A) shows a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) shows a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) shows a small hit symbol determination table used at the time of a small hit. The chart, (d) is a chart showing the missed symbol determination table used at the time of missed. A chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a miss, (b) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a 15R jackpot, and (c) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a 5R jackpot. Is a chart showing the winning price and the payout rate for each set value. (A) is a chart showing a look-ahead determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a look-ahead code correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interrupt processing in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery determination process in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main board. A perspective view showing a state in which the operation buttons, the cross-shaped key, and their surroundings are viewed from above and forward, (b1) is an explanatory view showing the timing of power-on in a detection example of a button operation that continues before the power is turned on, and (b2) is an explanatory view. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pulse signal for detecting a button operation at the time of power-on. (A) is a perspective view showing a lever device before the operation button is projected, (b) is a perspective view showing a lever device in which the lever is raised and the operation button is projected, and (c) is a lever in which the lever is tilted. It is a perspective view which shows the apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-main initial setting process in a sub-main board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a sub-main board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a sub-main board. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit start demo screen, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a round middle screen, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hit middle specific effect screen. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hit-medium specific effect screen different from FIG. 25 (c), (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an inter-round effect screen, and (c) is a hit different from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the medium specific effect screen. (A) is a time chart showing an example of progress of a game during a single-shot operation, (b) is a time chart showing an example of progress of a game during a normal continuous hit operation, and (c) is an example of progress of a game during an automatic continuous hit operation. It is a time chart showing. (A) is a time chart showing a specific example of the progress of the game during the automatic continuous hitting operation, and (b) is a time showing a progress example of the game when the start time of the automatic continuous hitting valid period and the button continuous hitting valid period are different. It is a chart. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the auto continuous striking function and the back button effect, and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the auto continuous striking function and the fluctuation advance notice effect. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting function and the hold look-ahead effect, and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting function and the button operation that continues from before the button operation valid period. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button effect before a button operation, and an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button effect during repeated striking. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode related to the indicator effect, and (b) to (d) are explanatory views showing how the indicated amount of the indicator effect increases in order. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an indicator effect during fluctuation, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a volume control effect during fluctuation. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a volume control effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light amount adjustment effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a volume control effect while the fluctuation is stopped, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light amount adjustment effect while the fluctuation is also stopped. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the reference timing and the automatic continuous striking operation, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the reference timing and the single-shot operation, and (c) is also the reference timing and the button from before the reference timing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with operation. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect at the time of effect set, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect after the effect set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example in the case where the light amount adjustment is performed during the execution of the automatic continuous hitting effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button holding effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the power cutoff occurrence timing and the button effect.

Hereinafter, examples of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then, the gaming procedure, the effect, the control mode, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machines>

FIG. 1 shows the front configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, the gaming board 50 is mounted on the gaming machine frame 11 described later. Of these, the gaming board 50 has different components such as accessories and designs depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by canceling the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11.

Further, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 for the gaming boards 50 of a plurality of models, it is possible to change the so-called model in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models. There is. In the following, first, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described, and then the board surface configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

The above-mentioned gaming machine frame 11 has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also referred to as “inner frame” or “main body frame”) 13, and a lower front plate (also referred to as “curtain plate”) 14. .. Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 10 to a predetermined position in the island equipment in the game hall (game store), and as shown in FIG. 1, glass. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion in which the front side is closed.

Further, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment, nailing is generally performed. Wood is used as the material of at least the portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island equipment. Instead of wood, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed can be used. Further, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment, it is also possible to adopt a construction method other than nailing.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via the hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge portion as the free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings backward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12, and is locked, so that the front frame 13 is closed again. When the front frame 13 is closed, the front frame 13 closes the portion between the upper and short portions of the outer frame 12 to the above-mentioned lower front plate 14.

The front frame 13 is locked to the outer frame 12 and released from the outer frame 12 via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is arranged in a portion below the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. Through the above-mentioned dish unit 16, the keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Then, when the game hall clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

With respect to such a front frame 13, the above-mentioned lower front plate 14 does not have a configuration for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end portion of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

The glass door 15 arranged at the front portion of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge portion as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, a game hall clerk horizontally swinging forward, and horizontally swinging backward from the open state to be locked to the front frame 13. As a result, it becomes closed.

The glass door 15 is locked to the front frame 13 and released from the front frame 13 via the above-mentioned locking device (not shown). That is, when the game hall clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 described above and turns the key clockwise, for example, in the direction opposite to that when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is a locking device. The glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking device is activated and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. Locks to the frame 13.

Further, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the dish unit 16 appears and can be operated, and an operation unit (not shown) of the locking mechanism can be operated by a game hall clerk, for example, downward. By the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened. Further, the dish unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the dish unit 16 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking mechanism is activated and the dish unit 16 is reopened. Locks to the front frame 13.

Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates detachably, and when the glass door 15 is in a closed state, the gaming board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am doing it. As the transparent plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used in addition to the glass plate. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage for guiding and collecting the game ball, which is a game medium.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a launch handle 20, and the like on the front surface thereof. Of these, the upper ball plate 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launcher 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via the launch handle 20, and plays games on the lower ball plate 19. It is equipped with mechanisms for various functions such as ejecting balls. Further, the lower ball plate 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball plate 18, and puts the game balls into a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. It is equipped with a mechanism for various functions such as discharge. In some cases, the ball box is integrated with the island equipment.

Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in the upper corner of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14, and the like, and through these speakers 21, depending on the game state, the effect pattern, and the like. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Further, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on the portion of the upper ball plate 18 that faces the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper part of the upper ball plate 18, and is located near the center of the upper ball plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is provided with a light emitting body for the operation button (not shown) inside, and is adapted to output light according to the effect pattern to be executed.

The operation button 22 may be projected upward in a predetermined case by using a drive source such as a motor. Although the details of the operation button 22 in this embodiment are not shown, the tip of the operation button 22 may be displaced upward by the drive of the elevating motor to form an operation lever input portion capable of performing input by tilting. It is possible and has a half-moon shaped eccentric cam to generate vibration in the drive system of the operating lever.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20A, a cross key 96 is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and the player can set various environments by using the cross key 96. As the contents of the environment setting, the volume adjustment (volume adjustment) of the speaker 21, the brightness adjustment (luminance adjustment) and the light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) of the effect display described later, or the change of the effect mode described later can be exemplified. .. Further, as the content of the environment setting, the automatic button operation for production (simply referred to as "automatic button operation") is performed so that the same effect as that operated by the player does not operate the operation button 22 proceeds. There is also an example of the setting of). Further, the gaming machine frame 11, for example, the front frame 13 or the like, can be provided with a display capable of performing an effect related to the game and a display related to the above-mentioned environment setting. Here, how to set the environment and various production modes and control modes related to the environment setting will be described later.

Further, in addition to the cross key, for example, a lever-shaped operating means, various types of touch panels, and the like can be used. Further, in FIG. 20A, the reference numeral 97 is a ball lending button, and the reference numeral 98 is a return button. Further, in FIG. 20A, the reference numeral 98 is a ball removal button for the upper ball dish 18.
<Back configuration of pachinko machine>

Next, the basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back surface of the front frame 13 is provided with a game ball passage for guiding or collecting the game ball, and a set base (also referred to as a “back set board”) 31 serving as a prize ball path forming mechanism. Is attached, and below this set board 31, a power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire gaming machine, and a payout control (also referred to as "prize ball control") board for controlling the gaming machine frame side. Each of the 103 is attached in a special transparent case. Further, on the back side of the game board 50, the main board (main control board) 102 that controls the entire game and the sub board 104 that executes the effect control based on the control command from the main board 102 are dedicated to each. It is housed in a transparent case and is provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set base 31. Further, the set base 31 also includes a launching device 43 and a launching control board 105 that controls the launching device 43.

In the set base 31, the prize ball tank 33 is provided above the above-mentioned opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island equipment and used as prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from the upper side of the game board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Has been done.

The above-mentioned prize ball passage 34 rectifies and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. Further, the above-mentioned payout unit 35 is in contact with the prize ball passage 34 and can discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game ball flowed down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as a prize ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply unit 32 described above is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts the AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine and supplies the AC power to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, the power switch 40 for operating the power supply unit 32 is arranged behind other devices as shown by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right portion in the figure. The power switch 40 is installed so as to be turned on when the power switch 40 is pushed below the center and tilted downward so that the dropped game ball does not turn off even if it hits directly.

As shown in FIG. 2, the above-mentioned payout control board 103 is arranged at a lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function for controlling the payout unit 35 in response to a command related to payout from the main board 102 or a loan request from the outside. Further, the launch control board 105 described above has a launch control function for controlling the launch device 43 so that the game ball (striking ball) is launched into the game area with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged in the lower center on the back side of the gaming board 50, and mainly includes various lottery functions, setting change functions, and control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104. It has a central processing function in the pachinko gaming machine 10. The above-mentioned sub-board 104 is arranged in the upper center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

Regarding the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) that plays a main role in effect control and a sub-sub-board (in this embodiment) that specializes in a specific effect function such as image creation. Although it is divided into sub-sub-board 302), the term "sub-board" includes these. Further, on the lower right side on the back side of the set board 31, an external relay terminal board (“frame relay terminal board” or the like) that relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, etc. to an external device of the pachinko gaming machine 10 etc. Also referred to as) 46 is provided.

The function of changing the setting on the main board 102 described above is a function of changing the setting value that defines the theoretical ease of hitting (the degree of advantage of the player). In this embodiment, six types of set values, which are integer values "1" to "6", are provided, and for each of these set values, a theoretical probability value for a big hit or a small hit, and a probability value for a small hit, and The payout rate is different. Such changes in the set values and the jackpot probability for each set value will be described later.
<Board composition of the game board>

Next, the above-mentioned game board 50 and parts (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood). Further, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The gaming board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the plate surface on which various board surface parts are mounted facing forward, and is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 by means of a closed glass door 15 or the like. It is designed to cover the front. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is formed by combining inner rails and outer rails formed in a curved strip shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 52, a first start winning opening 62, a second starting winning opening 63, a large winning opening device 90 (attacker unit), an operating opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and a plurality of general winning openings 72, and An out port (58) or the like, which is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area 52 and is hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. 1, is provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 including a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for the effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

Further, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown), a mechanism such as a windmill, and the like. It is also possible not to install a wind turbine. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the board surface configuration of the gaming board 50 as described above may vary depending on, for example, the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 10.
<Functions of board parts>

Subsequently, specific functions and configurations related to the above-mentioned individual board surface parts will be described. First, the above-mentioned first start winning opening 62 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, the first start winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is described above. It is input to the main board 102 of.

The above-mentioned second start winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening related to the second game, and is arranged on the right side of the first starting winning opening 62. The second starting winning opening 63 is a starting opening related to an ordinary electric accessory (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and when the ordinary symbol described later is stopped and displayed in a hit manner, one side is displayed. (The right side in FIG. 1) is provided with a blade (opening / closing blade) that operates to open. Then, the second start winning opening 63 expands by opening the opening / closing blade for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. It will be possible. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and may be configured not to provide the normal electric accessory at the start port related to the second game, or may be configured to arrange the ordinary electric accessory at the start port according to the first game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 includes a second starting winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening / closing blade. .. The output signal of the second start winning prize detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as a mode for opening the second starting winning opening 63. These opening modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as "short opening" or "short opening") or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as "long opening", "long opening", etc.). It is also possible to provide a middle opening mode set for the opening time between the short opening and the long opening.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 includes a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The output signal of the general prize detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by the plurality of general winning openings 72, the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning openings 72 are gathered at the place where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged. It is possible to detect. It is also possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 by positional relationship or by the number of prize balls (shared by the general winning detection device 73).

The above-mentioned large winning opening device 90 is formed in a case shape by combining transparent synthetic resin parts, and although not shown, the large winning opening device 90 is provided inside the large winning opening device 90 to be visible to the player. .. The large winning opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is provided inside with an opening / closing door 91 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening / closing this opening. Then, when a predetermined hit occurs, the large winning opening operates in a predetermined mode. Here, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is opened upward, and the opening / closing door 91 can slide in the front-rear direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the large winning opening device 90 includes a large winning opening detection device 78 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening (opening) solenoid for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening / closing door 91. Equipped with 80. Among these, the large prize detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening device 90, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

In addition, various devices can be adopted as the large winning opening device 90. For example, as the large winning opening device 90, one having a large winning opening opened forward, one having an opening upward, and the like can be adopted. Further, as the big winning opening device 90, a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening / closing patterns) related to the above-mentioned opening / closing door 91 for opening / closing the large winning opening are provided, and a plurality of different types of operation patterns are provided during the big hit game in which the special game is executed. It is possible to adopt a device that operates the opening / closing door 91. Further, as the large winning opening device 90, it is possible to adopt a device having a plurality of large winning openings and distributing game balls to each large winning opening according to the situation of the game.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned actuation port 68 includes a passage detection device 69, and the passage detection device 69 has a sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball in the actuation port 68. Then, the output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the ball entering.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned out port 58 includes an out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82. The out port sensor 82 detects a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out port 58 instead of being a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52. Then, the detection result of the out port sensor 82 has come to be used for counting out balls and displaying (base display) on the performance display unit (described later, the ball entry state display 808 of FIG. 5) described later. There is.

The center decoration 64 described above has a function of directing and the like, and an LED board on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED is transmitted through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs the light decoration (light effect). Further, the light decoration in the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game but also during the waiting for the start of the game and during the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount (light amount setting) and the like.

Further, a plurality of movable effect members are provided on the back surface (inside) of the center decoration 64, and these movable effect members form a gimmick for effect. These movable effect members are usually hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, although not shown, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60.

Further, in the present embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is also performed on the movable effect member. Further, the light decoration in the movable effect member is performed not only during the game but also during the waiting for the start of the game and during the preparation for the game for the player to adjust the amount of light.

Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed in a portion of the center decoration 64 on the right side when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a function of a flow path of a game ball in addition to the above-mentioned effect function. Have.

Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. Although not shown, the light guide plate 88 may be provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surfaces facing forward and backward, for example. Further, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64, and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

The light guide plate 88 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged side by side in a band shape so as to face one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate, for example. Then, in a normal state, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can visually recognize it without superimposing another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

However, the inside of each transparent plate constituting the light guide plate 88 is formed with fine irregularities that cannot be visually recognized under a normal environment. Then, at the time of executing the predetermined effect, for example, the above-mentioned light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light of the light source is emitted from the end face of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. To. Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and the diffused light develops and emerges a predetermined illustration or the like so that the player can recognize it.

Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88, the other transparent plate is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-mentioned illustrations and the like. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face at the time of a predetermined effect, an illustration or the like different from the above-mentioned one emerges so that the player can recognize it.

Here, it is possible to direct the light source not only to one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate but also to one of the upper and lower end faces, and to project another illustration or the like by the light of this light source. By doing so, it is possible to display two types of images per transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. It is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display in place of or in combination with the light guide plate 88.

As shown in FIG. 7, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 includes a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256 in which a large number of LED indicator lights are arranged. The symbol display board 256 corresponds to the ordinary symbol display unit 59 that displays the above-mentioned ordinary symbol, the first special symbol display unit 70 that displays the first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and the second game. The second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying the second special symbol (described later) and various other display units are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display unit 59 constitutes an ordinary symbol display device. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device.

In the following, the normal symbol is "normal symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "first special symbol", "special diagram 1", "special 1", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be referred to as "second special figure", "special figure 2", "special figure 2", or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".

Further, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 means that the game board 50 is provided, but as will be described later, the setting display unit provided on the main board 102 (setting of FIG. 5A described later). It is also possible to include a display device 807) and a performance display unit (ball entry state display device 808 in FIG. 5A described later) as a main control display device. In that case, the setting display unit and the performance display unit provided on the main board 102 can be referred to as, for example, a "main board side main control display device".
<Basic game procedure>

Subsequently, a gaming procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where the game ball is supplied to the above-mentioned upper ball plate 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned firing handle 20, the upper ball plate 18 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in the are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the game ball is guided by the above-mentioned inner rail and outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged from between the inner rail and the outer rail to the game area 52.

In a normal game, the player fires the game ball so as to flow down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located in the lower center portion of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is so-called left-handed. Further, the firing of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the above-mentioned launching device 43 while the player operates the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously released into the game area 52 fall in a direction corresponding to factors such as the speed, the incident angle (or the reflection angle), etc., while interfering with a plurality of game nails, wind turbines, and the like.

When the game ball falls into various winning openings such as the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 and the first starting winning opening 62, the winning ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls via the above-mentioned payout unit 35 according to the type of the winning opening. Further, when the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the subsequent game balls paid out cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. ..

Further, the game balls that have fallen into various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. Further, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out opening (58), and is guided to the back surface side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball that has reached the back surface side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter or a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 to the side of the above-mentioned island equipment. Is discharged.

The above-mentioned operating port 68 is a gate through which a game ball passes, unlike the above-mentioned winning opening for generating a safe ball. In the following, the term "winning opening" including the operating port 68 will be used, and the terms "falling in", "winning ball", and "winning" in this embodiment will be referred to as "passing" related to the gate unless otherwise specified. It shall include the meaning of.

When a game ball enters the operating port 68 and is detected in a game situation that is not a jackpot winning situation, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition (normal figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. , The normal symbol (described later) is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of a random number lottery (general drawing lottery) executed based on the entry of a ball into the operating port 68, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. Will be done.

When the game ball enters the start opening (here, the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), the predetermined fluctuation start condition (special figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. For example, the special symbol (described later) is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of a random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the ball entering the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. ..

In the effect display device 60 described above, the effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display differs depending on whether the special symbol is in variable display or stop display, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or an outlier. In relation to this, various predetermined modes of production are performed.

In the big hit game in which the special game is executed, the unit game in which the big winning opening device 90 is activated and the big winning opening (not shown) is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Further, in the special game, there are those in which the unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and those in which the unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. As the maximum number of times, 15 times (15R (round)) and the like can be exemplified, and as the number of times less than the maximum number of times, 5 times (5R) and the like can be exemplified. Further, it can be exemplified that the maximum number of times is 10 times (10R) and the number of times less than the maximum number of times is 6 times (6R) or 2 times (2R). In addition, it is possible to provide a small hit game as a game for operating the large winning opening device 90.

In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding large winning opening, or when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds). The end condition is met and the big prize opening is closed. As a condition for ending the unit game, the total opening time indicates that the upper limit is set even when the opening of multiple large winning openings is divided in one unit game. ing. By opening multiple large winning openings within a unit game, technical intervention can be improved, and by opening one time, it is possible to easily get a ball, so that the game playability during big hits can be broadened. The opening mode of the large winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game property in which a plurality (here, two) of games corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed is adopted. That is, in this embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into a first game in which the first start winning opening 62 is used and a second game in which the second starting winning opening 63 is used. Then, in a situation where the second game is prioritized over the first game and at the same time the start condition of the game is satisfied, the second game is preferentially executed and the first game is reserved. The first game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, no priority is set between the first game and the second game, and the variable display of the first game and the second game, that is, the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in parallel. It is also possible to adopt a game-like property that can be executed. Then, when such a game property is adopted, a situation may occur in which the first game and the second game are executed at the same time (variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game, depending on the result of the above-mentioned big hit lottery. This specific game is different from the above-mentioned special game, and is in a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In this embodiment, as the specific game, a probability fluctuation game (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation"), a variation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction"), and a ball entry facilitation game are provided. As the specific game, there are those in which only one of probabilistic change, time reduction, and ball entry facilitation game is executed, and there are those in which a plurality of specific games are performed at the same time, and different game characteristics are created depending on the combination thereof.

When the specific game is executed, the notification regarding the launch position and launch timing of the game ball recommended by the image or voice of the effect display device 60 (for example, a right-handed effect for urging right-handed hitting) is executed. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and launches the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is launched. , Enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. Further, the game ball released from the center decoration 64 hits a plurality of game nails and other structures and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting.

A part of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 passes through the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the passage detecting device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operating port 68, the above-mentioned normal symbol is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped in a predetermined hit mode. Then, the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 expands for a predetermined time according to the hitting mode.

In this embodiment, the game ball that has reached the right side of the game area 52 can be guided to the periphery of the second starting winning opening 63 and the large winning opening device 90 by a nail or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entry facilitation game is added to the time reduction, which is a specific game, and during the time reduction, the opening extension of the normal electric accessory and the normal electric role are performed by the ball entry facilitation game. The combination of the probability fluctuation of the object and the time reduction of the ordinary electric accessory is performed, and the long opening of the above-mentioned ordinary electric accessory becomes easy to be executed. Then, during the time reduction, when the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 is expanded once, one or a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63. ing.

When a big hit occurs and a special game is executed, the big prize opening (not shown) of the large winning opening device 90 is opened, but during this special game, the player is hit right. It is possible to make it. Then, in this case, before the start of the special game, it is conceivable to execute a right-handed effect that urges the player to perform a right-handed effect by using an image or sound of the effect display device 60.
<Example of jackpot type: ST>

Next, the types of jackpots in the above-mentioned first game and second game will be described. First, as a big hit, a big hit that repeats the above-mentioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "15R big hit") and a big hit that repeats the unit game 7 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "7R big hit") are provided. ..

The above-mentioned unit game is started in a special game with the opening of the large winning opening in the large winning opening device 90, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) has passed in the large winning opening. It ends when the number of game balls (more than one) falls, and the big prize opening is closed. A special game in which such a unit game is repeated is based on a so-called ball-out (sometimes referred to as a ball-out) game for the purpose of having a player acquire a game ball. Further, among various big hits, the 15R big hit and the 7R big hit are intended to make the player acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a type of a part of the jackpot, for example, a part of the 15R jackpot or a part of the 15R jackpot can be provided with a non-probable change (15R normal or 7R normal). In addition, for example, even if it is a 15R jackpot, the opening period of the jackpot is short, and it is possible to obtain only the same amount of balls as the 5R jackpot (15R probability variation (actual 5R)), or a 5R jackpot. Even so, it is possible to provide a device that can hardly acquire a ball (for example, only a minimum amount (for example, one ball) can enter the large winning opening device 90 in each R).

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific game state such as probability change and time reduction is generated when the big hit game is completed for a predetermined specific big hit. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, for example, it is possible to provide a big hit that does not give at least one of the privilege functions such as probability change, time saving, and ball entry facilitation game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, it is possible to make different types of jackpots depending on the difference in the duration of the probability change and the difference in the duration of the shortened time. In addition, when the electric chew support is also executed during the time reduction, the "duration of the electric chew support" can be rephrased as the "duration of the electric chew support". Further, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support among the time saving and the electric chew support, and conversely, execute only the electric chew support among the time saving and the electric chew support.

However, the combination of the big hit and the probability change, the time reduction, etc. is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, the probability variation may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all the 15R jackpots in this embodiment are 15R jackpots with probabilistic changes (15R probable changes), and all 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with probabilistic changes (7R probable changes).
<Hits other than big hits>

Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a type of hit other than the big hit. In the first game (or the second game), when this small hit occurs, it is possible to adopt a game property in which the large winning opening device 90 is opened, for example, once.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

Next, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described with reference to FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 on the game board side arranges a large number (36 in this case) of LED indicator lights in two rows (upper and lower) on the symbol display board 256. It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lamps in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lamps in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. In addition, the distance between the LED indicator lights, which are in a vertical positional relationship, is also constant for all 18 LEDs.

In the main control display device 53, the 10 LED indicator lights at the right end in the upper row when viewed from the front are used for information display according to the special figure 1, and the 10 LED indicator lights at the right end in the lower row are shown in the special figure 2. It has come to be used for displaying such information. In the upper and lower rows, the two LED indicator lamps at the right end constitute a first special symbol storage display unit 83 and a second special symbol storage display unit 84 that indicate the number of reserved storages. The eight LED indicators arranged on the left side of the first special symbol storage display unit 83 constitute the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70, and 8 arranged on the left side of the second special symbol storage display unit 84. The LED indicator lamps constitute the second special symbol display unit 71 described above.

The first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of variable display and stop display of the first special symbol related to the first game depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 62, and the variable display thereof is predetermined. When stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. It should be noted that the first special symbol display unit 70 has a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8) when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, except when all the LEDs are turned off by the combination of turning on and off the LED indicator lights. -1) It is possible to display the type of identification information. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off of the eight LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed, but all cases of big hits and misses (even if small hits are installed). Since it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of being turned off, it is possible to display a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8-1) types of identification information.

Similarly, for the above-mentioned second special symbol display unit 71, depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lamps arranged in a row in the horizontal direction, a maximum of 255 (= 2) is displayed when the second special symbol is stopped. ^ 8-1) It is possible to display various types of identification information. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off of the eight LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed, but all cases of big hits and misses (even if small hits are installed). Since it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of being turned off, it is possible to display a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8-1) types of identification information.

Further, in the upper row, the four LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display unit 70 are used for displaying information related to a normal symbol (normal diagram). The two LED indicators arranged on the left side of the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 constitute a normal symbol storage display unit 85 for displaying the reserved storage number of the normal symbol, and on the left side thereof. The two LED indicator lights arranged side by side constitute a normal symbol display unit 59.

The normal symbol display unit 59 is adapted to perform variable display and stop display of the normal symbol depending on the operation mode of the two LED indicator lights. Then, the normal symbol display unit 59 can display up to 3 (= 2 ^ 2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off the two LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed, but it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of turning off all the lights when hit or miss. Therefore, a maximum of 3 (= 2 ^ 2-1) types of identification information can be displayed. However, as a modification, unlike the first special symbol display unit 70 and the second special symbol display unit 71, the normal symbol display unit 59 may be completely turned off when it is out of alignment, and in that case, the maximum is 4 (=). 2 ^ 2) It is possible to display the type of identification information.

Further, the round number display unit 86 is composed of two LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 59 in the upper row and two four LED indicator lamps on the left end of the lower row located below the normal symbol display unit 59. Further, in the lower row, the four LED indicator lamps between the round number display unit 86 and the second special symbol display unit 71 are the first status display unit (status indicator lamp 1) 87a and the second status display unit in order from the left. (Status indicator 2) 87b, a third status display unit (status indicator 3) 87c, and a fourth status display unit (status indicator 4) 87d.

The first state display unit 87a described above is lit when the probability fluctuation function according to the special figure is activated, and the second state display unit 87b is lit when the probability fluctuation function according to the normal drawing is activated. There is. Further, the second state display unit 87b is lit even when the opening is extended, which is the so-called electric support (electric chew support) state. Further, the third state display unit 87c is used as a separate (right-handed) state indicator light. Further, the fourth state display unit 87d is used as an error indicator lamp.

Here, the above-mentioned third state display unit 87c (separate state indicator light) is lit not only during the electric support state but also during the big hit. In addition, during the big hit, even if it is during the consecutive villas, the flag (electric support flag) for setting the electric support state is off. Further, the third state display unit 87c can be turned on even when the normal electric accessory in a state other than these (normal time) is long open.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the above-mentioned main board 102. The various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. Note that, among the various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown in FIG.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

When the game ball passes through the above-mentioned operating port 68, the normal symbol display unit 59 blinks, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) elapses after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in the out-of-order mode (out-of-shape mode), it is normal if the ball enters the subsequent operating port after the lapse of a predetermined stop time (normal figure stop fixed time). The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the process shifts to the next variable display as in the case of the loss, while the hit of the previously stopped and displayed normal symbol is displayed. Depending on the embodiment, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

The number of holdings related to this normal symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the actuating opening 68 while the normal symbol is changing, and indicates the number of times the normal symbol lottery has not yet been executed. That is, if the symbol variation previously performed in the normal symbol storage display unit 85 is not completed, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation is completed, the variation start condition is satisfied and is held. Based on the stored lottery result (pending lottery result), a new symbol change will be started. The upper limit of the number of holdings is 4, and the holding storage does not exceed 4 pieces.

For the display of four types of numerical values by the normal symbol storage display unit 85, for example, when the number of holds is 0 (no hold), both are turned off, and when the number of holds is 1, one of them is turned on. It is possible to turn off the other. If the number of holds is 2, both are turned on, if the number of holds is 3, one is turned on and the other is blinked, and if the number of holds is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

The display of the reserved number of the first special symbol by the above-mentioned first special symbol storage display unit 83 is performed by displaying four kinds of information with two LED indicator lights as one set. The display of the reserved number of the second special symbol by the above-mentioned second special symbol storage display unit 84 is also performed by displaying four types of information with the two LED indicator lights as one set.

When the game situation in which the right-handed hit should be performed is reached, the display is performed in a predetermined mode using the third state display unit 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In this embodiment, the third state display unit 86c is set to turn off when the game is left-handed, which is a game situation to be left-handed, and to be turned on when right-handed, which is a game situation to be right-handed.
<Structure of production display device and basic display contents>

Subsequently, the configuration of the above-mentioned effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the above-mentioned main control display device 53, a story display, and the like are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 displays the effect as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B. A variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a symbol (also referred to as a “decorative symbol”) 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect symbol 190 is composed of a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. In the following, the left middle right effect symbols 190a to 190c may be described as "effect symbol 190" or "effect symbol 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 has nine types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "9". The other effect symbols, the middle effect symbol 190b and the right effect symbol 190c, also have nine types of element symbols meaning the numbers "1" to "9", like the left effect symbol 190a. The details of the above-mentioned element patterns will be described later.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed in the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the variable display of the effect symbol, in the present embodiment, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are individually moved (vertically scrolled) in the vertical direction, and the above-mentioned element symbols are sequentially made to appear in the display area 194. Is executed by. As the scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, various modes such as a horizontal direction, a rotation, a turn, and the like can be adopted in addition to the vertical direction.

Further, the effect symbol 190 may form a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same number, such as "7" and "7", and have the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of the reach (tempai) cannot form the combination with the other effect symbols. It is changing.

As the display mode of the effect symbol 190, many types of "reach" and various other types can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and the details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be a thing. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, for example, by adding an additional display body.

Further, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and to form a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged avoiding the outside of the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

Next, the configuration related to the above-mentioned setting change and the method of setting change will be described. FIG. 5A shows a partially enlarged state in which the main substrate 102 is housed in the transparent substrate case 801. FIG. 5B shows a cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 5A. It is shown enlarged and outlined. In FIG. 5A, the substrate case 801 is formed of a colorless and transparent plastic material in a box shape having a divided structure (for example, a two-divided structure).

The divided structure of the board case 801 is, for example, a structure in which a cover body is combined with a board holder that holds the main board 102, and the board holder and the cover body are connected via a caulking structure that leaves a trace at the time of separation. Can be adopted. In the board case 801, the connector 802 (shown with a code only partially) used for connecting to other devices such as the sub-main board 301 and the like is formed in a size that does not cause a gap as much as possible. It is exposed from the opened opening.

The main board 102 is visible through the transparent board case 801. In FIG. 5A, the CPU (main CPU) 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the above-mentioned setting display 807, and the above-mentioned input are also shown. The spherical state display 808 is shown by a broken line, and the illustration of other devices is omitted. Of these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area where the test terminal is mounted only when the ball ejection test or the like is performed in the product test stage, and the test terminal is mounted on the main board 102 in the mass production stage. Not.

The above-mentioned setting display 807 displays the selected setting value only when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. Then, the setting display 807 is currently set with respect to the setting value for making the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device (the operation probability of the device that continuously operates the special electric accessory, the so-called jackpot probability) different. The value can be displayed. Further, a 7-segment display for one digit is used for the setting display 807. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, a dot display unit is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

A setting key cylinder (also referred to as a "setting key switch") 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as a "setting change switch") 810 are arranged in the vicinity of the setting display 807, and the setting key cylinder 809 and the setting are arranged. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the setting change operation unit 811 opens the setting change opening / closing lid (hereinafter referred to as “open / close lid”) 812 of the board case 801 to show FIG. 5 (a). It is designed to be exposed as shown.

The opening / closing lid 812 is, for example, integrally molded with the substrate case 801 via a resin hinge, and the protruding knob portion 813 is pulled by a finger to open it as shown by an arrow B while resisting an elastic force. Can be exemplified. When closing the opening / closing lid 812, the lid is laid down from the state shown in FIG. 5 (b) (not shown), and the free end side is locked to the substrate case 801.

The above-mentioned ball entry state display 808 is used as a performance display unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and can display a base (value of prize balls per number of shots) for each game state. In this embodiment, as shown by an enlarged solid line in the lower right portion of FIG. 5A, a 4-digit 7-segment display is used for the ball entry status display 808. Further, a dot display unit (reference numeral omitted) is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display of each digit of the ball entry status display 808.

In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry status display 808, the setting change operation unit 811, and the setting display 807 are wrapped in a plan view (rear view of the gaming machine). It is arranged so that it does not overlap (does not overlap). Further, in order to prevent misidentification of the display, the ball entry status display 808 and the setting display 807 are arranged at intervals of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more).

In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5B is the free end when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened, and the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. By doing so, while giving consideration to making it easier to change the set value, the ball entry status display 808 can be placed on the rotation axis (fixed end) side when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened. When the gaming machine frame is opened, consideration is given to prevent the displayed information from being unintentionally viewed by the player. Of course, if priority is given to fraud prevention when changing the set value, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 should be formed on the right side of the main board 102 when viewed from the front (the rotation axis side of the gaming machine frame 11). Just do it.

Here, in this embodiment, in consideration of the above points, an opening / closing lid 812 is provided in the portion corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting change operation unit 811 cannot be easily accessed, and the set value is set. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured so as not to be exposed except for the case of change work, confirmation work of setting information, and the like. In the following, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b).

First, in the upper surface portion of the board case 801 having a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811, the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion slot (sign omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. Further, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main board 102, other electronic components (for example, CPU 501) of the main board 102 cannot be accessed through the opening 816. It has become. Further, the setting key cylinder 809 in which the setting key insertion port (signature omitted) is formed corresponding to the opening 816, and the push-type setting change button 810 are moved up and down when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, the opening / closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable / closable in a state of being urged in the direction of always closing the opening 816.

Next, an outline of the operation method such as setting change and the operation of setting change / setting display will be briefly described. When confirming the set value, first operate the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) to turn off the power, then open the opening / closing lid 812 at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and set the key cylinder 809. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power without pressing the initialization switch 544. By this operation, the current set value (for example, if the range of the set value is "1" to "6", the corresponding numerical value) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is set. A part of the segment (here, the dot part) is driven to light to indicate that there is. In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is running (for example, control based on the input related to the progress of the game such as winning detection of the starting winning opening can be executed), the setting value change processing is performed. Is configured so that it cannot be used.

On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and the setting key is used. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809 and rotate the key to the right. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value is blinking on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and some segments (here, the dot part) are turned off (off) to indicate that the setting change mode is set. Is displayed.

In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new setting value incremented by +1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting display 807. The administrator in the amusement park operates the setting change button 810 so that the setting value becomes an arbitrary (target) setting value. In this embodiment, if the set value at the time of turning on the power is "1", "1", "2" ... "5", "6", "1" each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once. It is changed like ".

Then, by operating the setting change button, the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated to the left with the setting changed to an arbitrary setting value (the arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807), and the setting is made. After the change process is completed and the current set value is lit and displayed on the setting display 807 and some segments (here, the dot part) are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), the set value is displayed. And both the dots are turned off.
<Electrical configuration of pachinko gaming machines>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described, but here, the main electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the power supply board 251 is connected to the above-mentioned payout control board 103, game ball rental device connection terminal board 106, launch control board 107, and the like. Further, the main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via the frame relay terminal board 108. Further, a main symbol display board (also referred to as a "design display board") 256 and a sub-main board 301 constituting the above-mentioned main control display device 53 are connected to the main board 102, and the sub-main board 301 is connected to the sub-main board 301. , The above-mentioned sub-sub board 302 is connected.

The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2) described above. A frame effect connection board 300 and a game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown) are connected to the power supply board 251. Of these, a game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown) is connected to a ball. A ball coin operation board or the like used for coin operation is connected.

A touch switch 310 provided on the launch handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20 (a)) is connected to the launch control board 105 described above. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected to a firing touch lever and a lock fitting for grounding. When a player, a game hall clerk, or the like touches the firing handle 20 with a finger, the touch switch (also referred to as “touch sensor”) 310 detects this contact and changes the mode of the output signal.

Further, the launch control board 105 is connected to the launch intensity volume 311, the launch stop switch 312, and the launch device 43 described above. Of these, the firing intensity volume 1311 is used to change the firing intensity of the game ball according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20. The launch stop switch 312 is used to detect an operation with a part of the finger (thumb or the like) holding the launch handle 20 and stop the launch.

The electric power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the main board 102 is provided with a main control display device 53, each passage detection device 69a, 69b, and a normal electric motor via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). Object solenoid 76, first start prize detection device 74, second start prize detection device 75, general prize detection device 73, large prize detection device 78, large prize opening (open) solenoid 80, magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor (illustration) Omitted) etc. are connected. Here, in this embodiment, the connection of the first start winning detection device 74 and the second start winning detection device 75 to the main board 102 is directly performed without going through the game board connection board or the game board relay terminal board. It is done.

The power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub-main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303. Further, in the sub-main board 301, in addition to the above-mentioned frame connection board 303 and frame effect connection board 300, the glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and the glass frame effect connection board 306 are used for the effect of the gaming machine frame 11. Each device is connected.

As the production equipment in the pachinko gaming machine 10, there are a frame illuminated L2 board 317, a frame illuminated R2 board 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, an effect button board, an elevating motor, an effect button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, and the like are also provided, but the figure is not complicated in FIG. As such, these illustrations are also omitted.

Further, a device for a game board, a device for displaying an image, a device for voice control, and the like are also connected to the sub-main board 301. Among these, as a device for a game board, there is a board surface illuminated connection board 331. The board surface illumination connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. The center illumination board 332 used for the illumination of the center decoration 64 is connected to the board surface illumination connection substrate 331. Further, although not shown, the effect sensor substrate, other illumination boards, the effect motor, and the like are also connected to the board surface illumination connection board 331, although not shown. Here, although not shown, various lighting boards and effect motors are connected to the effect interface board 304.

The above-mentioned image display device connected to the sub-main board 301 includes a sub-sub board (image control board) 302, and the sub-sub board 302 has a liquid crystal unit (also a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. 42 is connected. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the effect interface board 304 via the image display connection B board is also provided. Further, as the above-mentioned voice control device connected to the sub-main board 301, there are a voice control board (voice board) 339 and a voice ROM (ROM) board 340.

Subsequently, the configuration of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The "ROM" and "RWM" described in this embodiment are comprehensive concepts including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number are included. A random number circuit for the purpose is provided. Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers, which are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main board 102 is equipped with an input / output port 505 for inputting / outputting data to / from an external device of the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 503 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501.

Subsequently, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted on the payout control board 103. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Further, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform a payout process, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 513 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501.

The above-mentioned sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. .. The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RWM 523, output port 528, and the like are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

The CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for displaying the symbol transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RWM523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Memory.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 described above is performed in the form of one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since the one-way communication between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 is ensured, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301. In order to enable such communication in one direction, for example, a communication control means (buffer circuit or the like) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub-main board 301 is performed by using this communication control means. It is possible to do it through.

The sub-sub board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, a bus line (not shown), and the like. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The output side of the sub-main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and each device such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533 is connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The above-mentioned video memory 540 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540, the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 is used. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the symbols are superimposed in the order of the layers for which the priority is determined in advance, and the symbols are displayed on the effect display device 60.
<Power supply and data backup>

The power supply board 251 described above includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies an operating voltage required for each of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside and applies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. And supply to other predetermined equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 sends an initialization signal to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 to clear the backup data when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by the administrator of the game store, for example, when the power is turned on. It has a circuit to output. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can retain (back up) the stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. Then, when the above-mentioned initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the data (backup data) backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 is displayed. It will be cleared. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main board is configured to transition to the setting change state according to the input status of the initialization switch 544 and the input status of the setting key when the power is turned on. It is configured so that the presence / absence of initialization, the range of initialization, and the like can be determined according to the signal from the initialization switch circuit unit 543 and the input signal related to the setting key.

The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103, and the backed up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. You may do it. Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated when the power supply is turned on, the backup data for the main board 102 and the backup data of a part of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the payout initialization switch (not shown).

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is capable of holding (backing up) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 503a includes a stack pointer at the time of power failure when the power is cut off (when a power failure occurs) due to a power failure (including a so-called momentary power failure due to a momentary voltage drop). , Each register, an area for storing values such as I / O. Then, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power is cut off based on the information of the backup area 503a when the normal power supply is started up and the power failure is resolved. Here, regarding the power cutoff, in the following, it may be referred to as "power cutoff" in addition to "power cutoff", but both have the same meaning.

Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is cut off by the power off processing (described later), and restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in the power on processing (described later) when the power is turned on. .. As the backup area 503a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply.

Further, with respect to the RWM 513 in the payout control board 103, as in the RWM 503 of the main board 102, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 so that data can be retained (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at the time of power failure, the values of each register, I / O, etc. when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (when a power failure occurs). Area. Then, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power is cut off based on the information of the backup area 513a when the normal power supply is started up or the power failure is resolved.

Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power cutoff process in the payout control board 103, and restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is performed when the power is turned on in the payout control board 103. It is executed in the control start process). As the backup area 513a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to the backup power supply, as in the case of the main board 102.

The main board 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the DC stable (for example, 30 volts) voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251. This voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power cutoff) is detected and the above-mentioned power failure signal is output. Based on the input of such a power cutoff signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power cutoff process.

The electrical characteristics of the main board 102 and the like are such that even after the DC stable voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage at which the power failure signal is output, a sufficient time is required to execute a predetermined process such as a power supply disconnection process. During that time, the output of the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is configured to be maintained at a normal value.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be individually supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 in a separate system. You may do so.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be arranged in a portion other than the main board 102. For example, a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251 and a power failure signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 on the power supply board 251 to each board. It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the main board 102 may be able to exert the function of the power supply board 251. In this case, it is conceivable to form the power supply unit 541 on the main board 102.

Further, a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output a power failure signal and perform power failure processing based on the power failure signal. Further, of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided only on the payout control board 103, and the power failure signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the above-mentioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, and the like are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. Further, as the trigger for executing the above-mentioned power cutoff process, a hardware-like one that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. There is a software-like process that confirms the power off flag set when a voltage drop is detected by periodic interrupt processing based on the settings.

In this embodiment, the power supply cutoff process is performed based on a hardware-like opportunity by NMI. Then, the signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal, but also when noise is mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. The transition to the power cutoff process can also be performed based on a software-like method, as will be described later as another embodiment. Further, it is also possible to set the power supply cutoff flag based on the power supply cutoff signal input to the NMI terminal and use it as a trigger for executing the power supply cutoff process. Here, the data is backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, but the data is not limited to this. For example, the data of the storage area is backed up by the sub-main board 301, and the main board 301 is the main. It is also possible to perform data backup in the same manner as the board 102 or the payout control board 103.

Next, the basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of this embodiment fulfills various functions such as ball entry determination, lottery, and command transmission by the function of each of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 6 shows typical functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub-main board 301, and the sub-sub board 302. Among these, the main board 102 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a first lottery means 111, a second lottery means 112, a general drawing lottery means 113, a hold control means 114, a main display control means 115, and a special game control means 116. It includes specific game control means 117, open / close control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like. Then, by these functional means, the main board 102 has a lottery related to special symbols, a lottery related to ordinary symbols, hold control, main control display, special game, specific game, open / close control, advance information, as described in order below. Execute notification etc.

The above-mentioned ball entry determination means 110 is a sensor provided at each winning opening for entering a game ball into each winning opening (operating opening, various starting winning openings, large winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.). Judgment is made based on the signal output from.
<< Win / Fail Lottery Function for Special Symbols >>

The above-mentioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning opening 62. The first lottery means 111 has the functions of the first lottery value acquisition means 121, the first hit / fail determination means 122, the first symbol determination means 123, and the first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 70 of the above-mentioned main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7).

Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of the second lottery value acquisition means 125, the second winning / failing determination means 126, the second symbol determination means 127, and the second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the above-mentioned first lottery means 111 sets the value of the big hit random number related to the first lottery as the first winning / failing lottery value when the ball enters the first starting winning opening 62. Get as. Further, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 sets the value of the big hit random number related to the second lottery to the second hit or fail when the ball enters the second start winning opening 63. Obtained as a lottery value.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / failing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / failing lottery value are a hardware random number (hard random number) and a software random number (soft random number). It is generated by the calculation (addition) used. As a hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a random number circuit for 16 bits is used, and as a software random number, a value updated for each interruption by a random number generation program in software is used. In addition, either one of the hardware random number and the software random number may be used.

The first winning / failing determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a winning / failing determination based on the first winning / failing lottery value, and whether or not the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. To judge. Similarly, the second winning / failing determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 makes a winning / failing determination based on the above-mentioned second winning / failing lottery value, and the second winning / failing lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. Judge whether it is applicable or not. In the winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 122 and the second winning / failing determination means 126, the winning / failing determination table (for example, FIG. 9 (for example, FIG. a)) is used. Here, the normal time probability change big hit shown in FIG. 9A indicates a random number value range that is always a big hit, and the probability change big hit is a random number value range that is a big hit only at the time of probability change. It is shown that.

When the first symbol determining means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determining means 127 in the second lottery means 112 win either the jackpot in the jackpot lottery relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number value (symbol random number) related to the symbol determination, and the type of the special symbol.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a "design random number per special symbol" or a "symbol random number" related to the special symbol. Further, in this embodiment, the type of hit includes a small hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are special in the case where the small hit is won in the big hit lottery related to the special symbol. The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10 (c)).

Similar to the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery value, the symbol lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening. In addition, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of hit, and the type of big hit and the presence or absence of a small hit are determined in association with the acquired symbol lottery value.

The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the variation pattern of the special symbol in the corresponding special symbol display unit based on the special symbol variation pattern table. decide. The special figure fluctuation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a pattern lottery value which is a random number value (variation pattern random number) related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening, as in the case of the winning / failing lottery value described above. Further, the fluctuation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol correspond to various game situations such as, for example, at the time of big hit, at the time of miss, whether there is reach, whether there is a time reduction, the number of holdings, the number of fluctuations after the big hit, and the like. A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

The fluctuation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the start to the stop of the fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, for example, from 1 second or less to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, the fluctuation time is set as the end condition of the fluctuation display in each special symbol fluctuation pattern, and the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 7) is special. When the fluctuation display of the symbol is started and the specified fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Most of the special map fluctuation patterns to be selected at the time reduction are set so that the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the special map fluctuation pattern to be selected at the non-time reduction, in other words, at the time reduction. It can be said that the average value per fluctuation of the selected fluctuation time is shorter than the average value per fluctuation of the fluctuation time selected at the non-time reduction. Further, with respect to the reduced working hours (shorter working hours game), it can be said that the game is in a game state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is high (a state in which the time related to one variation is short). However, the special map fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the time is not shortened and the number of holdings is 4, include those having a shorter fluctuation time than the specific special map fluctuation pattern during the time reduction. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, most of the fluctuation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as at the time of probability change have an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). Then, in such a situation, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the effect accompanying the fluctuation display are executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the extremely short time.
<< Relationship between the winning / failing random number related to the special symbol and the set value >>

Next, the relationship between the winning / failing random number and the set value related to the special symbol will be described. FIG. 9A shows a hit / fail random number for the set value “1” among the set values “1” to “6” in this embodiment. Regarding the hit / fail random number table of the set value "1" shown in FIG. 9 (a), in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the jackpot value at the normal (probability) time in the random number value range "0 to 65535". Is "0 to 205". Further, in normal times, the random value range "206 to 64875" is an outlier in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability (at the time of probability change), "206 to 615" is the big hit value in both the first lottery and the second lottery. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number value range "616 to 64875" is an outlier in both the normal time and the probable change time. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number value range "64876 to 65535" is a small hit value in both the normal time and the probable change time.

FIG. 12 shows a list of hit values for each set value. Of these, as for the set value "1", as shown in FIG. 9A, "0 to 205" is a normal jackpot value. Therefore, the number of random numbers is 206, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/318 (≈206/65536). On the other hand, for the set value "2", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 206". Therefore, the number of random numbers is 207, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/317 (≈207/65536).

Further, regarding the set value "3", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 207". The number of random numbers is 208, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/315 (≈208/65536). Regarding the set value "4", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 208". The number of random numbers is 209, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/314 (≈209 / 65536).

Further, regarding the set value "5", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 209". The number of random numbers is 210, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/312 (≈208/65536). Regarding the set value "6", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 210". The number of random numbers is 211, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/311 (≈211/65536). In this way, the range of the jackpot value is determined so that the jackpot probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases.

At the time of high probability, the jackpot value is "0 to 615" for the set value "1", and the jackpot probability is 1/106. For the set values "2" to "6", the jackpot values are "0 to 618", "0 to 621", "0 to 624", "0 to 627", and "0 to 630" in order. , The approximate jackpot probabilities are "1/106", "1/105", "1/105", "1/104", and "1/104" in order.

Here, the reason why the jackpot probability is explained so as to include the same value such as "1/105" and "1/104" is because the jackpot probability is expressed by rounding the decimal point. In the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot value is determined so that the jackpot probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases. Further, the multiplication factor of the probability between the low probability time and the high probability time is "3 times" for all the set values, which is common.

For small hits, the random value range is "64476 to 65535" regardless of the set value in both the normal time and the high probability time. Therefore, the probability of small hits is 1/99 regardless of the probability state or the set value. Further, in the example of FIG. 12, the design values of the payout rate are 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values "1" to "6", respectively.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 9A and FIG. 12, "0" which is the minimum value of the numerical range is set as a jackpot value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "0" may be excluded from the jackpot value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud in case of fraud that intentionally minimizes the pass / fail random value updated by resetting the power supply or the like. Further, it is possible not to assign "0" to a small hit or to assign a maximum value (here, "65535") to a big hit or a small hit.

In this embodiment, a preliminary determination (so-called look-ahead) is performed on the winning / failing lottery result performed by using the winning / failing random numbers shown in FIGS. 9A and 12, but the preliminary determination of the winning / failing lottery result is shown in FIG. It will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<< Various lottery functions related to ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The normal map lottery means 113 includes a normal map lottery value acquisition unit 129, a normal map winning / failing determination unit 130, a normal symbol symbol determination unit 131, and a normal map pattern determination means 132. Then, when the passage of the game ball in the operating port 68 is detected by the above-mentioned entry determination means 110, the general drawing lottery means 113 executes a lottery (general drawing lottery) related to the normal symbol based on the detection result. do.

In this normal figure lottery, the normal figure lottery value which is a random number (random number of the normal symbol) related to the normal symbol is acquired by the normal figure lottery value acquisition means 129, and the normal figure determination table is made by the normal symbol determination means 131. Referenced. In this normal figure determination table, the correspondence relationship between the normal figure lottery value and the type of the normal symbol is defined. Then, the normal figure winning / failing determination means 130 determines whether or not the normal symbol associated with the normal figure lottery value corresponds to a hit, and if it corresponds to a hit, the type of hit is determined. Will be done.

Further, the normal map pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the operating port 68, and the acquired normal map pattern lottery value is used by the normal map pattern determining means 132 to obtain a variation pattern related to the normal symbol (normal map variation pattern). ) Is determined. Each normal figure fluctuation pattern is associated with a normal figure pattern lottery value which is a random number related to the normal figure fluctuation pattern (a normal figure fluctuation pattern random number), and is linked to the acquired normal figure pattern lottery value, and the situation of the game. The pattern of fluctuations in the normal map is determined according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the normal figure lottery value, which is a random number related to the ordinary symbol, and the normal figure pattern lottery value are created by using only software random numbers.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 has a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a normal figure hold means 135. Of these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering a ball when a new entry into the first starting winning opening 62 does not satisfy the predetermined variation start condition related to the first special symbol. Information related to various random numbers (first winning / failing lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) (first special figure holding storage information) is temporarily held and stored. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the first special symbol is set to four, and the hold related to the first special symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was executed when the above-mentioned ball was entered is completed, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned entry is further completed. If there is no hold for the first special symbol, the change start condition for the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol change for the first special symbol is permitted.

The above-mentioned second holding means 134 is also acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the second special symbol is not satisfied when the ball is newly entered into the second starting winning opening 63. Information related to various random numbers (second winning / failing lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored.

When the change display of the second special symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered, is completed, the change start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied, and the new symbol change for the second special symbol is satisfied. Will be allowed. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four as in the case of the first special symbol.

In the above-mentioned first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and controlled by the special game, the fluctuation start condition is determined after the special game is completed.
<< Functions related to holding ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing holding means 135 will be described. The normal figure holding means 135 is a random number (a normal figure lottery) acquired by entering a ball if a predetermined fluctuation start condition related to a normal symbol is not satisfied when a ball is entered at the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1). Information related to (value, etc.) (Public map hold storage information) is temporarily held and stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the normal symbol is set to 4, and the hold related to the normal symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered as described above, is completed and the normal electric accessory is not operating, the fluctuation start condition related to the normal symbol is satisfied, and the new normal symbol is related. It will be allowed to change the design.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a normal figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among these, the first special symbol control means 136 is the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 7) according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. Display (for example, blinking display in which a predetermined part of LED indicator lights blink every 100 msec) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the first special symbol display unit 70.

Further, if the variation start condition relating to the above-mentioned second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, and the second special symbol display unit 71 ( (See FIG. 7), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the second special symbol display unit 71.

Further, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol control means 138 follows the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol lottery means 113, and the normal symbol display unit 59 (see FIG. 7). ), The variable display of the normal symbol is performed. Further, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the normal symbol display unit 59.

Further, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holds related to the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, and ordinary symbol. Then, the display of these reserved numbers is performed by the first special symbol storage display unit 83, the second special symbol storage display unit 84, and the normal symbol storage display unit 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Will be. Further, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol, and various hold displays.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied when the special symbol is stopped in the predetermined jackpot mode when the jackpot is won, and as described above, the special game control means 116 determines the predetermined jackpot according to the type of the jackpot. A special game to be opened is executed in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a large winning opening during a unit game).
<< Functions related to specific games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 controls the above-mentioned probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probability change state, a time saving state, or the like, depending on the type of big hit. The probabilistic state is not associated with all types of jackpots, but with some types of jackpots. Furthermore, for some jackpots, the probability change state continues until the next jackpot, and for other jackpots with probability changes, it continues until the total number of fluctuations displayed after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). .. During the probabilistic state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than the normal time which is the non-probability change time.

Further, the time saving state is continued until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined end condition number of times (for example, 100 times) counting from the end time of the special game. Further, during the time reduction, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 use the variation pattern for the time reduction so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than the normal state. Select.

Further, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed in accordance with the time reduction as the specific game, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is facilitated, and the ball is placed at the entrance of the second start winning opening. The opening / closing blades can be easily opened. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing blade is controlled by the opening / closing control means 118 described later.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory (opening / closing blade) of the second starting winning opening 63 and the large winning opening device 90. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 controls to send an opening instruction to the large winning opening (opening) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the large winning opening device 90.
<< Functions related to advance information notification >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned advance information notification means 119 will be described. The advance information notification means 119 is acquired when a ball is entered in the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63, regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the entry is suspended. The processing for transmitting the information related to the various random value values to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notification information is performed.

As the above-mentioned advance notification information, each of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery values (first winning / failing lottery value or second winning / failing lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), and each pattern Information such as what kind of winning / failing range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to can be exemplified.

By transmitting such advance notification information, various pre-reading effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. As the look-ahead effect, a hold notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details of these will be described later.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main command transmission means 120 will be described. The main command transmitting means 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as when the start prize is won, when the special symbol changes start, when the special symbol changes stop, and when a big hit occurs. ..
<Basic functions of sub-board>

Next, the basic functions of the above-mentioned sub-board 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and fulfills various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-main board 301 includes a main command receiving means 141, an effect pattern determining means 142, a sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling the speaker output and the like, and an optical control means 145 for controlling the game effect lamp output and the like.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information for designating a display effect displayed on the effect display device 60, and a sound effect and a light effect to be performed together with the display effect as needed. During the variable display of the symbol 190, an effect suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. Here, the "expectation degree" in this embodiment can be rephrased as the "reliability". In addition, the "expectation degree" is, for example, in a broad sense, "expected to be in a game state suitable (convenient, desirable) for the player (including a situation where an infrequent production is performed). It can also be explained as "to the extent that it is possible". In the following, the "expectation level" of the jackpot will be described in the production stage (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, confirmed pattern) that raises the expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot due to the fluctuation when it appears among the patterns of the same type of advance notice production. When the hit variation pattern (variation pattern in hit variation) information and the deviation variation pattern information (variation pattern in loss variation) that generate the effect of 1 are confirmed, the hit variation pattern is included in the variation pattern corresponding to the effect of 1. It may be used for each of the descriptions that describe the probability of being produced, and in general, "highly expected production" refers to a production that is often a big hit when the production occurs. In addition, in the following explanation, when it is referred to as "expectation", "development expectation", "expectation for directing", etc., instead of referring to "big hit expectation", "hit expectation", etc. , May mean "expectation" in a broad sense that cannot be said to be directly linked to a big hit.

When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, the effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmission means 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 includes sound information and the like in order to read sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub-sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 to form an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays the moving image for the effect.
<Examples of specific modes related to specific games>

Next, a specific aspect of the above-mentioned specific game will be described. As described above, as specific games, a special symbol probability fluctuation function (probability variation), a special symbol variation time shortening function (time reduction), and a ball entry facilitation game (ordinary symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction) A combination of functions and the opening extension function of ordinary electric accessories) is provided. Then, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (stop display symbol of the special symbol) or the game result during the big hit. In this embodiment, instead of the so-called ST machine described above, a specification is adopted in which the probability variation period continues until the next big hit in some big hits, but the specific embodiment thereof will be described later.
<< Probability fluctuation game >>

The above-mentioned probability change changes the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit is higher than that of the normal probability state. In the pachinko gaming machine that adopts ST, the duration of the probabilistic state (probability change period) is determined based on the number of changes in the special symbol.

The number of changes in the special symbol is determined as one time from the change display of the special symbol to the stop display. Then, in the ST, in the probability variation period, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this way, the function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as ST or the number-cut probability variation.
<< Fluctuating time reduction game >>

The above-mentioned time reduction generally shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the above-mentioned main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. Here, "generally shortened" does not mean that the game is shortened in all cases, and in some cases, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equivalent to that of the normal game or longer than that of the normal game. It means that it can include. Then, according to this time reduction, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if a prize is continuously generated in the start winning opening (first starting winning opening 62 and second starting winning opening 63), it is special. It is possible to smoothly advance the variable display and the stop display of the symbol at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for the big hit lottery.

Further, the duration of the reduced working hours (reduced working hours) is determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, as in the probabilistic state. Then, in this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the above example, the probability variation period and the time reduction period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the time reduction period may be different from each other. For example, the probability change period may be 104 times, and the reduced working hours period may be 100 times. Further, the probability change period and the reduced working hours period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be set to any of 4, 25, 100, and the like depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Further, the shortened working hours can be set to any of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred.

Further, it is possible to provide a so-called fall lottery function. The following can be exemplified as this fall lottery. For example, after the probability change or the time reduction reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of fluctuations (here, 100 times), each change of the special symbol until the maximum number of fluctuations is reached, A lottery (lottery to end a specific game) is executed to determine whether to end the probability change or the time reduction. Then, when the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next change returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Further, it is not limited to executing both the probability change and the time saving, and it is also possible to execute only one of them in the specific game. For example, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, it is possible to give only the time reduction and not the probability change, or to not give the time reduction and give only the probability change.
<< Game to facilitate ball entry >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game will be described. In this ball entry facilitation game, the function related to the ordinary electric accessory is set in the player's favor, and the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 can be easier to accept the game ball than usual. be. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the second is determined by the control mode such as the time reduction related to the normal symbol, the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol, the opening extension related to the normal electric accessory, and the combination of these control modes. The ease of entering the ball into the starting winning opening 63 is enhanced, and an easy-to-enter state is formed. In relation to this "easy entry game" and the above-mentioned "base", "electric support", etc., the following are "high base", "high base state", "low base", "low base state", " Terms such as "non-electric support" are used. In the following, the "low base state" corresponds to the "non-electric support state", and the "high base state" corresponds to the "electric support state".

Among the various control modes described above in the normal symbol, the time reduction related to the normal symbol is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol is the winning probability of the normal symbol. Is a control mode (probability change related to a normal symbol) that improves the value from the normal state. Further, the opening extension related to the ordinary electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second start winning opening 63 is opened (long opening) longer than the opening (short opening) in the normal time (during non-specific game). be.

As described above, the easy-to-enter game during the specific game uses the three functions of shortening the time of the normal symbol, changing the probability of the open lottery, and extending the opening of the normal electric accessory to enter the second start winning opening 63. Increase ball ease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63. Further, at least one of the three functions may be switched between the period in which the function is performed and the period in which the function is not performed, depending on the game state.

The duration of such a ball-enhancing game can be determined based on a short period of time related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the ball entry facilitation game is continued during the time reduction related to the special symbol, and the ball entry facilitation game ends when the time reduction related to the special symbol is completed. Then, in this case, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) in which the symbol variation is started after the time reduction of the special symbol is completed is provided for the normal time (during non-specific game). It is possible to make it determined from the fluctuation pattern.
<Main production of pachinko gaming machines>
<< Basic display mode of production pattern >>

Next, various effects executed by the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub-board 302 based on the command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. Then, here, first, the basic display mode of the said effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described. As for the effect symbol 190, extremely various display modes and control modes are defined with respect to matters such as its type, function, use, and cooperation with other effect displays. However, here, in order to avoid complicated explanation, basic matters will be described, and more detailed matters relating to the effect symbol 190 will be described later as appropriate.

The effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

The stop symbol displayed when the effect symbol 190 is stopped is composed of a combination of three symbols, the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c. When the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big hit, a combination of three doublets, such as "777" and "555", is used as a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. If the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, one copy or all of the production symbols may be different from the other production symbols, for example, "767", "928", "331", etc. The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, the "stop symbol" and "stop symbol" in this embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while maintaining a combination such as "767" or "928", that alone is "fixed stop". It does not correspond to what you did. The state in which the effect symbol 190 has not reached the "fixed stop" while maintaining the combination can be referred to as the "temporary stop" state.

As a display mode of such "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect symbol 190 is vibrating (shaking) in small steps can be exemplified. Then, a mode of temporary stop in which the effect symbol 190 is swaying in small steps while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a mode of "sway fluctuation" or the like. As the mode of shaking of the effect symbol 190 in this "temporary stop", vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, and the like can be exemplified, and the movement range can be exemplified by about several millimeters.

Further, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "fixed stop", a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination can be exemplified after the temporary stop state. Further, at the time of this "fixed stop", it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been performed. Then, as an effect indicating that the confirmed display has been made, the state of the fixed stop is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), and the fixed effects 190a to 190c are added with special effects. (Design effect), lighting the LED (lamp) provided in the center decoration 64, and the like can be exemplified.

By performing the temporary stop (temporary stop display) effect in this way, it is possible to make it appear that a plurality of fluctuations are being executed during one fluctuation. In addition, depending on the effect of the temporary stop, whether or not the player is to make a definite stop (in other words, whether the player fluctuates again without the definite stop, whether the definite stop is a hit, or whether the definite stop is a miss. Etc.) can be fueled.

Here, as a symbol effect, each effect symbol 190a to 190c is illuminated only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and a bright spot is made to circulate around each effect symbol 190a to 190c once or a plurality of times. It is possible to adopt various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, moving the effect symbols 190a to 190c by about several millimeters, and returning them to their original positions.

Further, in the above-mentioned "reach" display mode, the effect symbol that maintains the combination of reach may be displayed in the above-mentioned "temporary stop" mode. Then, after the reach display by this "temporary stop", the symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) that has been variablely displayed constitutes an out-of-order combination (a combination of out-of-reach) and "temporarily stops", and the combination is combined. It is possible to exemplify an effect such that "fixed stop" is performed and the variable display ends while maintaining the effect. Further, from the state in which the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are "temporarily stopped" by the combination of the detached reach, the middle effect symbols 190b resume the fluctuation after displaying a predetermined cut-in image (cut-in effect). Then, an effect (second half reach) in which the reach effect develops into a highly reliable one (a one with a relatively high reliability related to a big hit) can be exemplified.

The scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scrolling, and various display modes can be adopted. Then, as another display mode, for example, a side-scrolling mode in the horizontal direction (right to left, etc.) or a left effect symbol 190a to a right effect symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around a vertical axis. , An example of a rotation mode in which a variable display is performed can be illustrated. Further, for example, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are expanded in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back to the front of the screen along a straight line or a curved (turning) track. A display mode such as sequentially paying out can also be exemplified. Further, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect symbol from the rear to the front descends from the upper side to the lower front side.

Further, the scrolling mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above, and for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined scrolling mode is switched to another scrolling mode. It is also possible. Further, for a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to make the scroll mode different for each effect mode.

Further, as a scroll mode for deterministically notifying the big hit, a full rotation effect may be performed. In this full rotation effect, the decorative symbols such as the effect symbols 190a to 190c are scrolled at a low speed while being aligned.

Further, when reach occurs, reach voice can be output as sound output. This reach voice is a notice that suggests a hit expectation or the like by a sound generated when the reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established. By executing this reach voice, when the reach is reached, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of hitting in combination with the image display, the movement of the accessory, and the like.

Further, in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle stage in the vertical direction of the display area 194 is exemplified, and the effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and for example, the number of effective lines may be 2 or 5.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 8B, the effect symbol 190 is composed of a portion meaning a predetermined symbol such as a number (element symbol which is the above-mentioned symbol element effect symbol) and a pattern representing a symbol other than the predetermined symbol. It is possible to configure it by combining it with a part (element symbol which is a non-symbol element effect symbol). As a part consisting of a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol, various design drawings, portraits, combinations thereof, etc. can be exemplified, and various design drawings and portraits combined with the symbol can be shown as a moving image. It is also possible to. In the example of FIG. 8B, a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the above-mentioned reduced effect symbol display area 361 is superimposed on the screen. In the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols (also referred to as "mini effect symbols" or "mini symbols") corresponding to the effect symbols 190a to 190c are smaller in size than the effect symbols 190a to 190c. It can be shown. By displaying the mini symbol in the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the situation of whether or not each effect symbol 190a to 190c is changing, and the situation when each effect symbol 190a to 190c is stopped (the situation at the time of temporary stop). May be included) can be shown inconspicuously separately from each of the effect symbols 190a to 190c.

Further, even if the effect pattern related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c is provided so as to be invisible to the player by displaying the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols are diversified. It is possible to show the situation of 190a to 190c to the player. For example, when performing a background notice effect that covers the entire screen (an effect with a high expectation of a big hit in which a specific character is displayed large in the background), this background advance notice effect is displayed with priority over the effect symbols 190a to 190c. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the effect symbols 190a to 190c so that the player can see them, the visibility of the background notice effect is not significantly reduced, and yet the reduced effect symbol display area 361 is displayed. It is possible to grasp the fluctuation status and stop status.

Further, in addition to the reduced effect symbol display area 361, whether or not each effect symbol 190a to 190c is changing and which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed is displayed. For example, it is possible to display a pattern indicated by a small one-digit number in an inconspicuous manner. Such a symbol can be referred to as a "guaranteed symbol" or the like. The display position of the guaranteed symbol can be set so as not to be hidden even when a single or a plurality of movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60. Further, the display of the guaranteed symbol can be performed at a position that is not hidden even if any of the movable effect members appears, or can be changed according to the appearing movable effect member.
<< Example of production pattern >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned effect pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, the effect pattern defines an aspect of the effect including the effect symbol 190. More specifically, the effect pattern defines an effect process such as a change process from the start of change to the stop of the change for the selected effect symbol 190, a background displayed in combination with the effect symbol 190, and a story development. There is. And, there are some production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Of these, when the effect pattern of "with reach" is executed, the effect display device 60 performs a reach effect that becomes a big hit if one more effect symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) is prepared. Then, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is a big hit, the doublet display such as "777" or "333" according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been confirmed and stopped. Further, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is out of order, for example, a combination indicating the out of place such as "767" or "515" is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been confirmed and stopped.

Further, when the "no reach" effect pattern is executed, a combination without reach, such as "928" or "331", in which the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are not a reach combination, is used. It is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been confirmed and stopped.

Some of these production patterns have various long and short fluctuation times, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of "with reach" includes those in which the fluctuation time extends to several minutes. In this embodiment, "no reach (about 3 to 10 seconds)" and "normal reach (10 to 20 seconds)" in the fluctuation pattern related to the above-mentioned special symbol (see FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c)). Degree) ”and“ Super reach (reach with high reliability of big hits) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes) ”are provided with a non-reach effect pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, and a super reach effect pattern. Then, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern in these effect patterns, and the number of effect patterns is wider than that of the above-mentioned variation pattern. Further, "super reach" can be paraphrased as "SP (special) reach".
<< Holding effect display related to special symbols >>

Next, the hold display (hold effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. The second hold number display unit 197 indicating the hold number of the winning / failing lottery value in the two games is displayed. Although each hold display is represented by a perfect circle here for the sake of simplification of explanation and illustration, the hold display may be performed by other combinations of shapes and colors, character images, animations, and the like.

In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display unit 196 described above. Furthermore, as the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, four hold displays are performed in the first hold number display unit 196.

Further, the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first reserved number display unit 196 includes the fourth display position from the first display position, and the rightmost portion of the first reserved number display unit 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, in the following, the hold display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as "ho 1", "ho 2", "ho 3", and "ho 4", respectively.

For example, in the effect display device 60, the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed, and the hold is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the position of the above-mentioned "maintenance 1"). At this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and that "Ho 2" to "Ho 4" have not occurred. In the situation where "Ho 1" is generated in this way, if a further hold occurs, the display related to the generated hold is performed at the position of "Ho 2" to the left of "Ho 1". Then, in a situation where "Ho 1" and "Ho 2" are displayed and "Ho 3" and "Ho 4" are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, "Ho 3" is displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. And "Ho 4" are displayed.

Then, if the variation display executed when the "ho 1" occurs is completed and the other change start conditions related to the first game are also satisfied, the above-mentioned reserved storage information related to the "ho 1" is stored. At the stage of being digested, the hold display of "Take 1" moves to the right side of the first hold number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side portion of the first reserved number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (the fluctuation information) related to the fluctuation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of "Take 1" moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

Here, when the hold display of "Ho 1" is moved to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the examples of FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the size is expanded when the hold display of "maintenance 1" is changed to the fluctuation information display 198. Further, in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), a state in which three hold displays of “hold 1” to “hold 3” are performed in the first hold number display unit 196 is exemplified.

Here, the display of a moving image representing a new hold display when a hold occurs can be referred to as a "occurrence display" or a "hold occurrence animation" related to the hold. Further, when the hold is exhausted, the display of the moving image when moving the hold display in the first hold number display unit 196 (or the second hold number display unit 197) is "shift display" or "shift animation". It is possible to call it. Further, the display of the fluctuation information display 198 on the fluctuation information display unit 195 can also be referred to as a “holding digestion transmission image”, a “variation-corresponding image”, or the like. Further, in order to distinguish the number of holds from the hold number display area 367, the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 are combined with the first hold image display unit 196 and the second hold image display unit. It can also be referred to as 197 or the like.

When the hold display in the "ho 1" is moved to the fluctuation information display unit 195 as described above, the waiting order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and the "ho 2" is shifted to the position of the "ho 1". Further, when "ho 3" or "ho 4" is present, "ho 3" shifts to the position of "ho 2" and "ho 4" shifts to the position of "ho 3". Then, if a further hold occurs in such a situation, a new "hold 4" is generated, and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. Further, if a new hold does not occur, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is advanced.

In a broad sense, it can be regarded as a hold effect, including the state in which the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195. Not limited to this, the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is set as the hold display, and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display. It is also possible.

In addition, if the variable display related to the effect symbol 190 is not performed and the number of holdings is 0 and there is a ball in the first start winning opening 62, the display of "Ho 1" is not performed (or is displayed for a moment). The fluctuation information display unit 195 is directly (or via shift animation) the fluctuation information display 198. Then, only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

Subsequently, the above-mentioned second reserved number display unit 197 will be described, but the same points as the first reserved number display unit 196 will be omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second reserved number display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first reserved number display unit 196 (on the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned fluctuation information display unit 195 interposed therebetween. ), The relations of "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" are arranged symmetrically in a color different from that of the first reserved image.

Further, the hold display can be performed in a mode corresponding to various game states. For example, when the probability of the big hit lottery is a normal probability and a high probability, and when they are controlled to different production modes, it is possible to exemplify that the mode of holding display is different from each other.

Further, the positional relationship between the first reserved number display unit 196, the second reserved number display unit 197, and the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above, and the second game is performed as in the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the type that displays the variation of the special symbol or the effect symbol 190 in the order of occurrence of the start winning prizes related to the first game and the second game, instead of executing the game with priority, has the variation information display unit. Eight hold displays may be arranged on the left side of 195. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold display and the fluctuation information display 198 may be performed in association with the operation and the effect related to the operation button 22 described above, and a specific embodiment of such an effect may be performed. Will be described later.
<< Hold look-ahead effect related to special symbols >>

Next, a hold look-ahead effect, which is one of the advance notice effects (look-ahead effects) related to the special symbol, will be described. This hold look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-mentioned hold storage information (first special figure hold storage information or second hold storage information). Further, in the hold look-ahead effect, a reach or a big hit occurs for the hold in which the digestion is performed after the effect performed by using the effect symbol 190 or the like at that time by using the above-mentioned advance information notification function. It is performed as a production that suggests the expectation of doing.

For example, the hold display generated at the position of "hold 3" in the first hold number display unit 196 described above is different from the display (for example, blue) which is the basic display mode in which the hold change is not performed, and the hold display is green. It is shown that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is higher than that in the case of the normal blue aspect. Then, in addition to the coloring of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined pattern are provided, and the expectation of a big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined pattern rather than green. The production is such that it shows that the degree is high.

Here, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern", an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be exemplified. In addition to the coloring and pattern of the hold display, it is also possible to adopt items other than a perfect circle, a person image, and the like. Further, it is also possible to perform a look-ahead effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed. Further, the hold that has won the look-ahead effect including the hold look-ahead effect can be referred to as, for example, "trigger hold".

The look-ahead effect related to the hold as described above may also be performed in the second game. The second game can be provided with display modes such as red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern in addition to the basic color (orange). Further, as the hold display related to the second game, it is also possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, or the like.

Further, the look-ahead effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as "hold change" or the like. And, such "hold change" includes one showing a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold occurrence, and one showing a change in the display mode at the timing after the hold occurrence. be.

Among these, as those showing a change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold occurs, the hold display is started, the hold is digested, and the hold display is, for example, "Ho 2". It is possible to exemplify such a thing that the hold display changes while proceeding to "Take 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold is displayed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "ho 3", and when the hold is moved to the position of "ho 1", another color such as green is displayed. And so on.

Further, in both the first game and the second game, when the fluctuation information display 198 is displayed, the hold display is changed from the basic color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow color, a predetermined pattern, or true. It may change to a display mode such as an item other than a circular shape or a person image to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, as the control mode related to the pending change as described above, the following can be exemplified. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) is performed to determine an effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change. A hold change pattern table is used for this hold change pattern lottery, and in this hold change pattern table, there is a hold change, and when a hold change is executed (when there is a hold change), what kind of timing is used? It stipulates matters related to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is to be executed. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

Further, when there are a plurality of holds that have been won in the hold change in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4", it is possible to cancel one of the hold look-ahead effects. More specifically, for example, when "Ho 4" occurs, the hold related to "Ho 4" wins the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any of the holds that have occurred earlier is As long as the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color is won, the hold related to the above-mentioned "ho 4" can be exemplified by canceling the hold change and not executing it.

Further, for example, when "Ho 4" occurs as in the above example, the hold related to "Ho 4" wins the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color, and all the holds that have occurred earlier. However, if it does not change up to the rainbow color and changes only to green, it can be exemplified that the hold change that has occurred earlier is canceled and not executed. It should be noted that it is also possible to execute an effect suggesting that the hold change is performed (sometimes referred to as a “hold change suggestion effect”) when the hold change is performed, and this point will be described later separately.
<< Continuous notice of special symbols >>

Next, as another pattern of the look-ahead effect, a continuous notice (continuous effect) related to the special symbol will be described. This continuous notice may be a genuine one or a pseudo one, and the genuine continuous notice among these means a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays related to a special symbol. ing. Further, the pseudo continuous notice means that an intermittent notice effect (pseudo continuous notice) is performed such that there is a plurality of changes in the special symbol for one variation display related to the special symbol.

As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, the character who is the main character in the story of the production moves to a different room in sequence aiming at the room to be finally reached for each change related to the special symbol. Such things can be exemplified. In addition, as another aspect of "continuous notice", the character who is the main character fights against a different enemy and wins for each change related to the special symbol, aiming for the final goal enemy. Can also be exemplified.

Further, the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "continuous notice") can be performed based on the advance notification information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the hold of "Ho 3" occurs, the sub-main board 301 is used as an effect pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the next and subsequent special symbols. It is possible to select the content including the continuous notice over the three variable displays.

Then, when the hold for one time is exhausted and the hold of the above-mentioned "ho 3" is shifted to the position of "ho 2", the first one of the selected continuous notice-related effect patterns is used. The effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display moves from "Ho 2" to "Ho 1", the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information is displayed from "Ho 1". When moving to section 195, the final third notice is executed.

In addition, in the sub-main board 301, the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display executed at the time when the above-mentioned hold of "ho 3" occurs, and the "ho 2" or "ho 1" that has occurred before that. It is also possible to confirm the pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "ho 3" is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is executed or a jackpot is generated among various information already stored. If there is information indicating that the "ho 3" is to be held, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the selected continuous notice when the hold of "ho 3" occurs. In addition, depending on the degree of expectation of hold for "Ho 3", continuous notice is not given immediately from the next change, but 1 change is waited for the change of "Ho 1" and 2 at the time of digestion of the trigger hold which is a look-ahead mode. It is also conceivable that the notice will be continuous over fluctuations.

Further, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter, may be referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), the reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern related to the one-time variable display of the special symbol. Such things, things in which the characters repeat actions multiple times, things in which the effect symbol 190 is temporarily stopped and re-variated, and the like can be exemplified.

Further, it is possible to display a pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol at the time of pseudo-continuous notice. This pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is one of the special decorative symbols displayed when raising the expectation of whether or not a pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-ream") occurs. As the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol, for example, a semi-transparent effect of the pseudo-ream symbol accompanied by the character display of "NEXT" or "continuation" can be exemplified. The above-mentioned pseudo-ream symbol can also be referred to as a re-variable symbol, and is one of the special decorative symbols that more definitely indicates that the pseudo-ream occurs than the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol.

Further, as the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol, those displayed in a scroll or those displayed in a certain area can be exemplified. Further, as the "constant area" referred to here, for example, a substantially central area of the display screen in the effect display device 60, the vicinity of the first reserved number display unit 196 (or the second reserved number display unit 197), and the like are exemplified. can. Further, it is also possible to display the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol or the pseudo-ream symbol in a certain area through the scroll display.

It should be noted that the content of the continuous notice as described above is merely an example, and various contents other than those described above can be adopted as the content of the continuous notice.
<< Directed design related to normal design >>

Next, the production related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol will be described. In this embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect related to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Then, in the case of displaying the effect of the ordinary symbol in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbol is displayed to such an extent that, for example, the off-off and the hit type can be distinguished.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, it is provided with a relatively large display body and a smaller display body (s). It is possible. The large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or "main liquid crystal", and the small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or "sub liquid crystal". Further, when a relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect symbol (199) related to the normal symbol may be displayed on, for example, a small display body. Further, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device related to a normal symbol.

Further, when performing an effect using the effect symbol related to the ordinary symbol, it is possible to perform the hold effect display related to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is composed of a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to a normal symbol is displayed, for example, in a small size. It may be displayed on the body. Further, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets are provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, thereby displaying the number of reserved numbers related to the ordinary symbols "1" to "4". May be good.
<< Production related to limited frequency pattern >>

Next, the effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as "limited frequency pattern effect") will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the above-mentioned effect pattern. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect set so as to be likely to appear in a predetermined gaming state in response to a variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content showing a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific variation during a time-saving game, a predetermined variation pattern is used on the main board. It is possible to exemplify something that is determined and that always produces a highly reliable reach as a production.

In addition, as a game situation in which a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or a large hit without a ball), or during a predetermined effect mode (probability change, (During the time-saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, etc. can be exemplified. In addition to these, as a game situation in which a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, when the number of holds related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, four), or the hold is An example can be given when it does not exist. Further, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, the limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the effect pattern to be executed is selected from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table. It is designed to be selected.
<< Production using operation buttons >>

Next, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) using the above-mentioned operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) will be described. Regarding the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, various matters are examined regarding the effect mode related to the operation button 22 and the relationship with the environment setting related to the volume control and the like described above. However, in order to avoid complicated explanation, basic matters will be described here, and detailed matters will be described later.

The operation button 22 is pressed and operated by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player the feeling that he / she is participating in the game effect or the winning / losing lottery. be. As the button effect, for example, in the variable display process of the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 is combined with the symbol of the operation button 22 (also referred to as a button image). , "Press the button", "Press repeatedly", "Press and hold", etc., or show a guide display that prompts the operation, such as a video of various indicators showing the remaining time and the amount of repeated hits. can.

Here, FIG. 31A shows an example of the button image 401 with the indicator image 402 attached, and FIG. 32A shows an example of the indicator image 402. In addition, when displaying a button image or the like, it is possible to perform a preliminary effect that arouses the expectation of displaying the button image. Examples of this preliminary effect include an effect in which the button image gradually darkens from translucent to the display of the button image, and an effect in which the button image remains semi-transparent and is erased so as not to display the button image. be able to. Further, there are a plurality of types of indicators, and depending on their functions, they can be distinguished by being referred to as, for example, an "indicator for remaining time" or an "indicator for operation amount".

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the above-mentioned guide display, an effect in which the character makes a comment or an effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. Further, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member (reference numeral omitted) is activated to notify that the reach is reached. Further, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect, and in such a case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member is activated to arouse expectations for a big hit.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally invalid, but the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button effect period. The button operation valid period is a preset fixed time. Further, a plurality of types of button operation valid periods may be provided depending on the type of button effect. For example, (1) a comparison between a single-shot operation effect described later and a continuous hit operation effect (including an automatic continuous hit effect described later) shows that the button operation is valid. The operation effect has a longer button operation valid period (when multiple types of single-shot operation effects and multiple types of continuous-stroke operation effects are provided, multiple types of continuous-stroke operations are performed rather than the average value of the button operation valid periods in multiple types of single-shot operation effects. The average value of the button operation valid period in the effect is relatively longer), (2) It has multiple types of single-shot operation effects, and is more than the first single-shot operation effect (for example, the effect that occurs before reach in the low base state). Also, the second single-shot operation effect (for example, the effect that occurs during reach in the low base state) has a longer button operation valid period. (3) It has multiple types of continuous hit operation effects, and the first continuous hit operation effect (for example). The button operation valid period may be longer in the second continuous hit operation effect (for example, the effect generated during the reach in the high base state) than in the effect generated before the reach in the low base state. It should be noted that having a plurality of types of single-shot operation effects and continuous hit operation effects means that, for example, a single-shot operation effect (for example, an effect in which a dialogue notice is generated by pressing a button) or a continuous hit operation effect (for example, a button repeated hit) is executed before reaching. A one-shot operation effect (for example, a final effect that notifies you whether a big hit or a miss is reported by pressing a button) or a continuous hit operation effect (for example, a meter is set to 0 by repeatedly pressing a button). If it becomes a big hit, a one-shot operation effect (for example, an effect that the movable effect member is activated by pressing a button to notify that the probability fluctuates after the big hit) and a continuous hit operation effect (for example) that are executed during the big hit. It means to have various types of button effects such as (a production that notifies that the probability will change after a big hit if all the enemies are defeated by repeatedly hitting the buttons).

It should be noted that the operation button 22 is combined with a vibration motor or solenoid (not shown) to vibrate the operation button 22, or the operation range of the operation button 22 is expanded by using a drive source such as a motor to expand the operation button. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode such as sinking 22. Further, when the operation button 22 is recessed, the protrusion amount can be set to be relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to a small external dimension (for example, about several centimeters), and a hemispherical shape of about ten and several centimeters may be adopted. Further, as an operation input device (operation input means) such as the operation button 22, various other forms can be adopted, for example, an automobile operation handle and an aircraft operation lever related to the production content. , A model (figure) of a character with a touch sensor can also be used. Further, as the operation input means, it is possible to install an operation button 22 (or a smaller operation button or the like) and a device having a form such as an operation lever, and use them properly according to the situation such as the content of the production. ..

In this embodiment, the operation button 22 is provided with a sinking mechanism and a vibration mechanism, and is capable of a sinking operation with respect to the upper ball plate 18 and a vibration operation with the upper ball plate 18. The operation button 22 is provided on the upper portion of the lever device (lever device unit) 184 as shown in FIG. 21 (a). The lever device 184 is configured by attaching a motor (here, a stepping motor) 186 as a drive source, a movable mechanism portion 187, and a lever body 188 to the base body 185. Further, a decorative portion 189 that decorates the periphery of the operation button is provided on the upper portion of the lever body 188.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lever device 184 is built in the plate unit 16 of the gaming machine frame 11, and the above-mentioned decorative portion 89 and the operation button 22 are exposed from the upper ball plate 18. Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 21 (a), the lever device 184 accommodates the lever body 188 so that the decorative portion 189 forms a surface substantially continuous with the outer surface of the upper ball dish 18 under the normal state. is doing.

However, when a predetermined effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21B, the lever body 188 protrudes, and the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 rise at a predetermined angle and the amount of protrusion. In this case, although not shown, the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 are in a state of protruding from the outer surface of the upper ball plate 18. Here, the lever body 188 and the decorative portion 189 can be collectively referred to as a "lever". Further, it is also possible to include the operation button 22 in these and refer to them as a "lever". Hereinafter, the lever body 188, the decorative portion 189, and the operation button 22 are collectively referred to as a “lever” and are designated by the reference numeral L.

The lever L described above can be tilted forward as shown in FIG. 21 (c) in a protruding state as shown in FIG. 21 (b). Then, for example, the lever L changes from the stored state to the protruding state during the predetermined reach effect, and the effect display device 60 displays a video showing how the lever L collapses or a character display of "pull the lever". , When the player tilts the lever L toward you, other movable effect members etc. operate and cut-in effect is performed, which develops into SP reach with higher expectation of big hits, SP reach continues, and whether it is correct or not. It is possible to perform a series of effects such as notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit.

Here, it is possible to display the development pattern when the reach develops. The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the reach effect is generated. By displaying the development pattern, it is possible to definitively notify that the reach effect will occur.

Further, as shown in an enlarged view of the main part in FIG. 20A, a cross key 96 is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22 as described above, and the operation button 22 is determined in a situation where the environment is set or the like. It may be used as a key or the like. Then, in this embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is performed in a situation where the effect display device 60 is performing variable display such as the effect symbol 190 or is not performing variable display. May be done. As described above, the cross key 96 also functions as a kind of operation input means that can be operated by a player or the like.

Subsequently, the guide displays such as "press the button", "press repeatedly", and "press and hold" described above distinguish and specify the operation mode (button operation mode) of the operation button 22. For example, the character display of "press the button" is used as a guide display when proceeding with the subsequent control process, assuming that the requested operation (request operation) has been performed if one operation (single operation) is detected. Illustrated. Those that request such a single-shot operation and generate some kind of effect by performing the single-shot operation are referred to as, for example, "single-shot operation effect", "single-shot push effect", "single-shot effect", "single-shot button effect", and the like. Is possible. Further, the single-shot operation can be referred to as "single-shot push" or the like, and the single-shot operation function can be referred to as "single-shot operation function", "single-shot push function", "single-shot function" or the like.

Further, for example, the character display of "continuously hit" is exemplified as a guide display when a plurality of operations (continuous hitting operation) is a request operation. Those that request such a continuous striking operation and generate some kind of effect by performing the continuous striking operation are referred to as, for example, "continuous striking operation effect", "continuous striking effect", "continuous striking button effect", "continuous striking possible effect" and the like. Is possible. In addition, the continuous hitting operation in which the button is pressed intermittently is called "continuous hitting", "continuous hitting push", "intermittent hitting operation", etc., and the function of the continuous hitting operation is "continuous hitting operation function", "continuous hitting push function". , It is also possible to call it a "continuous hit function" or the like.

In addition to the effect of encouraging repeated hits (pre-continuous hitting effect) as described above, the continuous hitting effect related to this continuous hitting operation can be considered to include the effect of subsequent repeated hits (during repeated hitting effect). As the effect during repeated striking, for example, an example in which the image changes in response to the operation each time the operation of pressing the operation button 22 is repeated at relatively short intervals can be exemplified. A specific example of such a continuous striking effect will be described later.

Further, as a continuous striking effect, an indicator (here, an indicator for the operation amount) is displayed, and the amount indicated by the indicator increases as the pressing operation is repeated. The display of such an indicator can be started before the repeated hits, or can be started after the continuous hits are started. A specific example of the indicator display will be described later.

Further, for example, the character display of "hold down" is exemplified as a guide display when a continuous operation (long press operation) for a predetermined time or longer is a request operation. Those that request such a continuous operation and generate some kind of effect by performing the continuous operation can be referred to as, for example, "long-press operation effect", "long-press effect", "long-press button effect", or the like. It is a thing. Further, the continuous operation can be referred to as "long press" or the like, and the long press operation function can be referred to as "long press operation function" or "long press function".

As a long-press effect related to this long-press operation, for example, an indicator (here, an indicator for the remaining time) is displayed, and the amount indicated by the indicator increases as the time during which the operation button 22 is pressed increases. It can be exemplified. Further, as a long-pressing effect, an example may be exemplified in which the speed of change (or the cycle of change, etc.) of the image in response to the operation increases as the time during which the operation button 22 is pressed increases. Further, a combination of a plurality of such effects can be exemplified as a long-press effect.

As described above, the effect using the operation button 22 or the like is basically performed with a guide display such as a button image prompting the button operation (table button effect). FIG. 31A shows an example of a button image with reference numeral 401. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of not performing the guide display or limiting the guide display so as to further diversify the effect of using the operation buttons 22 and the like. .. Such effects can be referred to as, for example, "back button effects" or "hidden button effects". The details of this back button effect and the function of the back button (back button function) will be described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is equipped with an automatic continuous striking function (automatic continuous striking function) that facilitates the above-mentioned continuous striking operation related to the operation button 22. This automatic continuous hitting function is used even when the button operation is performed only once or the repeated operation is performed at intervals considerably longer than usual in the situation where repeated hitting is required. It is a function to treat the button operation in the situation as if it was repeatedly hit.

More specifically, a button operation in which the pressing operation continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 0.5 seconds or more, for example, 0.55 seconds or 0.6 seconds) is detected in the situation where the continuous hitting effect is executed. For example, the conditions for automatic continuous striking (first condition and second condition described later) are satisfied, and the control can be advanced assuming that the continuous striking has been performed. A button operation that satisfies the condition of automatic continuous striking can be referred to as "auto continuous striking operation" or the like.

By providing such an automatic continuous striking function, it is possible to proceed with the same effect as when the continuous striking is performed, even if the continuous striking is not always performed. Then, for a player who feels uncomfortable to actually hit repeatedly, it is possible to present the same effect as hitting repeatedly with only one continuous button operation. In addition, the player is not overly distracted by the repeated hits, and it is easy to pay attention to the effect being advanced by the effect display device 60 or the like.

In addition, since the automatic continuous striking function is installed side by side with the normal continuous striking function (normal continuous striking function), a player who wants to actually hit the operation button 22 repeatedly to enjoy the continuous striking effect and the continuous striking function can use the auto continuous striking function. It is possible to perform the normal continuous striking operation (normal continuous striking operation) as described above without using the function. It should be noted that, regarding such an automatic continuous striking function, various correlations with various button effects, environment settings, game characteristics, power interruption, etc. are defined, and details of these correlations will be described later. Further, in the present specification, the term "automatic continuous striking" may be used simply, but this term is used in the sense of contrasting with normal continuous striking, for example, "automatic continuous striking function". , "Auto-continuous hitting effect", "Auto-continuous hitting effect", etc., which are higher-level concepts of various terms related to auto-continuous hitting.
<< Production when a big hit occurs >>

Next, the effect when a big hit occurs will be described. When a big hit occurs, the production at the start of the special game (big hit start demo), the production during the special game (round production), the production at the end of the final round (hit end demo), and the production at the end of the special game There is a production (demonstration of the end of the big hit). Here, the production of the above-mentioned jackpot start demo is a production during the period in which the attacker (big winning opening) is maintained from the start of execution of the jackpot game (special game) to the start of execution of the first round (unit game). The above-mentioned jackpot end demo is produced during the period from the end of the final round (unit game) execution to the end of the jackpot game (special game) execution until the attacker (big prize opening) is closed. It can be said that it is a production.

When the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is confirmed and stopped, a display indicating that a big hit is started is displayed along with a sound such as a fanfare. As a display indicating that the big hit is started, the display of the big hit start demo screen shown in FIG. 25A can be exemplified. Furthermore, as an example of how to hit during a special game, a right-handed guidance effect (right-handed instruction display) is executed, and the player is instructed to increase the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 to perform right-handed hitting. can. Further, as the display of the content for guiding the right-handed strike, it is possible to display a message such as "Turn the steering wheel to the right" in the right-handed guide display area 383 of FIG. 25 (a).

Here, the production content at the start of the big hit may be different between the first hit (big hit on the low base) and the consecutive villa (big hit on the high base). Specifically, a display such as "Big hit start!" May be displayed at the time of the first hit, and a display such as "Big hit continuous!" May be displayed at the time of hitting the consecutive villas. In addition, for right-handed guidance, the message "Turn the steering wheel to the right" is displayed at the first hit, but at Renso, such a message is not displayed or a different display (simply "right-handed"). Large characters are displayed for a short time, etc.). In this way, the big hit start demo production at the time of the consecutive villas may be shorter than the big hit start demo production at the time of the first hit. It will be shorter during the demonstration. Similarly, the time value of the big hit end demo production (big hit start demo time) may be shorter at the time of consecutive villas than at the time of the first hit.

As the production during the above-mentioned special game, a moving image having contents that cannot be seen unless the player wins a big hit can be exemplified. Further, at this time, a predetermined music is output from the above-mentioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as a video during the special game, for example, a picture of a predetermined character in a graphic novel used for the production of the pachinko game machine 10 fighting against a rival enemy, or a picture of enjoying a jerk. I can exemplify things such as Here, (FIG. 25 (b)) exemplifies a scene of a video in which two females fight an enemy together as a video during a special game.

It should be noted that the switching of rounds during the special game is, for example, "1R", "2R", ..., "15R", "1 round", "2 rounds", ... It is possible to notify by the display such as. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of times the big hit occurs when the big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits are continuous.

In the display example of FIG. 25B, the reserved number display area 367 showing the reserved numbers of the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed at the lower part of the screen. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 25B, the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the round number display area 368, and the count number display area 369 are displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 25 (b), the number of consecutive villas related to multiple big hit games is displayed in the upper right part of the screen by displaying such as "1st probability change" or "number of acquisitions: 195". , The number of prize balls won in the consecutive villas is displayed.

Here, instead of displaying only the prize balls (due to the entry into the large winning opening (90)) due to the game during the round, the number of winning prize balls is not displayed, but the same launch position as the large winning opening (90) ( A prize ball based on a ball entering a general winning opening (sign omitted) arranged in the firing direction) may also be displayed as a target for displaying the number of winning prize balls. In addition, when a so-called over-winning (a ball that exceeds the specified count number in one round for a large winning opening) occurs, which is an excess winning amount, an effect of suggesting or notifying the occurrence (for example, "Ya" Sound output such as "Tane!" Or display such as "Nice!" In the production display) may be performed.

Further, as the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to perform a specific effect (a specific effect during hitting) as shown in FIGS. 25 (c) and 26 (a) to 26 (c). 25 (c) and 26 (a) to 26 (c) exemplify the hitting specific effect screens A to D. These hit-in-the-middle specific effects screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or are inserted as a turning point of the effects when the number of rounds is notified or the promotion effect to the probability change is performed during the big hit game. It can be used for such purposes as.

In the above-mentioned promotion effect, the effect symbols 190a to 190c are changed from, for example, a non-probability variation symbol (such as "666") which is a combination of non-probability variation to a probability variation symbol (such as "777") which is a combination of probabilistic variation. It is possible to exemplify a production (probability change promotion production) that fuels expectations of whether or not. Further, as the promotion effect, an effect (round promotion effect) that raises the expectation of whether or not to change from a low round hit (5R hit, etc.) to a high round hit (15R hit, etc.) can be exemplified.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned effect after the special game, those related to the result of the effect content during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the battle between the characters. The production after such a special game can also be referred to as an ending production.

Further, as the effect after the special game, the one that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, the one that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to add and display the number of times a big hit occurs when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits are continuous. Further, regarding the continuous big hits, when the number of times the big hits occur reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), it is also possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before that.

Although not shown, the screen at the time of the big hit end demo (big hit end demo screen) is displayed at the end of the special game. As an example of this jackpot end demo screen, there may be one that displays characters such as "end" indicating the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, it is also possible to display the number of prize balls won during the big hit game or during the consecutive villas in this big hit end demo screen.

In addition, when the type of jackpot includes a jackpot that does not accompany a probability change, the notification of whether or not the probability change will occur after the end of the special game should not be notified during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

For example, when a total of 10 rounds of special games are played, the player is not notified until the end of the 8th round whether or not the player has won the probable change, and after the 8th round, the probable change is performed. If the player has won the prize, it is possible to adopt an effect or control mode such that an effect to that effect (a specific effect during hitting) is performed over one or a plurality of rounds.

Similarly, in a pachinko gaming machine including a big hit without probability change, when a gaming ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing such as before the start of a special game, during a special game, or at the end of a special game. It is also possible to adopt an effect or control mode such that is probable.

In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a game ball detection area (referred to as “V ball entry device” here) is added to a portion below the large winning opening in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1). To be provided. Further, at a predetermined timing such as at the end of a special game, the V-ball entry device is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and when the game ball is detected by the V-ball entry device in this state, the subsequent probability state is changed. , It is controlled so that it is in a probabilistic state over a predetermined period. Then, when the game ball does not enter the V entry device or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V entry device, the subsequent probability state is controlled so as not to be a probabilistic state. It is possible to do.

In addition, it is possible to give the probability change by entering the ball only as a production. That is, when a big hit with a certain change is won in the big hit lottery, the V-filling device is set to a state in which the game ball can be accepted at a predetermined timing. Then, a distribution mechanism is provided in the V entry device, and if a big hit with a probability change is won in advance, the game ball that has entered the V entry device is guided to the probability change area, and the player changes the probability. Perform a production to the effect that you have acquired. In addition, if the jackpot without probability change is won in advance, it is conceivable to guide the game ball to the non-probability (normal) area and execute the effect that the player has acquired the probability change.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned effect after the special game, those related to the result of the effect content during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the battle between the characters. The production after such a special game can also be referred to as an ending production.

Further, as the effect after the special game, the one that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, the one that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to add and display the number of times a big hit occurs when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits are continuous. Further, regarding the continuous big hits, when the number of times the big hits occur reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), it is also possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before that.

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, the effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit is not performed, and during the game after the small hit occurs, it is the same as in the normal time, and it is not possible to distinguish whether or not the probability change is in progress. It is conceivable to produce the content.
<< Production by superimposing multiple production members >>

Next, various specific effects that can be carried out in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying the effect display device 60, displaying the light guide plate 88 described above, and superimposing the movable effect member. This type of effect is a complex effect by locating a movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display content of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration and movement of the movable effect member.

For example, in a state where one of the movable effect members protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 can be seen outside the movable effect member. For example, when an image of a flame burning is displayed on the effect display device 60, a combination effect in which the movable effect member performs light decoration or operation is executed in front of the flame. Further, in the light guide plate 88, for example, by performing an effect of blinking a flame pattern or an effect of blinking a ripple-like pattern, the difference in perspective between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 can be obtained. It can exert a visual effect.

Further, in this state, by executing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed on the light guide plate 88. It can be visually recognized by the player while being partially obstructed. Furthermore, by synthesizing changes in the pattern display before and after the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment in which the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complicated manner. ..

As a result, more complicated effects can be performed and the effects can be diversified by the limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60. Even when the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display can be visually recognized by a movable effect member behind or a part of the display content of the effect display device 60. By setting the transmission state to the extent possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing as in the case of the light guide plate 88.

Further, as a mode of using the light guide plate 88, a transmissive liquid crystal display, etc. (referred to as a light guide plate 88 here), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 and the like and a mode of combining with the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. In the above-mentioned "mode for emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like", a color display is performed by using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 or the like to make a predetermined image stand out, and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind the light guide plate 88 or the like is displayed. This is a display mode that prevents the player's consciousness from facing as much as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "mode by combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the portion of the light guide plate 88 or the like where the color display is performed is suppressed to a predetermined degree, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind is suppressed. This is a display mode for showing the player an effect of combining the display of the light guide plate 88 and the display of the effect display device 60 so that the player's consciousness is directed to the content. Then, in a predetermined case, the effect in the "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like" is executed, and in other predetermined cases, the effect in the "mode in combination with the effect display device 60" is executed. , Etc. are possible.
<< Production that suggests pending changes >>

Subsequently, various things can be further exemplified as the effect using the above-mentioned hold display. For example, a hold change suggestion effect suggesting that a hold change is performed is exemplified, and the change information display 198 of the change information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b) is temporarily deleted, and the change is made. The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the reserved color changes and the degree of expectation increases, for example, "color change?". Then, after displaying such state transition suggestion information, the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 may change to something that means a high degree of expectation such as red color or rainbow color. do.

It is also possible to display the above-mentioned display such as "color change?" As one of the roulette eyes or one of the rotating drums (reels). For example, information displays such as "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" are adopted as the roulette eyes and the design of the rotating drum, and the roulette and rotation are used in the fluctuation information display unit 195. Display the objects of the drum. Then, in the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" is sequentially changed, and the subsequent fluctuation information display is performed in a manner corresponding to the stopped information. It is conceivable that 198 will be done. It is also possible to display an object of a roulette wheel or a rotating drum without erasing the fluctuation information display 198.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the hold is held. It is conceivable to actively notify that a change has occurred or that a pending change will occur immediately afterwards, for example, by displaying pending change information such as "pending change", "red pending", or "rainbow pending". Be done. Here, such display of the hold change information may be performed in the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the hold change is displayed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold change display unit 197. It may be done in the vicinity of the hold display.

As described above, one or a plurality of types of hold change suggestion effects suggesting that the hold change is performed are provided, and the rate at which the hold change is made and the hold change are made depending on whether or not the hold change suggestion effect is executed and the type. It is also preferable that the degree of change at the time (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red differs between type A and type B) is different. In addition, when there are a plurality of hold displays and hold changes can be made for a plurality of hold displays, it is not possible to know which hold change will be made at the start of the hold change suggestion effect. Also, if it is configured in this way, it is possible to improve the interest from the viewpoint of whether the previously changed hold changes further or the unchanged hold changes.

Further, when the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the timing of the hold change can be various timings during the symbol change. For example, when the pending change suggestion effect uses an area dedicated to the pending change suggestion or an image object, a plurality of start / end at any timing that does not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol (effect symbol). You can set the timing.

On the other hand, when the hold change suggestion effect is not dedicated to the hold change suggestion and is performed in conjunction with the change effect of the decorative pattern, for example, a pseudo decorative pattern suggesting a hold change is used by using the display area of the decorative pattern. It is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect for displaying (for example, "hold change symbol"). Then, in this case, it is possible to set the timing at which the symbols in one or a plurality of rows temporarily stop and the timing at which the stop symbols are announced.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can be changed at the start or shift of the hold display. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold change may be performed in association with the button effect, and a specific mode of such an effect will be described later.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, the main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. First, the command transmission timing is as follows: initial screen display, customer waiting demo (standby demo), special symbol symbol change start, special symbol symbol confirmation, special symbol symbol confirmation, big hit start demo, There are times when the big hit medium and large prize openings are open, when the big hit medium and large prize openings are closed, when the hit end demo, and when the big hit end demo is over. Of these, the initial screen display is the period from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on until the customer waiting demonstration is started and the steady state is entered. In addition, a command is transmitted in any case at the time of winning a start, when recovering from a power failure, and when an error is detected. Further, the command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

Among these, the commands at the time of clearing the RWM include the effect display display initialization, the effect LED initialization, and various error commands. The effect display initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect symbol on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to light a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying the effect according to the error state.

As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erasing the sound.

The commands at the start of the symbol change of the special symbol are the number of symbols 1 stored, the number of symbols 2 stored, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of effects A to Z, the effect selection states 0 to 2, the variation addition information, and the symbol 1 effect. There are commands for a pattern, a symbol 2 effect pattern, a symbol 1 character effect, and a symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the reserved storage number of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the reserved storage number of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the various commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. It is a thing. The variable addition information command indicates information for adding an element (effect component) that suggests, for example, a jackpot expectation degree, to the effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. be.

As a command for confirming the symbol of the special symbol, there are a command for stopping the symbol 1 effect pattern and a command for stopping the symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect symbol 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

The commands during which the symbol of the special symbol is being confirmed include the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened A to Z (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at high probability), and the probability is changing (at high probability). There is a command (up to the specified number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting commands related to the game state at that time, and are used for the effect mode display, the time reduction number display, and the like.

The commands at the time of the jackpot start demo include the symbol 1 jackpot start demo, the symbol 2 jackpot start demo, and the command for specifying the launch position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is for notifying the player of the launch position when the player is made to strike the game ball separately by so-called left-handed or right-handed.

As commands when the big hit medium big winning opening is opened, there are commands for symbol 1 big hit medium demos 1 to 16 and symbol 2 big hit medium demos 1 to 16. These are for displaying the effect based on the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As a command when the big hit medium big winning opening is closed, there is a big winning opening closing production command. This is for displaying the big winning opening closing effect.

As commands at the time of the big hit end demo, there are commands of the end per symbol demo and the end demo per symbol 2. These are for displaying the hit end demo effect based on the hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The commands at the time of starting winning include commands for hit notice (hit notice effect), symbol notice (hit symbol notice effect), fluctuation notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, and symbol 2 memory number. Each command of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice is a command (look-ahead command) related to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect by the advance information notification means 157. The winning notice command is for transmitting a random number range of winning / failing random numbers, and includes information on winning / failing according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance notice command is for transmitting a random number range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of hit. Further, the fluctuation warning command is for transmitting a random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The commands of the symbol 1 storage number and the symbol 2 storage number are for transmitting the reserved storage number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in this embodiment, as a result of the winning / failing lottery, information such as the presence / absence of the look-ahead effect and the period is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice.

The commands at the time of power failure recovery include communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game states A to E for power failure recovery, number of effects A to Z, effect selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character effect, and symbol 2 character effect. There are commands such as a power failure recovery hit state, a special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, a special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, firing position designation, errors a to d, a symbol 1 storage number, and a symbol 2 storage number.

The commands of communication inspection 1 and communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The commands of the game states A to E for recovering from a power failure are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of the power failure. The commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. be. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting different commands depending on whether the command is hit or not. The commands in the special symbol 1 state when the power is restored and the special symbol 2 state when the power is restored send commands according to the states of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, and hitting. Is for. As described above, the launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation. The errors a to d are for transmitting the presence / absence and type of the error. The commands for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 are for transmitting the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of the main board>

Next, the main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "conditional device", and "continuous operation device for accessory" used below will be described. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, the "special electric accessory" operates (opens) the large winning opening of the large winning opening device 90. It is a thing. In addition, the "condition device" operates when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "feature continuous actuating device" operates the special electric accessory continuously multiple times. Can be done.

Further, the main control processes of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here are the power-on process (also referred to as “control start process” on the main board) shown in FIG. 14, the initial setting process shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. The setting change process shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 17, the (win / fail) lottery determination process shown in FIG. 18, and the power cutoff process shown in FIG. 19 are executed on the main board 102.
<Processing when power is turned on>

The power-on processing schematically shown in FIG. 14 is a control processing that is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10. In this power-on processing, the initial setting processing (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), processing related to the set value is executed, and the content of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

After the initial setting process (S101), the determination (S102) as to whether or not the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated is executed. In this S102, if the RWM clear button is operated (S102: YES), the RWM clear process (S103) is executed, and the RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (sub-main board 301 side). Is done (S4). Further, the information indicating that the power is turned on normally (information on the power turned on normally) is stored in the RWM (S105), and the timer interrupt is permitted (S106). By permitting the timer interrupt (S106), the game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) can be performed in a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms). Further, various random numbers are updated every time the loop processing (circular processing) is repeated (S107).

Here, as the random numbers updated in the random number update process (S107), various initial value random numbers such as a normal symbol per initial value random number, a special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and a special symbol per soft initial value random number are listed. Can be done. Further, when updating various random numbers, it is possible to use 2-byte soft random number update processing as a common control module. Further, the random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the software random number described above, and depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the hardware random number described above may be used. It is also possible to generate a random number value by the operation of.

If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not the power off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111). Then, when the information on whether the power is turned off or not is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), the RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether or not the data in the RWM (data in a predetermined range) is normal. It is done (S113). If the data in the RWM is not normal in this S113 (S113: YES), the process proceeds to the RWM clear process (S103).

In the above S111, when the information of normal power off is stored in the RWM (S111: NO), and when the data in the RWM is normal in the above S113 (S113: NO), the power is turned off from the RWM. Acquires data of various information commands at the time (S116). Further, the acquired data of various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S117), the solenoid recovery setting is made (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (processing to save the power-on normal information in the RWM). Move to.
<Initial setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting process, the setting process of each port register is executed (S121), and it is determined whether or not the setting key has been inserted (S122). When the setting key is inserted (S22: YES), the setting value changing process (S126) is performed, and this setting value changing process (S126) will be described later.

In the above S122, if the setting key is not inserted (S122: NO), the setting value information is read (read) (S123), and it is determined whether or not the setting value is abnormal (S124). .. If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is completed, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), the set value abnormality is notified (S128). Then, the set value abnormality information is transmitted to the side of the sub-main board 301 (S129), and after that, a loop state is established.
<Setting value change process>

Next, the above-mentioned setting value change process (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. In this set value change process, the RWM of the set value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether or not the set value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been input (S133), and if there is an input of the RWM clear switch (S133: YES), the set value. The set value according to the information is displayed (S134).

If there is an abnormality in the set value information in S132 (S132: YES), the set value is forcibly set and the default value (here, "1") is set in the set value information (S141). Then, after transmitting the set value forced setting information to the sub-main board 301 (S142), the set value is displayed (S133).

After the above S134, it is determined whether or not the set value has been changed (S135), and if there is a change operation (S135: YES), the set value information at that time is incremented by 1 (S136). Further, it is determined whether or not the set value information has reached the set upper limit value (here, "6") (S137), and if the set value information has reached the upper limit value (S137: YES), the set value information at that time is set to ". 1 ”(S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key has been extracted) (S139), and if it is completed (S139: YES), the display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased by S140). Then, the setting value change process is terminated.

In the above S135, if there is no change setting (S135: NO), the process of adding the set value information (S136) to the process of setting the lower limit of the set value (here, "1") (S138) are not performed. , The process proceeds to the determination process (S139) as to whether or not the setting change is completed. Further, in S137, if the set value information has not reached the upper limit value (S137: NO), whether or not the setting change is completed without performing the setting process (S138) of the set lower limit value of S137. To the determination process (S139). Further, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the process of displaying the setting value in S134.

In the above S133, when there is no input of the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), the set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed (S146) as in the above S134. Further, similarly to the above S139, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is extracted) (S147), and if it is completed (S147: YES), the process proceeds to the above S139. The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140), and the set value change process is terminated. If the setting change is not completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to the process of displaying the setting value in S136.

That is, in the above S133, when the RWM clear switch is input (S133: YES), the set value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the set value (the above S135 to S138, etc.) is performed. It will be possible. However, in the above S133, when there is no input of the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), the set value is displayed (S146), but the process for changing the set value as in the above S135 to S138 is performed. The setting value is displayed in a state where it is not possible (this state may be called a setting display mode).
<Game progress interrupt processing>

Next, a game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) that is repeated for each timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle will be described. Although this game progress interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) is omitted in the above description, it has a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in the power-on processing (FIG. 14). It is repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interrupt processing, interrupt operation condition setting (S41, S42), recursion of interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), game machine management (S45 to S70), interrupt permission (S45 to S70). S71) is performed in order to return to the processing before the game progress interrupt occurs.

Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting process (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) in order to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is further set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursive information is a condition for recursing and restarting the monitoring clock of the interrupt processing time monitoring means together with the first recursive information set earlier.

In the management of the gaming machines (S45 to S70), the following processes are sequentially executed in order to manage the gaming machines. First, an input process (S45) is executed in order to monitor the input of a specific signal. Here, the targets of monitoring are various switches mounted on the game board surface, saucer full switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass undetected signal, and disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal. Is.

Subsequently, various random number update processes (S46) are executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, the initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, the initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Further, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed to update the 2-byte timer, and the valid period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed to set the valid period of the second start winning opening 63. ..

Further, the prize monitoring process (S51) is executed, the number of times the prize ball is paid out is stored, the output request of the external information for the board is created, and the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the sub board 104 is performed. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, the prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate (operation port 68), the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S53) is executed in order to store a random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol is executed. In order to perform the processing related to the electric accessory, the normal symbol control processing (S54) is executed. Further, in order to monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. Further, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol is executed. In order to perform the processing related to the display unit 71, the special symbol control processing (S57) is executed. Subsequently, in order to perform the processing related to the special electric accessory, the special electric accessory control process (S58) is executed, and in order to perform the process related to the valid period of the large winning opening, the large winning opening valid period setting process (S59). Is executed, and the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) is executed in order to monitor the change start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, anomaly detection processing (S61) is executed to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, radio wave monitoring, open / closed state of glass frame set / game board frame, and pair glass monitoring. Then, in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Further, in order to request display of the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol display device, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol display device, the game state display process (S63). ), And the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the firing handle 20. In addition, special symbol display, normal symbol display, operation hold ball number display of special symbol display device (70, 71), operation hold ball number display of normal symbol display device, game status display, special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times of continuous operation and the error display.

Subsequently, in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the launch control signal output process (S66) is executed, and in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test device, the test signal output process (S67) is performed. To execute. Further, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the large winning opening (open) solenoid, the solenoid output process (S68) is executed and the effect control command is transmitted, so that the effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and the external information output process (S70) is executed in order to output a signal to the external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

After that, the interrupt enable (S71) is executed, and the control process exits to the return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interrupt is executed, the above-mentioned circulation processing (repeated circulation processing including the random number update processing of S107) of the power-on processing (FIG. 14) is executed. ..
<< Handle status signal inspection processing >>

In the above-mentioned handle state signal inspection process (S64), in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20, the handle state is inspected, and when it is determined as a result of the inspection that the handle state has changed, the handle state monitoring timer is used. Subtract, update the handle state, set the handle state monitoring timer, and request the command transmission of the handle state effect. If it is determined that there is no change in the handle status as a result of the inspection, the handle status monitoring timer is set. When it is determined that the handle timer is being subtracted in the subtraction of the handle status monitoring timer, the subsequent processing related to the handle status is not performed.
<Lottery judgment processing>

Next, the above-mentioned lottery determination process (also referred to as “lottery determination process”) will be described. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not a player has won (a process of performing a big hit lottery determination) using probability data. Further, the lottery determination process can be performed by, for example, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) in the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) described above.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a lottery determination process relating to success or failure. In this lottery determination process, first, when the process proceeds to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as the winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. When the process proceeds to step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big hit and "2" indicates a small hit.

Proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 specifies the address of the probability data according to the game state (probability fluctuation state or normal probability state) and the set value, and acquires the probability data corresponding to the specified address from the lottery table. And store it in the register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

Proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the result is correct. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores a random number value acquired when winning a prize in the start port in a comparison register (for example, a DE register) for lottery, and then acquires it in step S1025. The value stored in the calculated probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain the value of the new comparison register. In this way, the value of the comparison register is updated.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the user has won. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a carry occurs), "1" is set in the carry flag of the flag register. It is set. That is, the carry flag is set. Further, "carry occurs" means that "1" is set in the carry flag. Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the carry flag has been won by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, when "1" is not set in the carry flag, the main CPU 501 determines that the winner has not been won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the carry flag has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the process according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set at the time of "Yes" in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination (for example, if the winning number is 1, the winning number is a big hit, if the winning number is 2, the winning number is a small hit). It will be.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds "1" to the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to obtain a new winning number data (for example, C register) value. That is, the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.

Proceeding to step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repetition count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts "1" from the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) to obtain a new repetition count data (for example, B register) value. That is, the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

Proceeding to step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is "0". Here, when the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is "0", it means that the repetition count has ended, and the repetition count data (for example, B register) is not "0" ("0"). When (greater than), it indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. Then, in step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number of repetitions data (for example, the B register) is "0".

Here, when the value of the B register is "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

Further, when "No" is set in step S1030, the hit / fail determination in step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) to "00 (H)" which is the non-winning data, and ends the process according to this flowchart.

With the above configuration, as described in step S1028, since the process of updating the winning number data is in the lottery determination process, it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table. Further, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, it is not necessary to repeatedly set the same probability data in the lottery table, so that the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In this example, one winning number is provided for each small hit and one for the big hit, and the type of the big hit or the small hit is determined by the symbol random number acquired separately at the time of the hit. However, these types are determined by this processing. Is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repetition count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and the probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine can be used. It is also possible.
<Power cutoff process>

Next, the power-off process executed when the power-off occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power cutoff process, the data of all used registers is saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable / disable state before the power cutoff is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83), and if it is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84). Move on to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is saved (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is saved in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the power off / normal information is saved in the RWM (S86), and the checksum of the RWM is calculated. Then, the checksum data is saved (S87). Then, the RWM is prohibited from accessing (S88), and the reset of the CPU 501 is waited while looping the control process.

Further, in this power off processing, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are performed. Information is set, the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the timekeeping is recursive. Further, in this embodiment, the compulsory setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and at a timing before the process of saving all used registers (S81). It has been evacuated. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state where the monitoring timekeeping recursively. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring timekeeping when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without recurring the monitoring timekeeping in the control process immediately after restarting the power supply. It has become.
<Other control processing modes related to the main board>
<< Control mode related to command transmission timing >>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by a command request before transmission. The command buffer has a plurality of buffers functioning as ring buffers, and is used once in the order of accumulation in the command buffer in the control process for command transmission (here, the effect control command transmission process (S69)). One command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is fetched from the command buffer and transmitted in the game progress interrupt process. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the command with the highest priority is sent first. It is also possible to send a command at any time when a command that needs to be sent occurs in various control processes. When such a method is adopted, the effect command is intensively transmitted in one control processing module such as the effect control command transmission process (S69) during one game progress interrupt process. Instead, each time a command needs to be sent, the command is sent sequentially in each control processing module. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the game progress interrupt processing from the next time onward. Then, for example, there is no delay in command transmission at the start winning command or at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and rapid command processing becomes possible.
<< Control mode related to update of hold memory >>

In this embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is adopted, and the execution order of the first and second plurality of games is regular, so that the hold memory is updated. Is performed in order for each second game or the first game. Therefore, if only the reserved information is updated for each of the second game or the first game, the update of the reserved information is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, instead of giving priority to the first game or giving priority to any of the games, the hold memory is digested in the order in which the start winning is generated and held and stored (winning order digestion). It is also possible to adopt a configuration that is used. Of these, when a configuration is adopted in which the reserved memory is digested in the order in which the start winning is generated, the reserved storage information is updated according to the digestion, the total number of reserved games of a plurality of games is updated, and the winning order is stored. As a result, the information stored on hold can be updated as a whole.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the hold storage has been updated, the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is requested as described above. By including both the symbol 1 storage number command and the symbol 2 storage number command in one command, the required program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern >>

Subsequently, various aspects related to the lottery of the fluctuation pattern will be described. Any one of the modes of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied in one pachinko gaming machine 10, or may be used in combination as appropriate. When a plurality of modes are used in combination, it is possible to use the modes properly based on factors such as a result of success or failure.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning / failing result, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol) are determined for determining the variation pattern. Although used as an element, a variation pattern table corresponding to the combination of these determinants is selected. Then, with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time associated with the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern random number. Further, in this embodiment, regarding the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern table is different depending on whether the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit or a miss. That is, in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern table is selected from among those associated with the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number of success or failure. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern table is selected from among those associated with the game state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the winning / failing random number. Of these, regarding the fluctuation pattern in which the re-lottery time is given for the production in the case of a big hit, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (presence or absence of a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group. The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

Further, when determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine the fluctuation addition information according to the determined fluctuation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent fluctuation time based on the fluctuation addition information. For example, when the selected fluctuation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern production, it is conceivable that the extension of the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is determined after the fact.

Further, as described above, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol, the variation determined earlier in relation to the elements such as the game state and the winning symbol on the sub-main board 301. It is possible to perform an effect of adding an additional time to the time later. Then, in the case of determining the variation time of the comprehensive effect symbol in such an embodiment, it is possible to create various variation patterns while suppressing the number of variation patterns provided in advance as follows. Is. That is, considering the case where the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-ream") is performed, when the fluctuation patterns of the pseudo-ream are simply set individually, the same number of fluctuation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. Need to keep. When the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub-main board 301 are prepared for the variation patterns that are all individually determined on the main board 102 in this way, the total number of variation patterns on the main board 102 is large. Therefore, for example, it is possible to reach a number exceeding 256. Therefore, in order to give an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for expressing the code as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using the variable addition information (variable addition pattern), it is possible to form a variation pattern ex post facto by connecting, for example, random number lottery variation addition information to a relatively small number of basic variation patterns. Is. As a result, a new fluctuation pattern can be formed by combining the fluctuation patterns, so that various fluctuation patterns can be created without increasing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance. It should be noted that the random number value related to the variable addition information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 when the start winning prize is generated as a command for the look-ahead effect. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variable addition pattern so that the variable addition information can be easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed. To further give an example of using the variable additional information, when the probability variation symbol "777" is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the effect symbols 190, the variable additional information is not set and the combination of the effect symbols 190 is used. Once the non-probability variation symbol "666" is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to promote to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the variation mode). (Representation, etc.) may be performed by setting variable additional information.

Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined with the number of reserved balls as an element, and the reference fluctuation pattern table differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four hold 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from a situation where the number of reserved balls is four and the number of reserved balls becomes three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at a stage in which the control process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time does not reach the determination of the fluctuation pattern, which is the process during the later game progress interrupt process. When a new start prize is generated from, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be an element for determining the fluctuation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 3. In this case, in terms of control processing, it is possible to configure the configuration in which the starting prize from the state of the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the fluctuation pattern is not added. In addition, any aspect can be applied to the type of pachinko gaming machine in which the maximum number of holdings (for example, 8) other than 4 is set.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variable pattern random number can be set to the time of the variable pattern lottery. That is, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of a special electric accessory or the like, as an element for performing an appropriate game, for example, in aiming for a fair game as compared with a random number of success or failure. The need for constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variable pattern random number is not intentionally acquired at the time of starting winning, and for example, the variable pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the variable pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, the number of information to be stored at the time of winning the start can be reduced, and the capacity of the program and the memory can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to symbol designation >>

In the symbol lottery, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number. Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical range of the symbol random number is set to "0 to 999", the binary code code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game status such as the number of rounds and the number of time reductions is distributed to the winning symbols (which may be a symbol group), and the number of subsequent rounds, the number of time reductions, and the opening time of the large winning opening are determined according to the winning symbols. And the opening pattern may be determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to store or control the data unique to the gaming state, and the capacity of the memory or the program can be reduced. Further, information (game state designation information) for transmitting a game state to a command for transmitting a symbol or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in this embodiment). ) Can be added. This command is not transmitted to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship between special symbol and production symbol variation time >>

As described above, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the corresponding effect symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop fluctuations in synchronization with each other. Depending on the case, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol 190 may be shorter to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

That is, when the variation of the special symbol or the variation pattern is determined and the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol variation start command (command at the start of variation) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required to send and receive a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation) or the command buffer (the ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) is set and waits. It is conceivable that the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol will be delayed from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol due to the influence of the time until all the existing commands (first-in commands) are sent. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation stop command (command at the time of confirming the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, but a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation at the time of symbol confirmation) is transmitted. ) Sent and received, and the degree of congestion of the command buffer (the degree of the number of commands waiting for transmission) may delay the stoppage of fluctuation of the effect symbol.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is set to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and by performing the fluctuation fluctuation, the special symbol starts the next fluctuation. I try to avoid the situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed later. Due to the delay in processing due to the number of commands, the display during fluctuation may straddle the next fluctuation, but at the end of the fluctuation, there are fewer commands sent to the sub-main board 301 than at the start of the fluctuation, so the amount of delay Is suppressed, and the effect symbol can be almost certainly fixed during the display fixed time of the special symbol (the symbol fixing time related to the special symbol).
<< Preliminary judgment of winning / failing lottery results >>

First, in this embodiment, as described above (FIGS. 9A and 12), the winning / failing random value range in the first lottery and the second lottery is "0 to 65535", and the winning / failing random number value range is "0 to 65535". 0 to 65535 ”is divided into a plurality of random value range (here, A to N) as shown in FIG. 13 (a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13A, of the "0 to 65535", "0 to 205" belongs to the classification of the look-ahead code A, and "206" is the classification of the look-ahead code B. Belongs to. Further, the hit / fail random value values "207" to "210" belong to the classification of the look-ahead codes C to F, respectively. Further, the winning / failing random number values "121-615" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code G, and the winning / failing random number values "616 to 618" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code H.

Subsequently, the winning / failing random number values "619 to 621", "622-624", "625-627", and "628 to 630" belong to the classification of the look-ahead codes H to L, respectively. Further, the winning / failing random number values "64874 to 65534" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code M. Further, in this embodiment, the winning / failing random numbers “631 to 64873” and “65534” belong to the classification of the look-ahead code M.

FIG. 13B shows the contents of each look-ahead code. As shown in the figure, the look-ahead code A means that the pre-reading code A is a hit (big hit) in all settings regardless of the set value. Subsequently, the look-ahead code B means that when the set value is "2" or more, it is a hit regardless of whether it is a normal time or a probability change time. That is, if the read-ahead code B is set value "2" or more, it will show a hit in both normal probability and high probability, but if the set value is "1", it will show a loss. Further, the look-ahead codes C to F mean that if the set value is "3" or more to "6", it will be a hit in both the normal time and the high probability time regardless of the probability state.

Subsequently, the look-ahead code G means that the read-ahead code G will be a hit regardless of the set value as long as it is undergoing probabilistic change. That is, the look-ahead code G shows a hit when the probability is high, but shows a miss when the probability is normal. Further, the look-ahead code H means that if the probability change is in progress, a hit is made with a set value of "2" or more. Further, the look-ahead codes I to L mean that if the probability change is in progress, the set value "3" or more to "6" is a hit. Further, the look-ahead code M means that the hit is a small hit, and the look-ahead code N means that the look-ahead code N is out of order regardless of the set value or the probability state.

Using the look-ahead code grouped in this way, for example, on the main board 102, the look-ahead code to which the acquired random number value belongs is determined, and the information (command) corresponding to the determined look-ahead code is used as the above-mentioned advance notification information. It is possible to transmit to the sub-main board 301. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit advance notice effect as a look-ahead effect in relation to the hit / fail determination result without waiting for the hold to be digested.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the preliminary determination of the type of the special symbol and the preliminary determination of the type of the variation pattern related to the special symbol, the determination based on the random number value range is performed as in the case of the result of the winning / failing lottery described above. It is supposed to be done. The types of special symbols and the types of fluctuation patterns related to the special symbols are provided in large numbers compared to the types of the results of the winning / failing lottery, and the number of look-ahead codes (number of groups) is also larger than in the case of the winning / failing lottery. It has become. However, as a method of pre-judgment based on a random value range, although the random value range and the types of lottery results to be grouped are different, it is possible to perform the same pre-judgment as described above for the pre-judgment. .. Therefore, here, detailed description of the preliminary determination based on the random value range for the symbol advance notice effect and the pattern advance notice effect will be omitted.

By performing the preliminary determination based on such a random value range, it is possible to round the information, and it is possible to create a command related to the preliminary determination with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random values exceeds 1 byte. Therefore, assuming that the random number value information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 as it is (as raw information) for the preliminary determination, the information for identifying which random number is transmitted is transmitted by MODE and the random number is transmitted. In some cases, a 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT) must be transmitted in two steps in order to notify the random number value in order to store and transmit in EVENT.

However, as in this embodiment, by converting the acquired random value into information indicating the range to which the acquired random value belongs and transmitting the information to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced to be smaller than the number of random number values, which is disturbed. Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), it is possible to command the attribute of the acquired random value value with the amount of information of 1 byte. In addition, on the side of the main board 102, a code indicating that fact (for example, undefined or undetermined) is provided in case a situation occurs in which the pre-reading information is not desired to be transmitted, as will be described later. , It is also possible to send a command indicating the code to the sub-main board 301 side.

Here, as the above-mentioned "situation in which the look-ahead information is not desired to be transmitted", for example, when the priority digestion side (eg, the special figure 2 side) is held during normal gaming in the priority digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine. Can be exemplified. Then, in the "priority digestion type" in the above description, for example, as described above, one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) is prioritized over the other (here, the first game). Means something like. Further, the "1 + 1 type gaming machine" in the above description means a gaming machine having a game property in which a plurality of games (here, two) corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed as described above. There is.

In addition, as another "situation in which you do not want to send look-ahead information", there is a hold on the non-priority digestion side (for example, the special figure 1 side) during a specific game (during high base) in the same priority digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine. The case where it occurs can be mentioned. Further, when the priority digestion side (for example, the special figure 2 side) is held during the normal game in the priority digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine as described above, the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the special figure 1 side is executed. If it is inside, the look-ahead effect may be canceled (example: the reserved image in Special Figure 1 changed from red to blue), and conversely, the same gaming machine. If a non-priority digestion side (eg, special figure 1 side) is held during a specific game (during high base) in, even if the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the special figure 2 side is being executed, the look-ahead is performed. It is also possible not to stop the production (example: the reserved image of the special figure 2 is kept as it is).
<Main control processing of sub-board>

Next, the main control processing of the above-mentioned sub-board 104 will be described. Here, as the main control processing, various interrupt processing which is exception processing and processing related to these will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.
<< Interrupt factor and priority level >>

First, in this embodiment, in the sub-main board 301 constituting the sub-board 104, a predetermined signal (reset signal) to the reset terminal provided in the CPU 521 is used as an interrupt factor (factor generation source) in which the CPU 521 has the highest priority. Input and various abnormalities occur. Of these, the reset signal is input when the power is turned on, when an external reset is performed, when the watchdog timer times out, etc., and the sub-main initial setting process described later is performed along with the reset signal input. (See FIG. 22) is executed.

On the other hand, the interrupt when various abnormalities occur is executed depending on whether or not the watchdog timer function (watchdog function) is enabled. That is, if the watchdog function is enabled, the processing of the CPU 521 shifts to, for example, a predetermined infinite loop so that the processing time exceeds the set time of the watchdog timer when a predetermined abnormality occurs. do. Then, when the runaway is detected due to the time-out in the watchdog function, the sub-main initial setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. When the above-mentioned various abnormalities and the input of the reset signal occur at the same time, the reset by the input of the reset signal (sub-main initial setting process) is prioritized.

Another cause of interrupt generation in the sub-main board 301 is reception of a command (main command) from the main board 102. The fact that the command is being received from the main board 102 is determined by detecting the rise of the strobe signal (effect data strobe signal that becomes the timing signal) from the main board 102. When this main command reception interrupt occurs, the main command reception process (not shown) is executed. The priority level of the main command receive interrupt is set to level 7, which is the next highest priority level after the above-mentioned highest priority.

Further, when the above-mentioned watchdog function is enabled, an interrupt is performed when a runaway detection of the CPU 521 is performed without going through a process of intentionally causing a timeout as in the case of the above-mentioned various abnormalities. (Runaway detection interrupt) occurs, and the sub-main initial setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. The priority level of the interrupt by such a normal watchdog timer is level 3, which is four steps lower than the above-mentioned level 7. In this embodiment, the level 4 to 6 interrupts between the level 3 and the above-mentioned level 7 are not executed.

Further, as another interrupt generation factor, there is transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302. The interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub command reception interrupt) is generated when a reception command (sub-sub command) from the sub-sub board 302 is input. The reception command from the sub-sub board 302 conveys to the effect that the sub-sub board 302 has normally received the command when the command (sub-main command) is received from the sub-main board 301. Then, when an interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, the command transmission / reception management process is executed. The command transmission from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 is performed when the monitoring toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 is normally transmitted, as will be described later. The priority of interrupts related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 is level 2.

Further, as another interrupt generation factor, there is communication with the sub-sub board 302. Interrupts related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub communication interrupts) are generated every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this embodiment) as described later. Then, when an interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, communication processing with the sub-sub board is executed. The priority of the interrupt related to the communication with the sub-sub board 302 is the same level 2 as the interrupt related to the transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 described above.

Furthermore, other interrupt generation factors include communication with the RTC clock (real-time clock), generation of timer interrupts (sub-main timer interrupts), interrupt requests for various lamps, etc., and these have the lowest priority. It is set to 1. Of these, at the time of an interrupt related to communication with the RTC clock, communication processing with the RTC clock is executed. Further, the above-mentioned timer interrupt is intended to be used in general game production such as solenoid output processing, motor output processing, and game timer management processing. The timer interrupt is started immediately by the setting at the time of initialization (initial setting), and the timer interrupt is repeated every predetermined cycle (about 1 ms in this embodiment). Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed.
<< Sub-main initial setting process >>

When the power of the sub-main board 301 is turned on, as in the case where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the sub-main initial setting process shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In this sub-main initial setting process, a predetermined address is first set as a stack pointer (S201), and then all interrupts are disabled until various initial settings are completed (S202). Further, in the hardware initialization process (S203), basic settings related to the hardware (register setting, port initialization, etc.) are performed, and in the RWM initialization process (S204), the RWM initialization is performed according to a predetermined condition. Is done. Then, in this RWM initialization, the initial value is prepared for the variable with the initial value, and 0 is cleared for the variable without the initial value. Further, in the RWM initialization process (S204), ROM data (control program, etc.) is expanded to the RWM.

Further, in S205, interrupts other than reception of the main command are prohibited, and subsequently, a power failure recovery error detection process (S206) for setting various error information is executed. In this power failure recovery error detection process (S206), processing is performed according to circumstances such as game characteristics. That is, the sub-main board 301 is provided with a function for dealing with various errors including vibration errors and radio wave errors. However, the functions for dealing with these various errors are selected in advance, and the error detection function is exhibited only for the valid errors. For example, whether or not a predetermined hit occurs when a game ball passes through a specific area, such as a type 1 type 2 type that combines so-called type 1 and type 2 game characteristics, or a so-called ball accuracy spec. The vibration error detection function is effective for models that determine. However, in a model such as the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in which the winning / failing lottery is performed only by the random number lottery, even if the vibration error detection function is provided, the function is selectively invalidated in advance. No special measures are taken for vibration errors.

Subsequently, in the all lamp extinguishing process (S207), an extinguishing request is made to turn off all the lamps, and in the watchdog timer operation start process (S208), based on the setting of using the watchdog timer as the watchdog timer. The watchdog timer is activated. In FIG. 22, the main process (S209) is connected to the processes from S201 to S208, but the processes from S201 to S208 are the sub-main initial setting processes, and the main process (S209). Is performed after the sub-main initial setting process (S201 to S208). Further, in the main process (S209), the main process of the game is managed, and the details of the main process (S209) will be described later.

After the main process (S209), a sleep process (S210) is arranged. Normally, this sleep process (S210) is not executed because the reset operation that performs the sub-main initial setting process is not restored from the main process (S209), but as shown by the broken line arrow in the figure, When this sleep process (S210) is executed for some reason, the transition to the low power consumption mode is performed.
<< Main processing on the sub-main board >>

In the above-mentioned main process (S209), as shown in FIG. 23, the RWM placement address acquisition process (S221) is executed, and in this RWM placement address acquisition process (S221), the program area expanded to the RWM is checked. The start address of the expanded program area is acquired so that it can be performed.

Next, all interrupts are permitted in order to enable interrupts in subsequent processing (S222). Further, in the device initialization process (S223), initialization operations of various devices such as motors, solenoids, and lamps are performed. In the subsequent watchdog clear process (S224), if the setting to use the watchdog timer is made, the watchdog timer is cleared. Further, in the symbol update process (S225), the missing symbols related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c are determined by the counter.

As the counter used here, a three-digit counter of "111" to "999" can be exemplified. For example, when the acquired counter value is "757", the effect symbols 190a to be stopped and displayed are displayed. It is possible to make 190 "757". When the acquired counter value is a combination of stitches such as "111", it is possible to offset the numerical value of a predetermined digit such as "121" to make a combination of outliers.

This symbol update process (S225) may not be executed depending on the adopted method for determining the missing symbol. For example, when the missing symbol is determined by lottery, it is not executed, and specifically, it has the data of the lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all the symbol combinations, and the missing symbol is selected by using the lottery sheet. The control mode as determined can be exemplified.

In the subsequent error effect management process (S226), the error state is monitored, and various error notifications are executed according to the monitoring result.

Next, in the advance notice lottery management process (S228), a lottery for determining the advance notice effect is executed, and the lottery for this advance notice effect is the efficiency of the loop process (main loop process) described later in the main process (S209). In order to improve efficiency), it is divided into several times. That is, when multiple advance notice effects are executed during one change, the lottery process for the multiple advance notice effects is not all performed in one main loop, but multiple main loops. It is executed after multiple lottery divided into. Further, the timing of the lottery is related to the timing of the appearance of the advance notice effect during the fluctuation. For example, for a notice effect that appears at a relatively early timing, such as immediately after the start of fluctuation, the priority of the lottery time is set high, and by performing the lottery at the timing according to the priority, image control is performed as soon as possible. Commands can be sent to the sub-sub board 302 on the side. The various processes performed in the advance notice lottery management process (S228) will be described later.

Next, in the device management process (S229), when there is a device operation request such as a real-time clock (RTC), a lamp, or a speaker, a process for operating the corresponding device is executed.

Further, in the command analysis process (S230), when it is necessary to start the process for responding to the command (main command) received from the main board 102 or when the command data exists in the above-mentioned command buffer, the command analysis is performed. conduct. Then, when the command is analyzed (S231: YES), the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S224), and the main loop is executed. Immediately after receiving the command from the main board 102, since there is command data in the command buffer, the main loop is executed and the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S224) and thereafter. However, if the command buffer becomes empty before the main loop is repeated and the next timer interrupt described later is executed, it is not necessary to perform command analysis, and command analysis is not performed. In such a case, the random number update process (S232), which has a lower priority than the command analysis, is executed by using the generated time without proceeding to the main loop (S231: NO). This random number update process (S232) is a soft random number update process. Further, in this command analysis process (S230), the fluctuation pattern (sub-variation pattern) in the sub-main board 301 is determined. Further, when the data of the lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all the symbol combinations is possessed and the control mode for determining the out-of-order symbols is adopted by using the lottery sheet, the command analysis process (S230) is used for directing. Determine the design.

Regarding the processes related to these command analysis (S230, S231), in other words, for a certain command, immediately after receiving the command, the main process does not proceed to the subsequent processes (here, the random number update process (S232)). The other processes (S224 to S231) in the loop process (S224 to S232) are repeated, and if there are no commands in the command buffer, the process proceeds to the subsequent processes, and as a result, the command analysis process is performed for a certain main command. Immediately after the start of (S230), command analysis is executed, so it does not proceed to the program module placed later, and when command analysis is no longer performed in the command analysis process (S230), it goes to the program module placed later. It can be said that it is something to move forward. If, for example, a checksum calculation is performed after the command analysis determination process (S231), this process is also executed immediately after the command is received, as in the random number update process (S232). It can be said that it is a process that is not done.

In the random number update process (S232), the lottery random number (software random number) related to the effect is updated, and every time this random number update process (S232) is executed, the software random number related to the sub-main board 301 is a new value. Will be updated to. Then, the values sequentially updated in the random number update process (S232) are used as random numbers for lottery in various production modes in the above-mentioned advance notice lottery management process (S228) and the like. Further, the value generated by the random number update process (S232) is for lottery after being calculated with a hardware random number for lottery in various production modes, similarly to the generation of a predetermined random number on the main board 102 described above. It may also be used as a random number.
<< Sub-main timer interrupt processing >>

Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The timer interrupt process occurs every 1 ms, which is a predetermined cycle. Since this timer interrupt process is a level 1 interrupt process having the lowest priority, as shown in the figure, first, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S261). Further, the port input process (S262) is executed, and the port data input process and output process are performed. In this port input process (S262), a process (input process) for confirming a port connected to various sensors (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, position sensor of movable effect member, push button input detection sensor, etc.), and a process (input process), and Information output (output processing) is performed from ports connected to various devices (motors, solenoids, lamps, etc.).

Further, in the port input process (S262), in addition to these ports, a process related to a power supply voltage monitoring port to which a signal indicating a power failure (power failure signal) is input at the time of power failure is also performed. .. Then, when this power failure signal is input, the processing of the CPU 521 prohibits all interrupt processing and shifts to the transfer processing for backing up the stored information. The backup function of the sub-main board 301 will be described later.

Subsequently, the device control data output process (S263) is executed, and device control data output for driving various motors, solenoids, lamps, and the like is performed. For example, in the device management process (S229) of the main process shown in FIG. 23, when a drive control pattern in which a predetermined motor is excited for 100 ms and then degaussed for 100 ms is determined, this device is used. In the control data output process (S263), a time count process of 100 ms is performed.

Further, the effect timer update process (S264) is executed, and the timer value update process (S265) for measuring a predetermined timing in various effects is performed. Then, the button control timer update is executed, and the effective time management timer for managing the period during which the operation of the push button (operation button 22) is valid is updated.

Further, the push button monitoring control process (S266) is executed. This push button monitoring control process (S266) is for controlling the operation button 22 described above, which is a sub-button (push button) for effect, and is a process according to the input state (operation state) of the operation button 22. To execute.

Next, the update of the task control counter (S267) is executed, and the control counter (multitask counter) used for a plurality of predetermined tasks is updated. This control counter updates the count value once every 1 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, with 16 times as one unit. Then, in this embodiment, the task control counter counts the values from 0 to 15 in order every 1 ms, and loops the count of the values from 0 to 15.

Further, as one of the predetermined tasks, the one related to the game effect lamp can be exemplified. Many of the driving modes of the game effect lamp are performed in synchronization with the image in the effect display device 60, and the display switching of one frame (one unit image frame) of the moving image is about 16 ms or about 32 ms (about 33 ms). It is often performed in a cycle such as (sometimes) (16 ms cycle in this embodiment). Therefore, the control counter is designed so that the generation cycle of the control counter related to the game effect lamp forms a relationship such as an integral multiple or an integer fraction with the control unit time (16 ms or 32 ms) in the moving image display. ing. As a result, it becomes easy to design a lamp effect that matches the timing with the image.

Further, regarding the control counter, for example, if a certain process related to the game effect lamp is performed at 16 ms intervals, the process is performed at the timing when the value of the control counter becomes one predetermined value such as 3. .. Further, for the processing performed at 8ms intervals such as the image CPU runaway monitoring processing described later, the processing is performed at two timings where the difference is 8 as in the case where the control counter becomes 1 and the case where the control counter becomes 9. Will be done.

Further, when the cycle generated by the control counter is adjusted to a relatively short cycle such as one cycle (1 ms) of a timer interrupt (sub-main timer interrupt), it is about 30 seconds as in the control of error notification or the like. If the control for counting a relatively long time is performed, the data length to be secured for counting 30 seconds becomes long, and the number of memories required becomes large. Therefore, the cycle of the control counter is set longer than one cycle (1 ms) of the timer interrupt, and the relationship between the control cycle related to other superposed effects (image effects) and an integral multiple or a fraction of an integer. Therefore, the cycle in which the control counter goes around is set to a predetermined cycle (here, 16 ms). Another use of the control counter updated in the task control counter update process (S267) is runaway monitoring (described later) for the sub-sub board 302.

Next, the image CPU runaway monitoring process (S268) is executed, and the runaway monitoring process for the image CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is performed. Here, in this embodiment, the CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is integrated with the image controller 526 in FIG. As described above, a predetermined signal (monitoring toggle signal) that repeats on and off for each frame display of the moving image control is output from the sub-sub board 302. When the toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 does not change continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 1600 ms corresponding to about 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that an abnormality such as a runaway of the image CPU has occurred, and the sub A reset signal (external reset signal) is transmitted from the main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302. After receiving this reset signal, the sub-sub board 302 executes a reset process (sub-main initial setting process) for initializing the state of the sub-sub board 302.

Following this image CPU runaway monitoring process (S268), an error management timer process (S269) is executed. In this error management timer processing (S269), the error management timer is subtracted, and when a timeout occurs, a predetermined processing is executed. Examples of the process at the time of time-out include the process of terminating the above-mentioned error notification. Note that this error management timer counts once for every 16 timer interrupts, and the processing related to error management using the error management timer is also one of the predetermined tasks using the control counter described above. It is one. When this error management timer processing is completed, the process returns to the original processing of the sub-main main processing (see FIG. 23) before the timer interrupt. Here, since the target of interrupt permission is restricted in S261 described above, although not shown, the process returns to the main process of the sub-main after all interrupts are permitted.
<< Communication processing with sub-sub board >>

Next, the communication process with the above-mentioned sub-sub board 302 will be described. In command transmission (sub-main command transmission) from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302, an interrupt (sub communication interrupt) related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 is generated at regular intervals (here, 500 μs), and the interrupt is interrupted. This is done by executing communication processing with the sub-sub board 302 each time. In the communication process with the sub-sub board 302, a buffer check is performed in order to confirm the existence of data to be transmitted, and if there is data, this data is read. Then, the read data is set in the transmission buffer, the settings related to command transmission are updated, and the communication process with the sub-sub is completed.
<< Command transmission / reception management processing >>

Further, when the sub-main board 301 transmits a command to the sub-sub board 302, the above-mentioned reception command (sub-sub command) indicating that the command (sub-main command) can be normally received from the sub-sub board 302 side is sub-main. It is transmitted to the board 301 side. In this command transmission / reception management process, the command is read, the command analysis is executed, and then the command is saved. When receiving a sub-sub command, command reception interrupt processing is executed on the sub-sub board 302. For this command reception interrupt processing, set a flag for executing command reception interrupt processing in the above-mentioned sub communication interrupt. Is executed by. That is, since the input of the sub-sub command from the sub-sub board 302 occurs after the transmission of the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, the command reception interrupt processing is performed incidentally to the processing related to the sub-communication interrupt. It has become something to be interrupted.
<< Control processing on the sub-sub board >>

In the sub-sub board 302, similarly to the sub-main board 301, the sub-sub initial setting process started after the power is turned on, the main process executed after this sub-sub initial setting process, and the sub-sub timer interrupt generated in a predetermined cycle with respect to the main process. The timer interrupt process executed in connection with the above, the sub-main command reception process which is the interrupt process generated in connection with the reception of the sub-main command, and the like are executed. Of these, in the sub-main command reception process, when the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 is received, the process of transmitting the above-mentioned receive command (sub-sub command) indicating that the sub-main command can be normally received is performed. Will be executed.
<Production control mode related to operation input>
<< Specific aspects of the automatic continuous striking function >>

1. 1. Next, various effect modes and control modes of the effect related to the operation input will be described. The "operation input" described here is to generate a signal or change the signal level by human operation on various operation input means such as the operation button 22, the lever L, and the cross key 96 described above. It has a meaning such as letting it.

In this embodiment, as described above, the automatic continuous striking function related to the operation button 22 is installed. The operation mode (button operation mode) of the operation button 22 in which the automatic continuous striking function is exhibited is a continuous operation (long press operation, continuous press operation) for a predetermined time or longer. Then, if a long press operation exceeding a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is detected during the valid period of repeated hits (for example, for about 3 seconds), the long press operation after the predetermined time (continues after the predetermined time). Control is performed assuming that a continuous hit operation is performed for the long press operation). Here, since the single-shot operation is actually performed once at the time when the long-press operation is started (long-press operation start timing), the effect corresponding to the single-shot operation is executed. Then, when the long press operation reaches a predetermined time (for example, when the long press operation continues for 0.5 seconds), it is considered that one single operation in the continuous striking operation is performed (the actual single operation is Although it has not been performed, it is considered that a single operation was performed after 0.5 seconds have passed), and the long press operation for the time exceeding the specified time is performed once every specific time (for example, 0.2 seconds). It is considered that the single-shot operation was performed (the actual single-shot operation was not performed, but it is considered that the single-shot operation was performed every 0.2 seconds after 0.5 seconds passed), and this " It is an automatic continuous hitting (automatic continuous hitting effect, automatic continuous hitting function) that the "deemed single-shot operation" is performed multiple times.

FIG. 27 (c) illustrates the flow (progress) of the game when the automatic continuous striking operation is performed by a time chart. Further, FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) show an example of progress of the game when a single-shot operation is performed (FIG. 27 (a)) and a continuous hit operation for comparison with the automatic continuous hit operation shown in (c). An example of the progress of the game (FIG. 27 (b)) in the case where (a normal continuous striking operation which is a normal continuous striking operation) is performed is shown.

First, in the example of the one-shot operation (example of FIG. 27A), which is the basic operation mode of the button operation, the variation effect is started (variation start), the normal reach occurs (the normal reach effect is started to be executed), and the variation effect is started. A button effect that encourages the player to perform a single operation is being executed. The button effect here is the one-shot effect described above. Then, when the button operation is performed by the player, the effect triggered by the button operation is executed, the effect is developed, and the effect state is shifted to the SP (here, special) reach effect.

Here, as the effect triggered by the button operation, for example, the display content of the effect display device 60 shifts to the next situation, or the movable effect member hidden inside the center decoration 64 is the effect display device 60. Examples thereof include those that appear on the front surface and perform operations for deformation and coalescence, and those that combine these. Regarding the button effect, the effect until the button operation is performed is referred to as, for example, "first half effect" or "pre-operation effect", and after the button operation is performed (the effect triggered by the button operation is started). After that, the effect can be referred to as, for example, "second half effect" or "post-operation effect".

Subsequently, in the example of the normal continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 27B, the variation effect is started (variation start), and the button effect is executed after the normal reach occurs. This button effect urges the player to perform a continuous striking operation with characters such as "Continuous striking". Further, the button effect at the stage before the button operation is performed can be referred to as, for example, "pre-continuous hitting effect".

Then, when the player repeatedly presses the button every short time (for example, every 0.2 seconds), a button effect that changes the image every short time is executed. The button effect when such an operation is performed can be referred to as, for example, a "continuous hitting effect" or the like. A specific example of this "directing during repeated hits" will be described later. Then, in the example of FIG. 27 (b), the production is subsequently developed, and the production state is shifted to the SP (here, special) reach production state.

In contrast to such a continuous striking operation (normal continuous striking operation), in the auto continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 27 (c), a button effect for urging the player to perform the continuous striking operation is executed as a button effect after the occurrence of the normal reach. The effect at this stage can be the same as the effect before the continuous hits related to the above-mentioned normal continuous hit operation.

Then, after the button effect is started, if the player performs a long press operation for a predetermined time or longer, if the button is continuously pressed after that, the above-mentioned normal continuous stroke operation can be performed without performing the continuous stroke operation. An effect similar to the effect during repeated hits (here, meaning the same or similar effect) is executed. Then, in the example of FIG. 27 (c), as in FIG. 27 (b), the effect is subsequently developed to shift to the effect state of SP (here, special) reach.

In the normal continuous striking operation and the automatic continuous striking operation illustrated in FIGS. 27 (b) and 27 (c), for example, the time during which the operation button 22 is continuously pressed (pressing continuation time) is measured in order to detect the button operation. Is possible. Then, in the case of the normal continuous striking operation (FIG. 27 (b)) among these, the pressing duration of the operation button 22 is performed in the situation where the continuous striking effect is performed (the situation where the continuous striking effect flag is set, etc.). When was a short time (for example, less than 0.5 seconds or 0.5 seconds), a normal continuous striking operation (intermittent operation) was performed once (that is, a single operation was performed once in the continuous striking operation effect). It is determined that (was)), and this short-time pressing continuation is performed multiple times (the pressing is temporarily released after the short-time pressing continuation, and then the short-time pressing continuation is repeated), so that the normal repeated hits are performed. It is possible to control the operation.

On the other hand, in the case of the automatic continuous striking operation (FIG. 27 (c)), for the detection of the button operation, for example, in the situation where the continuous striking effect is performed (the situation where the continuous striking effect flag is set, etc.). When the pressing duration of the operation button 22 exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), it is possible to determine that the long pressing operation has been performed and perform control related to the automatic continuous striking operation. The control related to the automatic continuous striking operation is a pressing that becomes the second condition even after the pressing duration of the operation button 22 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the first condition relating to the auto continuous striking operation is satisfied. By maintaining the continuation, the control related to the automatic continuous striking operation is performed until the pressing continuation is released or until the button operation valid period is reached in the situation where the pressing continuation is continued. Further, even when the pressing is stopped once and then the pressing is continued again after the first condition is satisfied, the automatic continuous striking is performed until the predetermined pressing duration (for example, 0.5 seconds) is exceeded and the second condition is satisfied. It is not a judgment.

In FIG. 27 (c), "button pressing (long pressing for a predetermined time or longer)" is described at the pressing start timing of the operation button 22, but the pressing is continued even after that (after the first condition is satisfied). By satisfying the two conditions, during this pressing continuation, after the first predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is exceeded, the pressing is continued even though the normal continuous striking operation is not performed (instead, the pressing is continued). However, at specific time intervals (for example, 0.2 seconds), it is possible to generate the same effect as when performing a normal continuous striking operation.

That is, the first single-shot operation, the second single-shot operation, and the third single-shot operation when the single-shot operation of the operation button 22 is performed five times in a row by the normal continuous hitting operation as shown in FIG. 27 (b), 4 When the effects generated in each of the first single operation and the fifth single operation are the effect 1, the effect 2, the effect 3, the effect 4, and the effect 5 (however, the effects 1 to 5 are not all different modes. That is, either aspect may be the same, for example, effects 1 and 2 may be a blue effect display, effect 3 may be a green effect display, effects 4 and 5 may be a red effect display, and the like), FIG. 27. When the pressing duration of the operation button 22 exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the automatic continuous striking operation as shown in (c), the effect generated at the pressing start timing is the effect 1, and the pressing continuation time is predetermined. The effect generated at the timing when the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is reached is the effect 2, and each timing (for example, the pressing duration is 0.7 seconds) at a specific time interval (for example, 0.2 seconds) from there. , 0.9 seconds, and the timing when 1.1 seconds are reached), the effects are the effect 3, the effect 4, and the effect 5, respectively.

In other words, when the automatic continuous striking operation is performed, the time when the operation button 22 is started to be pressed is regarded as the first single operation (first continuous striking), and the timing when the subsequent pressing duration reaches 0.5 seconds is the timing. Single-shot operation It is considered to be the second (second consecutive hit), and after that, every time the button is pressed for 0.2 seconds, the third, fourth, fifth ... Nth single-shot operation (Nth single-shot operation) It will be regarded as.

The term "automatic continuous striking operation" can mean an operation for satisfying the above-mentioned first condition (here, button pressing is continued for 0.5 seconds or longer). Further, it can also be referred to as an "automatic continuous striking operation" including the fact that the button is continuously pressed even after the first condition is satisfied (the second condition described above). In the following, the term "automatic continuous striking operation" means that the continuation of the button operation is detected after the operation for satisfying the first condition is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that 0.5 seconds are required for the first condition to be satisfied, but the time required for the first condition to be satisfied is not limited to this.

Here, FIGS. 27A to 27C are schematically shown side by side with the single-shot function and the continuous hitting function in order to illustrate the characteristic items of the automatic continuous hitting function. The automatic continuous striking function, the single-shot function, and the continuous striking function are not limited to those exemplified here, and various modes can be adopted.

FIG. 28A shows a more specific example (specific example at the time of the automatic continuous striking operation) regarding the flow of the button operation and the effect related to the above-mentioned auto continuous striking function. In FIG. 28A, the variation time of the variation pattern drawn on the main board 102 is several tens of seconds or more (for example, about 60 seconds), and the effect corresponding to this variation pattern is executed on the sub side. A part of the flow of production is shown in.

In the example of FIG. 28A, the symbol variation is started in the effect display device 60 as shown in the left end portion in the figure. After that, the predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) is a button operation invalid period in which the operation of the operation button 22 is invalid, that is, a period in which the button effect does not occur. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation and the above-mentioned button operation invalid period has elapsed, the button operation valid period is reached, that is, the period during which the button effect is generated (started). Here, this button operation valid period is the automatic continuous hit valid period.

At this point, it is possible to start an effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image to perform a table button effect. The production (production before repeated hits) is being performed. Regarding this pre-continuous hitting effect, FIG. 31 (a) shows an example of the pre-continuous hitting effect.

The pre-striking effect is started as a table button effect with a guide display. Here, it is possible to start the display of the automatic continuous striking valid period and the pre-continuous striking effect at the same timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timings of the two may be different. When the start timings of the two are different, for example, it is conceivable to start the pre-continuous hitting effect after a predetermined time from the start of the automatic continuous hitting valid period (for example, 0.5 to 1 second after the start).

It is also conceivable that the pre-continuous hitting effect is started earlier than the automatic continuous hitting valid period by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 1 second). Further, in the example of FIG. 28 (a), the button operation valid period and the automatic continuous striking valid period are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) is longer than the button operation valid period. ) It is also possible to delay the start of the automatic continuous hitting validity period.

When the sub-main CPU 521 (FIG. 4) of the sub-main board 301 detects the button operation on the operation button 22, the time is measured according to the duration of the button operation. Then, when the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this case), the first condition is satisfied, and it is determined by pressing and holding that the start condition of the automatic continuous hitting is satisfied, and thereafter. The continuation of the button operation (continuation of pressing for 0.5 seconds or more that satisfies the second condition) is regarded as a normal continuous striking operation, and the effect during continuous striking is executed. For example, the continuation of the button operation (the continuation of pressing that satisfies the second condition) after the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds) is the interval of a specific time (here, the continuation of pressing that satisfies the second condition). It is considered that the normal continuous striking operation (at intervals of 0.2 seconds) is performed, and the effect during continuous striking is executed as if the normal continuous striking operation is performed at the interval of a specific time.

As the above-mentioned continuous striking effect (here, the continuous striking effect related to the automatic continuous striking), the one shown in FIG. 31B can be exemplified. In FIG. 31B, a brilliant image 404, which is an effect element, is displayed around the button image 401. The brilliant image 404 in the figure expresses the brilliance emitted from the button image 401 to the periphery. Then, the brilliant image 404 is colored white or white, and the brilliant image 404 appears or disappears in a relatively short period (for example, at intervals of 0.2 seconds, which is the same as the interval of automatic repeated hits). (Blinking display) is repeated during the continuous striking effect. However, the bright image 404 is blinked at the start of the button operation and at the timing when the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds) (the timing when the above-mentioned first condition is satisfied). Can be done. In other words, the button operation (single-shot operation) is actually performed at the start of the button operation (at the time of the first button operation) until the automatic continuous hitting is started (until the automatic continuous hitting is performed at a specific interval of 0.2 seconds). , The bright image 404 is blinked, and the button operation is actually performed from the timing when the start condition (first condition) of the subsequent automatic continuous hitting is satisfied (the timing when the duration of the button operation reaches 0.5 seconds, which is a predetermined time). It is considered that the button operation (single-shot operation) was performed even if (single-shot operation) was not performed, and after that, the automatic continuous hits are performed at specific intervals of 0.2 seconds (single-shot operation is performed at 0.2-second intervals). It is considered to be done).

The effect element is not limited to the one that appears or disappears, and for example, it is possible to make the button image 401 blink as a part of the effect element. It is also possible to use an image other than the button image 401 and the bright image 404 as an effect element. Here, both the button image 401 and the brilliant image 404 can be combined and captured as one button image 401.

The brilliant image 404 of such a continuous striking effect is displayed not only in the continuous striking effect related to the automatic continuous striking but also in the case where a normal continuous striking (actual continuous striking) is performed. That is, it is possible to make the displayed image common to the continuous striking effect related to the automatic continuous striking and the continuous striking effect related to the normal continuous striking. Then, in the continuous striking effect related to the normal continuous striking, the brilliant image 404 can be blinked at the timing in response to the button operation. Further, the continuous striking effect in which automatic continuous striking is possible is a continuous striking effect in which normal continuous striking is possible. As a modification, a part of the continuous striking effect in which normal continuous striking is possible may be a continuous striking effect in which automatic continuous striking is impossible.

Further, not limited to this, even in the continuous hitting effect related to the normal continuous hitting, after the bright image 404 is displayed in response to the first button operation, the bright image 404 automatically blinks at a constant cycle. It is also possible to display it. It can be said that such an effect control mode is the same as the continuous striking effect related to the automatic continuous striking and the continuous striking effect related to the normal continuous striking.
<<< Relationship between the valid period of automatic repeated hits and the valid period of repeated button hits (if they are the same) >>>

Further, the following control can be performed for the valid period of automatic continuous striking (automatic continuous striking valid period). For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), it is possible to make the automatic continuous striking valid period the same as the normal continuous striking valid period (here, referred to as “button continuous striking valid period”). Then, it is also possible to assume that the start timing and the end timing are the same for the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period. It can be said that the button operation valid period in such a specification is also the auto continuous hit valid period and the button continuous hit valid period. That is, it is preferable to simply refer to the period during which automatic continuous striking and normal continuous striking are possible as the "button operation valid period" (although it may be described separately for convenience, "button operation". The "valid period" can be said to be a period that is both an "automatic repeated hit valid period" and a "button repeated hit valid period"). Here, it is possible to make the automatic continuous striking valid period different from the button continuous striking valid period, but such an example (such as the example of FIG. 28B) will be described later.

Further, it is also possible to set both as a common continuous striking valid period without distinguishing between the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period. In the example of FIG. 28A, it can be said that the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period are provided as the common continuous striking valid period here.
<<< Relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect (automatic continuous hitting effect) and the normal continuous hitting effect >>>

Further, the continuous striking effect related to the automatic continuous striking can be terminated by repeating the blinking of the bright image 404 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and as another specification, the blinking of the bright image 404 is a button. It can be executed multiple times (repeatedly) by button operation until the end of the operation validity period. Here, the continuous striking effect related to this automatic continuous striking can be referred to as, for example, "auto continuous striking effect" or "auto continuous striking effect". In the following, when explaining the continuous striking effect related to the automatic continuous striking, the term "auto continuous striking effect" will be used preferentially, and when it is necessary to use them properly, the term "auto continuous striking effect" will be used. ..

Similarly, the effect during continuous striking related to normal continuous striking can be ended when the button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and as another specification, the button operation can be performed. It can be executed multiple times (repeatedly) by button operation until the end of the valid period. Here, the continuous striking effect related to this normal continuous striking can be referred to as, for example, "normal continuous striking effect". In the following description, the term "normal continuous hitting effect" is used as necessary to distinguish it from "automatic continuous hitting effect" (and "automatic continuous hitting effect").
<<< Relationship between the valid period of automatic repeated hits and the valid period of repeated button hits (in case of difference) >>>

Further, the relationship between the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period as described above may be different in at least one of the start timing, the end timing, the length of the period, and the like. For example, FIG. 28 (b) shows an example of a case where the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period are different. Since the description here is based on a specific example of the automatic continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 28 (a), the description of the same part will be omitted as appropriate.

In the control example shown in FIG. 28 (b), first, the operation of the operation button 22 is invalid for a predetermined period (here, 3 seconds as in the example of FIG. 28 (a)) after the symbol change is started. It has become. After that, the automatic continuous striking valid period is reached, the auto continuous striking operation is performed, and when the button is continuously pressed for a time exceeding a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds related to the fulfillment of the first condition) (following the fulfillment of the first condition). When the second condition is satisfied after the pressing is continued for 0.5 seconds or more), the continuous hitting effect (automatic continuous hitting effect) related to the automatic continuous hitting is executed.

At this time, the effective period of repeated button presses related to the normal continuous press operation has not yet started, as shown in a state of being slightly biased to the right in the figure. Then, a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) after the automatic continuous hitting valid period is reached, the button continuous hitting valid period is started. In FIG. 28 (b), the start timing of the button continuous striking valid period is indicated by a two-dot chain line. As described above, in the control example in which the difference between the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period is provided, it can be said that the auto continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period are provided as non-common continuous striking valid periods.

Further, in the example of FIG. 28B, the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period end at the same timing after a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the automatic continuous striking valid period may end before (or after) the button continuous striking valid period. Further, the automatic continuous striking valid period may be started after the button continuous striking valid period.
<<< Other relationship between the valid period of automatic repeated hits and the valid period of repeated button hits >>>

Further, although not shown, for example, the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period may exist a plurality of times in one fluctuation. In this case, the button operation valid period (a set of the automatic continuous hit valid period and the button continuous hit valid period) related to the continuous hit operation is set as one set, and these sets are set with one variable period, for example, with the button operation invalid period in between. It is conceivable to prepare three times.

In addition, during one button effect during one fluctuation, a continuous striking effect related to automatic continuous striking (referred to as "auto continuous striking effect" in the explanation here) and a continuous striking effect related to normal continuous striking (normal continuous striking effect). It is also conceivable that the middle production) will be performed at different times so that they do not overlap on the time axis or more. For example, a case where the player first performs a normal continuous striking operation, but changes his mind and switches to an automatic continuous striking operation, or vice versa, can be exemplified. In such a case, it is possible to continue the automatic continuous striking effect after the normal continuous striking effect, or conversely, to continuously execute the normal continuous striking effect after the auto continuous striking effect. .. When the automatic continuous hitting effect is continued after the normal continuous hitting effect, the number of repeated hits related to the normal continuous hitting effect (the number of single-shot operations) and the number of repeated hits related to the subsequent automatic continuous hitting effect (the button press start for performing the automatic repeated hitting operation). The total of the time is the first time of repeated hits, the lapse of a predetermined time is the second time, and the specific interval after that is the third and subsequent times) is the number of repeated hits during one button production (during the continuous hitting production), and the automatic continuous hitting production is performed. If you want to continue the normal continuous hitting effect later, the number of repeated hits related to the automatic continuous hitting effect (the first time the button is pressed to perform the automatic continuous hitting operation is the first time, the predetermined time elapses the second time, and the specific interval after that is the third time or later. The total number of repeated hits (number of times of single-shot operation) related to the subsequent normal continuous hitting effect is the number of repeated hits during one button production (during the continuous hitting effect).

As described here, the continuous striking effect accompanied by the guide display can be referred to as, for example, "continuous striking effect as a table button effect". However, not limited to this, it is also possible to perform a back button effect (described later) without a guide display at least before the button operation. Such a continuous striking effect without a guide display can be referred to as, for example, a "continuous striking effect as a back button effect". Then, this "repeated hitting effect as a back button effect" will be described later.
<< Relationship between repeated hit operation and button operation in other modes >>

2. 2. Next, regarding the continuous striking operation (here, both the automatic continuous striking operation and the normal continuous striking operation are included), the relationship with the button operation of another aspect related to the operation button 22 can be considered. For example, the button operation valid period related to the continuous striking operation (here, the continuous striking operation valid period, which is at least one of the auto continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period) is set to about 6 to 10 seconds. .. On the other hand, the button operation valid period (single operation valid period) related to the single operation is set to about 3 seconds. That is, it is possible to set the continuous hit operation valid period to be relatively longer than the single-shot operation valid period. Further, as described above, a plurality of types of button operation valid periods may be provided according to the type of button effect. For example, when comparing a single-shot operation effect and a continuous hit operation effect, the button operation valid period is longer in the continuous hit operation effect. (In the case of providing a plurality of types of single-shot operation effects and a plurality of types of continuous-stroke operation effects, the average value of the button operation valid periods in the multiple types of single-shot operation effects is more than the average value of the multiple types of continuous-stroke operation effects. It is possible to configure the average value of the button operation validity period to be relatively long).
<< Combination of back button function and automatic repeated hitting function >>

3. 3. Next, it is possible to consider an effect mode and a control mode in which the automatic continuous striking function and the above-mentioned back button function are combined. The back button effect is an effect of not performing the guide display or limiting the guide display as described above. Then, for example, it is possible to execute the back button effect while enabling the automatic continuous striking function.

FIG. 29A schematically illustrates the relationship between the automatic continuous striking function and the back button effect. Since the description here is based on the case of the front button effect shown in FIG. 28A, the description of the same part will be omitted as appropriate. In the example of FIG. 29 (a), as shown in the left end portion in the figure, the symbol variation is started in the effect display device 60, and the button operation valid period (the valid period of the continuous striking operation) is reached after the button operation invalid period. There is.

At this point, there is no effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, and the effect before repeated hits is not performed. After that, when the button operation to the operation button 22 is detected, the sub-main CPU 521 (FIG. 4) satisfies the condition (first condition) of the automatic continuous striking function by long-pressing for more than a predetermined time (0.5 seconds, etc.). It is determined that the button has been hit, and as described above, by continuing the button operation after a predetermined time (and continuing to press the button for 0.5 seconds or longer that satisfies the second condition), the automatic continuous hitting is performed as a continuous hitting effect. The automatic continuous hitting effect, which is the effect inside, is executed.

In addition, when a button operation for a shorter time (0.2 seconds, etc.) is detected instead of a long press, the sub-main CPU 521 performs normal continuous hitting conditions (continuous hitting composed of multiple single-shot operations). It is determined that the condition of one-shot operation of one operation) is satisfied, and as the button operation is repeated, the normal continuous hitting effect, which is the normal continuous hitting effect, is performed as the continuous hitting effect. Will be executed.

To give a specific example of the effect related to the back button effect, first, when a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined character appears), there is no effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image. The operation button 22 is operated by the player during the valid period of the button operation. When the operation button 22 is operated by the player in the situation where the predetermined effect is performed at this time, for example, on the moving image, the predetermined character performs a specific action (for example, starts running, waving, or waving). Perform one of the actions (such as picking up a predetermined item), or display a cut-in image (cut-in display) in which a predetermined image is suddenly inserted in front of the predetermined character. Etc. can be exemplified. In this embodiment, the back button effect mainly related to the continuous striking operation will be described later, but the back button effect related to the single-shot operation may be installed. That is, the button operation is in the valid period even though there is no effect accompanied by the guide display such as the button image, and the single operation is performed during the button operation valid period, so that the predetermined character as described above is performed. Performs a specific action (eg, running, waving, or picking up a given item), or a given image is suddenly inserted in front of the given character. The cut-in image may be displayed (cut-in display), or a special sound according to the expectation of a big hit may be output (the effect is generated by a single operation without the need for repeated hitting operations). Here, depending on the mode of movement of the predetermined character (eg, whether to start running or waving), depending on the mode of cut-in display (eg, whether the cut-in is blue or red), and depending on the mode of special voice (eg, whether the cut-in is blue or red). For example, it is preferable that the voices such as "Big hit expectation 10%!" And "Big hit expectation 90%!") And the big hit expectation are different. In this case, an effect generated by performing the repeated hit operation in the back button effect related to the continuous hit operation (for example, a blinking display in which the bright image 404 appears or disappears during SP reach as described above) and a single shot. An effect generated by performing a single operation in the back button effect related to the operation (for example, by performing a single operation at the timing when a predetermined character appears before the development of SP reach, the predetermined character performs a specific operation as described above. It is preferable to make it different from the effect of performing, displaying a cut-in image, or outputting a special sound.

The behavior of the player when the operation button 22 is operated is such that although it is not known whether or not the effect triggered by the button operation is executed, the player tries to operate the operation based on intuition. Further, among the back button effects, examples of the effects of limiting the guide display described above include those using only the light emission of the LED. That is, a guide display such as a button image is not performed, and only LED light emission (for example, light emission of a light emitting member or a decorative body attached to the operation button 22) is performed.

Here, such a continuous striking effect without or limited to the guide display can be referred to as a “continuous striking effect as a back button effect” as described above. Further, the control mode of the sub-main CPU 521 in which the back button function is combined with the auto continuous striking function to perform the effect is that the back button effect has a continuous striking effect and the auto continuous striking function can be executed. It is possible. Further, it can be said that such a control mode is a combination of the back button function and the automatic continuous hitting function (back button and automatic continuous hitting).

Further, in the continuous hitting effect as the back button effect, as described above, the effect before the button operation (or up to the button operation) is set as the first half effect (pre-operation effect), and the button operation and the subsequent (or after the button operation) are performed. It is possible to make the production of (only) the latter half production (effect after operation). To give a more specific example, in the first half effect (pre-operation effect), in a situation where the normal reach effect is performed after the start of the fluctuation, the player performs a button operation of repeated hits or automatic continuous hits. Then, the production becomes the latter half production (production after operation), and develops from normal reach to SP reach. In this case, the effect during the button operation constitutes a part of the latter half effect in the present embodiment. For example, when a symbol effect or the like is displayed along with a button operation and then develops into SP reach, a symbol effect or the like that is an effect during the button operation is displayed, or an SP reach effect that progresses after the button operation is performed. It is possible to make the latter half of the production including. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during the button operation triggered by the button operation can be referred to as, for example, "operation time effect" or "middle stage effect" to distinguish it from the latter half effect.

Here, it can be said that the back button effect as described above is a relatively inconspicuous effect as compared with the front button effect. For example, it can be said that the back button effect is not an effect that is positively performed like the display of a button image in the front button effect, but an effect that does not specifically prompt the player to perform a specific operation. Further, it is possible that the back button effect is an effect in which the player cannot specify which part of the effect is related to the button operation. Further, an effect in a situation where a predetermined character performs a specific action (for example, an action such as running or waving a hand) on a moving image or a situation in which a predetermined cut-in display is displayed is referred to as a back button effect. It is possible.

Further, the above-mentioned first half effect can be referred to as a back button effect. In this case, the production of a part of the period (here, the final stage) in the first half production can also be referred to as a back button production.

Further, the above-mentioned latter half effect can be referred to as a back button effect, and the effect of a part of the latter half period (for example, the early stage or the period from the early stage to the middle stage) can be referred to as a back button effect. Further, as a broader way of thinking than these ways of thinking, it is possible to collectively refer to the first half effect and the second half effect as a series of back button effects. It is also possible to regard the back button effect as a passive effect and the front button effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image as a positive effect.

Further, as the effect performed by the button operation (the effect when shifting from the first half effect to the second half effect), for example, the display content of the effect display device 60 shifts to the next situation, or the inside of the center decoration 64. Examples thereof include a movable effect member hidden in the display device 60 appearing on the front surface of the effect display device 60 to perform an operation for deformation and coalescence, and a combination thereof. In the present embodiment, the effect performed by the button operation (the effect when shifting from the first half effect to the second half effect) constitutes a part of the second half effect, as described above. However, it is not limited to this, and the production performed by the button operation (the production when shifting from the first half production to the second half production) is referred to as, for example, "operation operation production" or "middle stage production", and is referred to as the second half production. It is also possible to distinguish.

Further, for example, when the button effect is performed in the situation of SP reach, it can be expressed that the SP reach is continued (or promoted) in the latter half effect. Furthermore, even if there is a button operation (including automatic repeated hitting operation), there are cases where the reach does not develop or the SP reach does not continue, but in such cases, the production does not proceed to the second half production. can.

Although the automatic continuous hitting effect as the back button effect is described here, other button effects as the back button effect can also be executed. For example, it is possible to execute a normal continuous hitting effect as a back button effect, a single-shot button effect as a back button effect, and the like.
<< Relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect as the back button effect and the subsequent effect >>

4. Subsequently, as described above, in the automatic continuous striking function as the back button effect, there is a possibility that a specific effect after that (the change) may occur and the effect may be developed depending on the mode of the effect during continuous hitting. It is conceivable to make the sex different. This continuous striking effect is mainly described here as an auto continuous striking effect, but since the continuous striking effect capable of auto continuous striking is a continuous striking effect capable of normal continuous striking, not only auto continuous striking but also normal continuous striking can be performed. It should be added that it is possible to generate an effect (the effect is executed during repeated hits).

For example, a plurality of types are provided for each of a mode of a continuous hitting effect by automatic continuous striking and a subsequent effect (a post-continuous striking effect effect that may be performed after the continuous striking effect is completed). Then, when a predetermined mode of effect is selected from a plurality of types as the effect during continuous hitting by automatic continuous hitting (actually, the continuous hitting is performed, that is, the operation is repeated, so that the effect is gradually produced. (When the aspect changes), as a subsequent effect (effect after continuous hitting effect), one corresponding to the mode of the continuous hitting effect by automatic continuous hitting is executed. It can be said that the continuous hitting effect in such an effect is an "automatic continuous hitting effect as a back button effect", whereas when the same effect is performed as a front button effect, it is a "front button effect". It can be said that it is an "automatic continuous hitting production".

To give a specific example, for the automatic continuous hitting effect, a plurality of types of moving images in which only the effect elements are different are provided. As the effect element, the coloring in the above-mentioned bright image 404 (FIG. 31 (b)) can be applied, but various other elements can also be adopted. Then, first, the basic coloring of the bright image 404 is set to a pale white color or a white color, and after the automatic continuous striking operation becomes effective (until then, as described above, the timing of starting the button press and the timing of starting the button press). It is determined that the operation was performed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, and blinking is displayed at each timing), and the bright image has a cycle (for example, 0.2 second interval) set to imitate the actual continuous striking operation. The blinking display in which 404 appears and disappears is repeated during the continuous striking effect.

Further, in the automatic continuous striking effect during normal reach, the above-mentioned effect element (here, the bright image 404) is not only white or white, but also, for example, blue or blue coloring, yellow or yellow coloring, green or green coloring. Coloring, red or reddish coloring, and even a giraffe pattern may blink.

Further, this effect element is configured so that the mode of production can be changed step by step by repeatedly hitting, that is, by repeating the operation. For example, the 1st to 3rd repeated hits are white or white, but it is desirable that the mode changes such that the 4th repeated hit is blue or blue, and the 5th repeated hit is yellow or yellow. Further, although the details will be described later, whether or not the subsequent effect (effect after repeated hit effect) is executed according to the final mode (here, the type of the color displayed last within the button operation valid period). It is configured so that the degree of expectation of is different, and when the subsequent effect is executed, the tendency of what kind of subsequent effect is executed is different.

The degree of expectation that the subsequent production will be performed increases in the order of white or white <blue or blue <yellow or yellow <green or green <red or red <giraffe pattern. Further, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent effect is executed, when there are, for example, effect A, effect B, and effect C as possible subsequent effect candidates (for example, effects A to C). Each type is a different type of SP reach production, and the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of production A <production B <production C), and the expectation that the subsequent production with high jackpot expectation will be executed is white or white. The order is higher in the order of system <blue or blue system <yellow or yellow system <green or green system <red or red system <giraffe pattern. Further, it is possible to perform a production lottery each time the button is pressed, and to execute a predetermined production (for example, a production with high expectation) when the button is pressed, and to perform a production promotion lottery each time the button is pressed. If you win, you can be promoted from the current mode to a more promising mode (for example, from blue to yellow, from green to red, etc.).

In addition, it is possible to develop from normal reach to the first half of SP reach, there is an automatic continuous hitting effect as a back button effect in the first half of SP reach, and it is possible to further develop from the first half of SP reach to the second half of SP reach. do. In the automatic continuous striking effect during the first half of the SP reach, the above-mentioned effect element (here, the bright image 404) is not only white or white, but also, for example, blue or blue, yellow or yellow, green or green. Coloring, red or reddish coloring, and even a giraffe pattern may blink. In addition, the auto-repeated effect during normal reach may be a front button effect, and the auto-repeated effect during the first half of SP reach may be a back button effect. (For example, the auto-continuous striking effect during normal reach is an effect element generated in the button image 401 described above, but the auto-continuous striking effect during the first half of SP reach is an effect element generated in a specific character. May be there). Alternatively, the automatic continuous hitting effect may not be performed during the normal reach, and the automatic continuous hitting effect as the back button effect may be performed in the first half of the SP reach.

Further, this effect element is configured so that the mode of the effect can be changed step by step by performing the continuous hitting, that is, by repeating the operation, as in the case of the automatic continuous hitting effect during the normal reach. For example, the 1st to 3rd repeated hits are white or white, but it is desirable that the mode changes such that the 4th repeated hit is blue or blue, and the 5th repeated hit is yellow or yellow. Further, although the details will be described later, whether or not the subsequent effect (effect after repeated hit effect) is executed according to the final mode (here, the type of the color displayed last within the button operation valid period). It is configured so that the degree of expectation of is different, and when the subsequent effect is executed, the tendency of what kind of subsequent effect is executed is different.

Regarding the degree of expectation that the subsequent production will be executed, as with the auto-striking effect during normal reach, white or white <blue or blue <yellow or yellow <green or green <red or red <giraffe pattern It gets higher in order. Further, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent effect is executed, when there are, for example, effect A, effect B, and effect C as possible subsequent effect candidates (for example, effects A to C). Each type is a different type of SP reach second half production, and the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of production A <production B <production C), and the expectation that the subsequent production with high jackpot expectation will be executed is white or The order is white <blue or blue <yellow or yellow <green or green <red or red <giraffe pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a production lottery each time the button is pressed, and to execute a predetermined production (for example, a production with high expectations) when the button is pressed, and to perform a production promotion lottery each time the button is pressed. If you win, you can be promoted from the current mode to a more promising mode (for example, from blue to yellow, from green to red, etc.).

As described above, when the effect element (brilliant image 404) is displayed in red, red (red effect), or giraffe pattern (giraffe pattern effect), it is better than when it is displayed in other colors. However, it is conceivable to develop SP reach at a high rate when the automatic continuous striking operation is performed. In this case, it can be said that the red effect display is displayed in a higher expectation mode than the white effect display, the blue effect, and the like.

Also, when the effect element (brilliant image 404) becomes a giraffe pattern effect than when it becomes a red effect, it will develop to SP reach at a higher rate when the auto repeated hit operation is performed. It is conceivable to do. In this case, it can be said that the giraffe pattern effect display is displayed in a higher expectation mode than the red effect display.

Further, when the effect display is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, red, red, giraffe pattern, etc.), it is possible to perform the effect in such a manner that the development to SP reach is confirmed. In this case, the red or red effect display or the giraffe pattern effect display has better reach than other colors (for example, blue or blue, yellow or yellow, green or green). The effect is displayed in such a high expectation mode.

Furthermore, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation for the subsequent production different depending on the mode of the automatic continuous hitting production, not limited to the expectation of reach development (reach development expectation). For example, when the effect display related to the automatic continuous striking effect is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, a giraffe pattern), it is possible to perform the effect in such a manner that a big hit is obtained at a rate close to 100%. In the case of this jackpot expectation, it can be said that, for example, the giraffe pattern effect display is a higher expectation mode than the above-mentioned red or red effect display.

It should be noted that the relationship between the normal reach and the SP reach as described above, the relationship between the first half of the SP reach and the second half of the SP reach, the relationship between the normal reach and the second half of the SP reach, the pre-reach production and the normal reach, and the pre-reach It is also possible to apply the relationship between the effect display and the jackpot expectation as described above to the relationship between the effect of the above and the first half of the SP reach, and the relationship between the effect before the reach and the second half of the SP reach. ..

Further, when the above-mentioned effects A to C are applied to the latter half of the SP reach, they can be referred to as, for example, the SP reach second half effect A, the SP reach second half effect B, the SP reach second half effect C, and the like. The term "SP reach second half production" is also used in the explanations that follow, but in any of the terms "SP reach second half production", the SP reach is defined as the first half based on the predetermined timing and the situation of the production. It is used in the same sense in that it refers to the production of the latter part when considered separately in the latter half.

Further, regarding the relationship between the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach, the following can be exemplified. For example, the "SP reach first half" is the SP reach for a predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a big hit is relatively lower than the "SP reach second half", and the player becomes a big hit in the "SP reach first half". It is a production that expects a transition to the "SP reach second half" rather than hoping that the winning will be notified, and the "SP reach second half" is longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.) of the "SP reach first half". It is a reach effect for a long predetermined time (about 60 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a big hit is relatively higher than that of the "SP reach first half", and the player expects to be notified of the winning of the big hit.
<< Various aspects related to back button production >>

As for the back button effect as described above, various effect modes and control modes can be adopted in addition to the matters described so far. For example, as the automatic continuous striking effect, the example in which the blinking cycle of the bright image 404 (FIG. 31 (b)) is set to a predetermined time (0.2 seconds) has been described above, but in the case of the auto continuous striking effect as the back button effect, the flashing cycle is set to a predetermined time (0.2 seconds). Unlike the automatic continuous hitting effect as the front button effect, it is conceivable that the blinking cycle of the bright image 404 is set to another predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (in this case, in the automatic continuous hitting effect as the front button effect). 0.2 second intervals).

By doing so, it is possible to perform the auto-continuous striking effect as the back button effect and the auto-continuous striking effect as the front button effect described above in different modes (performed differently from the continuous striking interval). When the back button effect and the front button effect are different from each other in this way, the effect mode may be different due to the difference in various other factors. For example, it is possible to make the shape and form of the bright image 404 different, or to use an effect element other than the bright image 404 for the continuous hitting effect as the back button effect, for example. In addition, the auto-continuous striking effect as the back button effect is an effect of blinking the bright image 404, but the auto-continuous striking effect as the front button effect is completely different from that, and it is often the effect of gradually raising the meter in the meter image. , The continuous striking interval at the time of automatic continuous striking may be different (0.5 seconds for the former and 0.2 seconds for the latter).

Further, the start timing of the automatic continuous hit effective period in the back button effect may be before or after the occurrence timing (execution start timing) of the first reach (here, normal reach). Further, the effective period of automatic continuous striking in the back button effect may be longer than the effective period of automatic continuous striking in the front button effect (what is the auto continuous striking effect as the back button effect and the auto continuous striking effect as the front button effect? It is a different effect, for example, the automatic continuous hit effect as the table button effect is executed before the normal reach occurs). Since the guide display is not made or restricted in the automatic continuous hitting effect as the back button effect, the player may not notice it, so it is desirable to set it for a relatively long time. However, as a modification, the automatic continuous hitting effect as the back button effect is relatively short because the automatic continuous hitting effect period is such that only a known player can operate it (that is, it is difficult to operate accidentally). It may be time.

Further, as the automatic continuous hitting effect as the back button effect, a plurality of types of automatic continuous hitting effect (for example, auto continuous hitting effect A and auto continuous hitting effect B, etc.) are provided, and the blinking cycle of the bright image 404 differs depending on the type of the automatic continuous hitting effect. It is possible to adopt a mode of production such as As such an effect, for example, when the auto continuous striking effect A (first auto continuous striking effect) is executed, the bright image 404 is blinked every 0.5 seconds, and when the auto continuous striking effect B (second auto continuous striking effect) is executed, the brilliant image 404 is blinked. For example, the bright image 404 is blinked every 0.2 seconds. Further, the same configuration may be applied not only to the automatic continuous striking effect as the back button effect but also to the auto continuous striking effect as the front button effect. That is, a plurality of types of automatic continuous striking effects (for example, auto continuous striking effect C and auto continuous striking effect D, etc.) are provided as the auto continuous striking effect as the table button effect, and the blinking cycle of the bright image 404 differs depending on the type of the auto continuous striking effect. It is possible to adopt a mode of production such as As such an effect, for example, when the auto continuous striking effect C (third auto continuous striking effect) is executed, the bright image 404 is blinked every 0.5 seconds, and when the auto continuous striking effect D (fourth auto continuous striking effect) is executed, the brilliant image 404 is blinked. For example, the bright image 404 is blinked every 0.2 seconds.

Further, when the effect mode is different depending on the type of the auto-repeated effect, the button operation valid period of the auto-repeated effect A (auto-repeated effective period) and the button operation valid period of the auto-repeated effect B (auto). It is possible to make the length of time different depending on the effective period of repeated hits). Further, as an effect before the auto continuous hit operation is performed, for example, when a plurality of cut-in displays can be continuously performed, the number of cut-in displays is made different between the auto continuous hit effect A and the auto continuous hit effect B. , Etc. are also conceivable.

Further, when the back button effect is executed, even if the player operates the button in a mode (here, long press) in which the automatic continuous hit operation is performed during the front button effect, the automatic continuous hit effect is not executed. It is also possible to. By doing so, it is possible to invalidate the automatic continuous striking operation at the time of the back button effect, and to prevent the continuous striking effect from being executed unless the player performs a normal continuous striking operation (intermittent operation).
<< Relationship between the change notice effect, which is the previous stage effect, and the automatic continuous hit effect >>

5. Next, it is possible to think about the relationship between the possibility (ratio) that the display mode of the auto-repeated hitting effect as the back button effect becomes a high expectation mode and the effect performed before the auto-repeated hitting effect. be. Although the specifications for the back button effect are described below, it should be added that the same configuration can be applied to the front button effect.

For example, in the change at that time (the change), the situation where the button operation valid period related to the back button effect is reached without performing the front button effect (the situation where the back button function is executed) after the change starts. Think (Because of the illustration, the explanation is given in the situation where the button operation is valid without performing the front button effect, but the front button effect is performed, then the button operation invalid period, and then the back button effect. It may be the situation where the button operation is valid). FIG. 29 (b) shows a flow of a series of effects performed by a combination of a notice effect in the change (for example, the change notice effect such as a dialogue notice or a step-up notice suggesting a big hit expectation) and an automatic continuous hit effect. (Relationship between the automatic continuous striking function and the fluctuation notice effect) is schematically illustrated. Since the description here is based on a specific example of the automatic continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 28 (a), the description of the same part will be omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 29B, the fluctuation advance notice effect is executed in the variation (the variation) at the time when the automatic continuous striking effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation notice effect is selected from a plurality of types provided. For example, there are white line notice, blue line notice, red line notice, etc. as the line notice group, and the white step-up notice, as the step-up notice group, using the notice (line notice) effect in which the character display is colored. There are blue step-up notice, red step-up notice, etc., which is selected or not selected from the dialogue notice group, and which is selected or not selected from the step-up notice group. As the effect, the advance notice effect is not executed at all, or at least either the dialogue advance notice or the step-up advance notice is executed.

Then, depending on the type of the variation advance notice effect selected, there is a possibility that the mode of the effect during continuous striking by the subsequent automatic continuous striking will be a relatively high expectation mode (the effect element is white or white or blue or blue). Make it different from the system (the possibility of becoming red or red or giraffe pattern), or make the expectation of whether or not the subsequent production (effect after repeated hitting production) is executed different, and the subsequent production When it is executed, it is configured so that the tendency of what kind of subsequent effect is executed is different. Regarding the degree of expectation that the subsequent production will be executed, in the dialogue notice group, the white dialogue notice <blue dialogue notice <red dialogue notice increases in this order, and in the step-up notice group, the white step-up notice <blue step-up notice < It increases in the order of red step-up notice. Further, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent effect is executed, if there are possible subsequent effect candidates such as effect A, effect B, and effect C (for example, the effects A to C are Each type is a different type of SP reach production, and the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of production A <directing B <directing C). Then, the order is higher in the order of white line notice <blue line notice <red line notice, and in the step-up notice group, the order is white step-up notice <blue step-up notice <red step-up notice. That is, during the fluctuation, the effect executed as the change advance notice effect (for example, a predetermined cut-in display or a specific character) is performed with respect to the effect in the stage before the button operation valid period and the automatic continuous hit effect executed after that. It is possible to have a correlation related to the development (or big hit) of the production based on (which can be said to be a foundation or a base point) based on (an example of an action).

In addition to the above, as the fluctuation advance notice effect performed before the button operation valid period, the coloring of the fluctuation information display 198 in the above-mentioned fluctuation information display unit 195 (FIGS. 8A and 8B) is changed. I can exemplify things. In this case, when the fluctuation information display 198 is displayed in a giraffe pattern rather than in red or red-based coloring before the button operation validity period (when it is displayed in a high expectation mode). ) Makes it possible to perform an automatic continuous striking effect in a high expectation mode at a high rate when a continuous striking operation (here, an auto continuous striking operation) is performed. After that, as described above, the rate of SP reach development (or big hit) is higher in the case where the automatic continuous hitting effect is the effect in the high expectation mode than in the case where it is not.

Further, not limited to this, when the fluctuation notice effect (here, the notice by coloring the fluctuation information display 198) is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, red or red), the SP reach is reached after the automatic continuous striking operation. It is also possible to produce in such a way that it is confirmed that it will develop. In this case, the display of the high expectation mode related to the reach development as compared with the case where the fluctuation advance notice effect is performed in other colors (for example, blue or blue, yellow or yellow, green or green, etc.). Will be.

Further, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation for the production after the automatic continuous hitting operation different depending on the difference in the fluctuation advance notice effect, not limited to the expectation of reach development (reach development expectation). For example, if the fluctuation notice effect is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, a giraffe pattern), it will be a big hit at a rate close to 100%, and if it is performed with a red or red effect display, it will be a 60% rate. It is possible to produce in such a way that it becomes a big hit. When the jackpot expectation is set in this way, it can be said that the giraffe pattern effect display is a production of a high expectation aspect regarding the jackpot rather than the effect display such as red.
<< Relationship between pre-reading production, which is the previous stage production, and automatic continuous hitting production >>

6. Further, in addition to the various relationships described above between the fluctuation advance notice effect and the subsequent automatic continuous hit effect, it is also possible to add a relationship with other effects. For example, it is possible to determine the relationship between the hold look-ahead effect and the change when the hold that was the target of the look-ahead becomes the digestion target (change performed as the change).

FIG. 30A schematically shows a flow of a series of effects (relationship between the auto-repeated hit function and the pre-reading notice effect) when the variation in which the auto-repeated hit effect is performed after passing through the pre-reading notice effect is reached. Is illustrated in. Since the description here is based on a specific example at the time of the automatic continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 28 (a), the description of the same part will be omitted as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 30 (a), the hold look-ahead notice is started by the change two times before, targeting the change (the change) in which the automatic continuous hitting effect is performed. Here, the fluctuation when the hold that was the target of pre-reading becomes the target of digestion (when the fluctuation becomes the fluctuation) can be referred to as “target fluctuation” or the like.

For example, as a hold change that is a hold look-ahead effect, a change (target change) when a blue hold change is performed and then a hold that has been changed to blue is consumed is the change notice effect (here, the change information). Consider the case where the notice by coloring of the display 198) becomes blue, and the effect of blue or blue coloring (here, the above-mentioned effect display) is performed in the continuous striking effect in the fluctuation. As described above, blue or blue-based effects can be used as effects with relatively low reach development expectations and jackpot expectations. Such an effect can be referred to as, for example, a weak effect. Then, regarding the production mode in which both the hold look-ahead effect and the change notice effect (here, the notice by coloring the change information display 198) are blue or blue, for example, the effect is changed from a weak effect to a weak effect. It is possible to name it.

Further, as the hold change which is the hold look-ahead effect, the blue hold change is similarly performed, but in the subsequent change notice effect (here, the notice by coloring the change information display 198), the case where the color is red is considered. Red and red-based productions (or more giraffe-patterned productions, etc.) have relatively high expectations for reach development and big hits, and such productions are called, for example, strong productions. It is possible. Then, the effect mode in which the hold look-ahead effect is blue or blue and the change advance notice effect is red or red can be referred to as, for example, a weak effect to a strong effect.

Further, as for the production that changes from a weak production to a weak production, it can be said that the look-ahead production is a weak production and the target fluctuation is also a weak production. Further, unlike this, it can be said that the look-ahead effect is a weak effect and the target fluctuation is a strong effect for the effect from the weak effect to the strong effect. In the above-mentioned example, the notice of the fluctuation information display 198 is shown by coloring as the fluctuation notice effect, but as the change notice effect, the line notice (the weak effect corresponds to the white line notice, and the strong effect corresponds to the red line notice). Is also good. In that case, the production that changes from a weak effect to a weak effect is a production that is held in blue in the look-ahead effect and becomes a white line as the fluctuation notice effect, and the effect that changes from a weak effect to a strong effect is a production that changes from a weak effect to a strong effect in the look-ahead effect. It is a production that becomes a red line as the fluctuation notice production with blue hold. Further, unlike this, for an effect that changes from a strong effect to a weak effect, for example, when a red hold change is performed as a hold change that is a hold look-ahead effect, and then the hold that has been changed to red is exhausted. In the fluctuation (target fluctuation), it can be said that the pre-reading effect is a strong effect and the target variation is a weak effect in the case where the white dialogue notice is executed as the change notice effect. Also, regarding the automatic continuous hitting production, it can be said that the blue or blue production is a weak production with relatively low reach development expectation and jackpot expectation, and it can be said that the red or red (or more giraffe pattern) production. It can be said that the production of) is a strong production.

Then, when the hold look-ahead effect and the auto-continuous hitting effect executed after that are to have a correlation related to the development (or big hit) of the effect, even if the hold look-ahead effect is a weak effect. If the fluctuation advance notice effect is a strong effect, it is possible to determine the selection ratio of various effects so that the automatic continuous hit effect tends to be in a high expectation mode (relationship between weak, strong, and high).

Also, unlike this, if the hold look-ahead effect is a strong effect, the selection ratio of various effects is determined so that the automatic continuous hit effect tends to be a high expectation mode even if the fluctuation advance notice effect is a weak effect. It is possible to keep (relationship of strong / weak / high). Furthermore, if both the hold look-ahead effect and the fluctuation advance notice effect are weak effects, it is difficult for the automatic continuous hit effect to be a high expectation mode (relationship between weak, weak, and high), and if both are strong effects, they are relative. It is also possible to make the automatic continuous hitting effect a high expectation mode at a high ratio (80% or more, etc.) (relationship of strong / strong / high, more specifically, relationship of strong / strong / super high). This is a relationship in which the automatic continuous striking effect is more likely to be in a high expectation mode than when only one of the hold look-ahead effect or the fluctuation advance notice effect is a strong effect). Here, the effect of the high expectation mode related to the automatic continuous hitting effect can also be referred to as a strong effect related to the automatic continuous hitting effect.

Here, the hold look-ahead effect is taken as an example of the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of look-ahead effect can also be adopted. For example, the above-mentioned continuous notice (here, the genuine one) is adopted as the look-ahead effect, and the content of the continuous notice and the effect display (this effect display is an effect display displayed as a genuine continuous notice, for example, on the screen. It is an effect display that is displayed small in the four corners, and it is possible to distinguish between a weak effect and a strong effect by changing the mode (which is different from the effect display in the continuous hit effect). Further, the genuine continuous notice may be simply referred to as a look-ahead continuous notice, and the pseudo continuous notice may be simply referred to as a pseudo continuous notice (pseudo continuous effect, pseudo continuous effect).

Here, as an example of a series of productions in the previous section << Relationship between automatic continuous hitting production as back button production and subsequent production >>, it is possible to develop from normal reach to the first half of SP reach, and in the first half of SP reach. There is a back button, and I explained the production that it can be further developed from the first half of SP reach to the second half of SP reach. Even for such an effect, it is possible to make a sound that applies the above-mentioned "weak / weak / high" relationship. In other words, the hold look-ahead effect is a weak effect, the fluctuation notice effect before reach or during normal reach is a weak effect, and various effects are selected so that the automatic continuous hit effect in the first half of SP reach tends to be a high expectation mode. It is possible to set the ratio.

Subsequently, similarly, regarding the relationship between the look-ahead effect, the fluctuation advance notice effect, and the automatic continuous hit effect, it is possible to determine the tendency of the effect selection based on the look-ahead effect. For example, depending on the type of the hold look-ahead effect, the ratio of the automatic continuous hit effect to the effect of the high expectation mode can be different. If the hold look-ahead effect is a weak effect, it is difficult to perform the automatic continuous hit effect in the target fluctuation in a high expectation mode (relationship between weak and low), and if the hold look-ahead effect is a strong effect, the continuous hit effect in the target change. It is possible to determine the selection ratio of both effects so that it is easy to perform in a high expectation mode (relationship between strong and strong).

Further, even when the look-ahead effect is used as a reference, it is possible to make the tendency of the automatic continuous hit effect different depending on the combination with the change advance notice effect. For example, if the look-ahead notice effect is a weak effect, the ratio of the automatic continuous hit effect to the high expectation mode is relatively low regardless of whether the change advance notice effect is a weak effect or a strong effect. , It is possible to set the selection ratio of various productions (relationship between weak, unquestioned, and high). In this case, it is preferable that the fluctuation pattern in the target fluctuation is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern scheduled to be developed into a specific SP reach effect (the above-mentioned effect C) having a variation time of 30 seconds or more). Is.

Further, unlike this, if the look-ahead notice effect is a strong effect, the ratio of the automatic continuous hit effect to the high expectation mode is relatively high regardless of whether the change advance notice effect is a weak effect or a strong effect. It is also possible to set the selection ratio of various productions so that it will be higher (relationship between strong, unquestioned, and high).

Not limited to these, for example, when the look-ahead notice effect is a weak effect, the automatic continuous hit effect has a higher expectation when the change advance notice effect is a strong effect than when the change advance notice effect is a weak effect. It is possible to determine the selection ratio of various effects so that the ratio of the modes is relatively high (relationship of weak / strong advantage / relative high).

Further, unlike this, for example, when the look-ahead notice effect is a strong effect, the automatic continuous hit effect is more highly expected when the change notice effect is a strong effect than when the change advance notice effect is a weak effect. It is also possible to set the selection ratio of various effects so that the ratio becomes relatively high (relationship of strong / strong advantage / relative high).
<< An example of an indicator effect combined with an automatic continuous hit effect >>

7. Next, the relationship between the automatic continuous striking function and the above-mentioned indicator display (indicator display) function can be considered. The indicator display is a physical amount in various usage forms of the operation button 22, such as the remaining time of the button operation valid period related to the operation button 22, the amount of repeated hits, which is the degree of repeated hits, or the duration of long press. It is a production (indicator production) that can express a conceptual increase or decrease in quantity. In each usage mode, the display mode is different, and instead of having the same indicator have multiple roles (for example, in one indicator display, the remaining time of the button operation valid period and the amount of repeated hits, which is the degree of repeated hits). It is preferable to have a dedicated indicator display for each usage mode (rather than showing both). Further, when used as a continuous hitting effect, the indicator effect can adopt various modes such as an aspect of accurately expressing the number of repeated hits and a mode in which the amount of repeated hits increases at a constant rate if the repeated hits are detected. ..

32 (a) to 32 (d) show an example of an indicator effect when the amount of repeated hits of the operation button is shown. In this indicator effect, the indicator image 402 is displayed (combination display) in combination with the button image 401. Here, the effect of the combination of the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 as described above can be referred to as a button effect accompanied by the indicator image 402, an indicator effect accompanied by the button image 401, or the like.

The indicator image 402 (here, an indicator image for the operation amount indicating the amount of repeated hits) is displayed in a predetermined indicator image display area, and is displayed in combination with the button image displayed in the button image display area. Has been done. The indicator image 402 is displayed in a horizontally long strip shape at the lower part of the operation button image (button image) 401, and has a meter unit 403 inside. At the time when the display of the indicator image 402 is started, the sky (empty) state is displayed by a predetermined coloring (black color or the like) using the entire meter unit 403 (see FIG. 32 (a)).

When a guide display such as "Repeat hit" is performed in the empty state shown in FIG. 32 (a), the continuous hit valid period is started, and the player repeatedly hits, with the passage of time, FIGS. 32 (b) to FIGS. As shown in 32 (d), the continuous striking amount display as shown by hatching is performed with a predetermined coloring (green or the like). This continuous hitting amount display is performed in a mode in which the tip gradually moves continuously from the left end to the right end in the figure. Then, the area of the continuous striking amount display gradually increases, and when it reaches the right end as shown in FIG. 32 (d), it indicates that the continuous striking amount has reached the full amount (full).

Here, FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the continuous hitting amount is 20%, 50%, and 100% of the whole in the order of (a) to (d). Such a continuous striking amount display does not necessarily have to be performed according to a change in the actual continuous striking amount. For example, from the beginning to the middle of the change in the amount of repeated hits, the amount of repeated hits increases at a certain high speed, but at the end of the game, the rate of increase in the amount of repeated hits slows down and does not reach the full amount (full). It is also possible to create a production that fuels the expectation that the amount will be full. In addition, in the case of a hit or in the case of a high expectation fluctuation (a fluctuation in which the SP reach effect C is executed), the amount of repeated hits is full (full), but in the case of a miss or a low expectation fluctuation (variation in low expectation). If the fluctuation is such that the SP reach effect is not executed or the SP reach effect A is executed), the continuous hitting amount is not full. In other words, the continuous striking amount is an apparent continuous striking amount, and does not increase according to the actual continuous striking amount. take.

Further, the indicator is not limited to the one shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), and various modes can be adopted. For example, by gradually increasing (or decreasing) the number of patterns in animal patterns such as giraffe pattern, leopard pattern, and zebra pattern, which are composed of a large number of patterns, as the amount of repeated hits increases, the sense of the amount of repeated hits is played. It is conceivable to give it to others. It should be noted that not only the animal pattern but also, for example, a change in the number of footprints of an animal can be used as a scale display to notify the amount of repeated hits.

Further, the indicator effect as described above is provided as a part of the effect when the result of the winning / failing lottery is shown to the player. The effect of showing the result of the winning / failing lottery to the player can be referred to as, for example, a "lottery result notification effect", and the indicator effect used for the lottery result notification effect is, for example, "lottery result". It can be called "notification-related indicator production" or the like.

Further, although not shown, in the indicator effect, when the instruction amount increases as the number of times the operation button 22 is repeatedly pressed increases, the number of times the operation button 22 is pressed is detected and the number of times the operation button 22 is pressed increases. It is possible to increase the amount of instructions according to the pace. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while repeated hits are detected, it is possible to increase the instruction amount at a predetermined pace assuming actual repeated hits.

Further, in such a case, for example, at the end of the instruction amount increase, the increase speed slows down and the maximum amount (full tank) is not easily reached, and the player is expected to be full. It is possible. In addition, although the amount of instruction increases, it is possible to perform an effect such that the indicator effect ends without reaching the full tank.

Then, when the tank is full, it is conceivable to raise expectations for reach development and big hits compared to when the tank is not full. In addition, the expectation of reach development and big hit is higher when the indicator production is finished in a situation where the tank is full or relatively close to the tank, than when the indicator production is finished with the increase amount being relatively small. It is conceivable to do so.

Further, it is also possible to use such an indicator effect as an effect indicating the amount of continuous hits related to the automatic continuous hits. Here, in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), the indicator image 402 illustrates an effect showing an increase in the indicated amount (here, time). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to perform an effect indicating an instruction amount that can cause a phenomenon such as the remaining time.
<< Diversification of the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the lottery result notification related indicator effect >>

8. Subsequently, regarding the indicator effect, it is possible to determine the relationship with the automatic continuous hit effect in addition to the above. First, in the continuous striking effect (here, the pre-continuous striking effect), the button image 401 accompanied by the indicator image 402 is displayed. Then, when the automatic continuous striking operation is performed and the process shifts to the automatic continuous striking effect, as described above, the indicated amount of the indicator increases as the elapsed time of the auto continuous striking effect increases. However, as described above, the indicator display indicating the amount of repeated hits (display of the indicator for the operation amount) should be an indicator display different from the indicator display indicating the elapsed time (display of the indicator for the remaining time) (separate display). ) Is desirable, and it is desirable to simultaneously display an indicator display indicating the amount of repeated hits and an indicator display indicating the elapsed time. In this case, it is desirable that the indicator display showing the amount of repeated hits is displayed at a position farther from the button image than the indicator display showing the elapsed time, and the indicator display showing the repeated hit amount is better than the indicator display showing the elapsed time. However, it is desirable that the display area is large.

Furthermore, in the automatic continuous striking effect, a plurality of types of effect display execution periods are provided. The execution period of the effect display referred to here is not the blinking cycle (length of one cycle) of the bright image 404 image, but the length of the period (duration) in which the blinking of the bright image 404 is repeated. Then, when the automatic continuous striking effect is executed, the continuous striking effect of any length is selected.

Further, even if the types of the automatic continuous striking effects are different, it is possible to use (also use) the indicator image 402 having the same (common) display mode (this indicator image is an indicator display indicating the elapsed time). .. As the "same (common) display mode" referred to here, those having exactly the same appearance and size (same), or those having the same appearance but different sizes can be exemplified. In this case, even if the type of the automatic continuous striking effect is different, both the button image and the indicator image have the same appearance and size, or both the button image and the indicator image have the same appearance but different sizes. Become. Here, it has a plurality of types of automatic continuous hitting effects, and has a second automatic continuous hitting effect (for example, during reach in a high base state) rather than a first automatic continuous hitting effect (for example, an effect that occurs before reach in a low base state). Even when the button operation valid period is longer (for example, the former is 5 seconds and the latter is 10 seconds), the same indicator image is used (also used) as described above. Therefore, the speed of increase / decrease of the indicated amount (remaining time) in the indicator image is different, that is, the speed is set to be relatively high in the first automatic continuous hitting effect, and the speed is relatively slow in the second automatic continuous hitting effect. do. By doing so, it is possible to perform an indicator effect expressing the difference in type depending on the speed of increase / decrease (change speed) of the indicated amount (remaining time). Further, regarding the button image 401, it is possible to recognize whether or not the button is pressed accurately depending on whether the button is repeatedly hit (automatic continuous hit operation or normal continuous hit operation) or not. , It is desirable to configure the display mode to be different (for example, red during continuous striking operation, blue during non-continuous striking operation, etc.). The indicator image described here is an indicator image showing the elapsed time.

Further, the above-mentioned "same (common) display mode" is not limited to exactly the same, and for example, it is possible to include things that can be said to be equal. As examples of things that can be said to be equal, for example, those having similar figures in appearance, and those that can be said to be similar as a whole, although they are not exactly the same, can be exemplified.

Further, the above-mentioned "same (common) display mode" may include, for example, one in which the button image 401 is the same but the indicator image 402 is different. Further, it is also possible to use both the button image and the indicator image (or one of them) at the time of the automatic continuous striking effect and the normal continuous striking effect. Further, it is also possible to use both the button image and the indicator image (or one of them) at the time of the continuous hitting effect and the time of another button effect (during a single-shot effect or a long press effect).

In addition to this, the indicator image 402 (this indicator image is an indicator display indicating the elapsed time) is displayed in combination with the button image 401 during the normal continuous striking effect, but the indicator image 402 is displayed during the auto continuous striking effect. It is also possible to perform an effect such as not being displayed. Further, it is also possible to perform an effect such that the indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401 only during the single-shot effect (or only during the long-press effect), but the indicator image 402 is not displayed during the continuous hit effect. The indicator image described here is an indicator image showing the elapsed time.

Subsequently, as a more specific example of the effect related to the automatic continuous hitting effect using the indicator effect, the following can be given. For example, as an example of the automatic continuous striking effect, the indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401 as illustrated in FIG. 33 (a). Further, when the player performs the automatic continuous striking operation, the automatic continuous striking effect on the button image 401 (such as blinking of the brilliant image 404 shown in FIG. 31B) is performed, while the instruction amount of the indicator image 402 is increased. increase. When the number of times the operation button 22 is pressed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the display of the indicator image 402 becomes full, and both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased. Further, for example, when the effect lottery related to the indicator display is won, the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 can be deleted. Specifically, it is conceivable to perform a production lottery to see if the tank is full each time the button is pressed, and to erase the image if the image is won. The indicator image described here is an indicator display showing the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator display indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to delete the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

Here, the time when both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased is not limited to when the tank is full, for example, when it is 25%, 50%, or 75% of the full tank. It is possible to set multiple periods such as, and so on. An example of erasing the indicator image 402 and the like at such a plurality of times will be described later. The indicator image described here is an indicator display showing the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator display indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to delete the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

Further, for example, when the effect lottery related to the indicator display is won, the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 can be deleted. Specifically, it is conceivable to perform a production lottery to see if the tank is full each time the button is pressed, and to erase the image if the image is won. The indicator image described here is an indicator display showing the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator display indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to delete the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

After that, although not shown, an image (lever image) schematically showing the above-mentioned lever L (FIG. 21 (b)) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 60 by the player. Appears with a display prompting the operation (for example, a character display such as "pull the lever"). When the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pulling toward the lever L) with respect to the lever L through such a lever effect, a predetermined cut-in effect is performed, and development from normal reach to SP reach, or There is a continuation of SP reach (that is, development from the first half of SP reach to the second half of SP reach).

Here, when the SP reach is continued as described above, the effect up to the lever effect is referred to as the SP reach first half effect (or "SP reach pre-effect", etc.), and the subsequent effect is referred to as the SP reach second half effect (. Alternatively, it can be referred to as "directing after SP reach"). Then, in the latter half of the SP reach effect, it is possible not to execute the back button effect as related to the continuous hit effect. Alternatively, in the first half of the SP reach effect, the back button effect as described above is adopted (the back button effect related to the continuous hit effect can be executed), that is, the effect display that can progress step by step as the continuous hit effect is performed. It suggests the feasibility of the subsequent effect (the effect after the continuous hitting effect, here the SP reach second half effect) and / or the execution content when the subsequent effect is executed, but in the SP reach second half effect, such a continuous hit Instead of executing the back button effect as related to the effect, a single-shot operation effect or a continuous hit operation effect as the front button effect is performed, and the effect generated by the front button effect (post-operation effect in the front button effect) It may be configured so that a big hit or a miss can be notified. Furthermore, it is possible to make the expectation of reach development and the expectation of big hit different depending on the production result of the automatic continuous hitting effect as the back button effect.

Further, as described above, it is possible to provide a plurality of times when both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased. In this case, it is conceivable that the degree of expectation of the effect development and the jackpot will differ depending on the difference in the time when the indicator image 402 or the like is erased. For example, the closer the indicator image 402 or the like is erased to the full tank (the larger the instruction amount), the higher the expectation for the development of production and the jackpot. It is possible. The indicator image described here is an indicator display showing the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator display indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to delete the indicator display indicating the remaining time at the same timing.
<< Relationship between auto-striking effect and environment setting-related indicator effect >>
<<< Basic matters related to volume control and light intensity control >>>

9. Subsequently, it is also possible to determine the relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect and the indicator effect provided separately from the indicator effect described above. As described above, the indicator effect displayed in association with the button effect related to the result notification of the winning / failing lottery can be referred to as "lottery result notification related indicator effect" or the like. However, for example, the indicator is displayed even in the environment setting such as volume adjustment (volume adjustment) and light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment).

It can be said that such an indicator display is an indicator effect used for environment setting, unlike the indicator effect related to the result notification of the winning / failing lottery. The indicator effect related to such an environment setting can be referred to as, for example, an "environment setting-related indicator effect".

Specific examples of the environment setting-related indicator effect include a volume control indicator effect, which is an indicator effect for volume adjustment, and a light amount adjustment indicator effect, which is a light amount adjustment indicator effect. The term "light intensity adjustment" is used in the same meaning as "brightness adjustment", and in the description of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, "light intensity adjustment" can be paraphrased as "luminance adjustment". ..

FIG. 34 (a) shows an example of a display at the time of volume adjustment (volume adjustment screen display), and FIG. 34 (b) shows an example of a display at the time of light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment screen display). The display related to the environment setting like these can be regarded as a production from the viewpoint of showing to the player. Therefore, in the following, the display for adjusting the volume and indicating the currently set volume level is referred to as "volume adjustment effect", and is the display for adjusting the amount of light and the currently set light amount level. The display for indicating the above is referred to as "light intensity adjustment effect". In addition, the display for adjusting the volume and indicating the currently set volume level is called "volume adjustment display", and the display for adjusting the amount of light is used to indicate the currently set amount of light. The display can also be referred to as a "light intensity adjustment display".

The volume control effect shown in FIG. 34 (a) and the light amount adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34 (b) are displayed superimposed on other effects, for example, in the effect display device 60. Further, as for the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect, basically, the variation standby waiting for the start of the variation related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the variation effect related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the like are performed. It can be displayed during fluctuations. Therefore, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect are at least superimposed and displayed on the changing effect symbol and the stopped effect symbol. In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation notice effect (line notice, step-up notice) is also superimposed and displayed. In such a case, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect have a higher display priority (displayed on the front side) than the effect symbol and the fluctuation advance notice effect. However, there are exceptions among them, such as a notice by coloring the change information display 198, which is the change notice effect indicating that the change is currently occurring, and the above-mentioned mini indicating that the change is currently being made or stopped. The effect design is not displayed superimposed on the volume adjustment effect or the light amount adjustment effect.

Here, it can be said that "waiting for fluctuation" is a state in which the special symbol or the effect symbol has not changed. Further, the variable standby state can be referred to as a variable stop state (fixed stop state) or a variable stop state (fixed stop state). Then, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress by displaying the variable waiting state (the screen display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the hold display (hold image) does not exist).

Further, it can be said that "waiting for fluctuation" is a kind of the state of waiting for the game among the states of the gaming machine. In addition to "waiting for fluctuation", the state of waiting for the game includes the demo screen (during the customer waiting demo), the adjustment screen (during the display of the environment settings), the initialization notification, and the predetermined abnormality notification. Etc. can be included. Of these, during a predetermined error notification, an error that can restore the control state of the gaming machine to the normal state without turning on the power again if the error is canceled (referred to as "recoverable error" or the like). It means that the notification about (possible) is in progress.

It is also possible to display both the volume control effect and the light amount adjustment effect during the above-mentioned customer waiting demo (standby demo). During the customer waiting demonstration, a moving image (waiting movie) indicating that the player is not changing is displayed. By displaying this waiting movie, it is possible to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 10 is a so-called vacant platform and can be played. While the standby movie is being displayed, the first decorative symbol described later is not displayed, but the second decorative symbol described later can be displayed. Alternatively, neither the first decorative symbol nor the second decorative symbol may be displayed. The waiting moupie during this customer waiting demo can be displayed in both the non-electric support state and the electric support state, and in the electric support state, the waiting moupy and the right-handed effect can be superimposed and displayed. It is suitable (the right-handed effect has a higher display priority and is displayed on the front), so even during a customer waiting demo, by checking the right-handed effect, the current game status can be changed to electric support. The state can be recognized without looking at the fluctuation state of the first decorative symbol (the fluctuation time is shorter than that in the non-electric support state because the time is shortened during the electric support state).

During such a customer waiting demonstration, although not shown, the image of the volume control effect and the image of the light amount adjustment effect can be displayed side by side in a horizontal row without the operation of the cross key 96 as described later. It is conceivable (conversely, during the fluctuation or the fluctuation standby, the image of the volume adjustment effect or the image of the light amount adjustment effect that was hidden is displayed by operating the cross key 96). However, even during the customer waiting demonstration, if the cross key 96 is not operated, the image of the volume adjustment effect and the image of the light amount adjustment effect may not be displayed. Even if the cross key operation is performed during the demo, the customer waiting demo is not canceled (the display of the waiting movie is maintained), and the volume is adjusted to the front of the waiting movie during the customer waiting demo. The image of the effect and the image of the light amount adjustment effect are displayed (they are superimposed on the waiting movie, but the display priority is higher than that of the waiting movie). Further, in addition to these, it is conceivable to display, for example, a selection menu screen (not shown) in which images of the effect for selecting the above-mentioned automatic button operation (automatic button operation setting effect) are arranged in a horizontal row. ..
<<< Example of volume control effect >>>

First, the volume control effect shown in FIG. 34A is the volume button (here, the left arrow key 96c, or the left arrow key 96c) of the cross keys 96 (here, the left arrow key 96c) during the fluctuation standby or fluctuation. It is displayed when the right arrow key 96d) is operated. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the volume control effect, the speaker mark 406 indicating the speaker and the volume level mark 407 indicating the volume level are displayed (the volume level mark effect is performed). Further, a cross key mark 408 representing a cross key is displayed below the speaker mark 406, and the characters "volume control" are displayed below the cross key mark 408.

In the cross key mark 408, the part corresponding to the left arrow key 96c (FIG. 20 (a)) and the right arrow key 96d (also FIG. 20 (a)) used for increasing / decreasing the volume is emphasized by a method such as highlighting. It is displayed. Further, an operation button mark 409 indicating an operation button is displayed below the volume level mark 407, and an "end" character indicating the end of the volume setting is displayed below the operation button mark 409. There is.

In the volume control display example in FIG. 34 (a), the volume level is the minimum (MIN) level 1, and of the plurality of arcs of the mark 407 indicating the volume level, only the leftmost arc is a bright color. It is highlighted in. In the example of FIG. 34 (a), the outline of the leftmost arc is drawn by a thick line to show that the display is reversed.

When the right arrow key 96d is pressed once in this state, the volume level becomes level 2, the mark on the right side is also highlighted (not shown), and the number of marks to be highlighted is two. At this time, the sound output from the speaker 21 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 increases according to the change in the volume level, and the volume increases. Further, when the right arrow key 96d is pressed once, the volume level becomes level 3 and the number of highlighted marks becomes three.

On the contrary, even if the left arrow key 96c is pressed once from the state of the volume level (level 1) shown in FIG. 34 (a), the volume level does not change and remains at level 1. Further, for example, when the left arrow key 96c is pressed in a situation where the volume level is level 2 or higher, the volume level is reduced to level 1 at the maximum according to the number of times the key is pressed. Further, in this embodiment, the maximum value (MAX) of the volume level is 5, and the volume can be adjusted in 5 steps.

Further, even if the right direction key 96d is pressed once in the situation where the volume level is 5, the volume level does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the right arrow key 96d is pressed once in a situation where the volume level is level 5, the light intensity level may be lowered to the minimum level 1 at once.

In this embodiment, the volume level is always the same value (here, level 1 which is the lowest level) in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on. That is, regardless of the volume level before the power is turned off, if the power is turned off and then turned on, the value will always be a predetermined value. The volume level (default volume level) in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on is configured to be different depending on the setting of the back volume volume 416 of the gaming machine, as will be described later. Further, when the volume adjustment is finished by changing the volume level and the volume is adjusted again, the adjustment is started from the volume level immediately before stored in the RWM of the sub-main board 301 (or the sub-sub board 302) at the end. You can do it.

Here, the value of the volume level in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on is not limited to the lowest level, but is always the same value, for example, the middle level (here, level 3) or the highest level (here, level 5). It may be set to. It is also possible to back up the volume level information at the time of power failure so that adjustment can be started from the backed up volume level when the power is turned on without initializing.

Further, the function of adjusting the volume by the left arrow key 96c and the right arrow key 96d is effective in this embodiment while the volume adjustment effect is displayed. Then, in the state where the volume control effect is displayed, the operation for volume control is not input, and the volume control effect is deleted when the predetermined time elapses. Further, if the operation button 22 is pressed while the volume control effect is displayed, the volume control may be completed and the volume control effect may be erased.
<<< Example of light intensity adjustment effect >>>

Subsequently, the light amount adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34 (b) is the light amount button (here, the upward key 96a or the lower key 96a) of the cross key 96 (FIG. 20 (a)) during the fluctuation standby or fluctuation. It is displayed when the direction key 96b) is operated. In the light amount adjustment shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light amount level mark 411 indicating the light amount level is displayed (the light amount level mark effect is performed). Further, a cross key mark 412 representing a cross key is displayed below the light intensity level mark 411 (lower left in the figure), and the characters "light intensity adjustment" are displayed below the cross key mark 412. ing.

In the above-mentioned cross key mark 412, the portion corresponding to the upward key 96a and the downward key 96b used for increasing / decreasing the amount of light is highlighted by a method such as reverse display. Further, an operation button mark 409 indicating an operation button is displayed below the light intensity level mark 411 (lower right in the figure), and below the operation button mark 409, "end" meaning the end of the volume setting. "Is displayed.

In the display example of the light amount adjustment in FIG. 34 (b), the light amount level is the minimum (MIN) level 1, and the entire light amount level mark 411 is highlighted in a bright color. If the upward key 96a is pressed once in this state, the light intensity level becomes level 2 and the light intensity level mark 411 is displayed brighter, although not shown.

On the contrary, even if the downward key 96b is pressed once from the state of the light amount level (level 1) shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light amount level does not change and remains at level 1. Further, for example, when the downward key 96b is pressed in a situation where the light intensity level is level 2 or level 3, the volume level is reduced to level 1 at the maximum depending on the number of times the key is pressed. In this embodiment, the maximum value (MAX) of the light amount level is 3, and the light amount can be adjusted in 3 steps. Further, the function of adjusting the amount of light by the up arrow key 96a and the down arrow key 96b is effective in this embodiment while the light amount adjustment menu shown in FIG. 34 (b) is displayed.

Further, even if the upward key 96a is pressed once in the situation where the light amount level is 3, the light amount level does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the upward key 96a is pressed once in a situation where the light amount level is 3, the light amount level may be lowered to the minimum level 1 at once.

In this embodiment, the light intensity level is always the same value (here, level 1 which is the lowest level) in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on. That is, regardless of the light intensity level before the power is turned off, if the power is turned off and then turned on, the value will always be a predetermined value. Further, when the light amount adjustment is completed by changing the light amount level after turning on the power and the light amount adjustment is performed again, the light amount immediately before being stored in the RWM of the sub-main board 301 (or the sub-sub board 302). You can start adjusting from the level. Here, the value of the light intensity level in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on is not limited to the lowest level, and may be, for example, a central level (here, level 2) or the highest level (here, level 3).

Further, the function of adjusting the amount of light by the upward key 96a and the downward key 96b is effective in this embodiment while the light amount adjusting effect is displayed. Then, in the state where the light amount adjustment effect is displayed, the operation for adjusting the light amount is not input, and the light amount adjustment effect is erased when the predetermined time elapses. Further, if the operation button 22 is pressed while the light amount adjustment effect is displayed, the light amount adjustment may be completed and the light amount adjustment effect may be erased.
<<< Relationship between production related to environment settings and other basic display images >>>

FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) show an example of a display in which a volume adjustment effect or a light amount adjustment effect is performed during a fluctuation standby (here, a fluctuation confirmation stop), by extracting only the main part and schematically. Illustrate. Further, the variable standby state shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) is not a specific game situation such as during probabilistic change or time saving (during electric support state), but a normal game state in which the player should hit left. It is a thing. Then, in the figure, the stopped effect symbols 190a to 190c before the start of the fluctuation are displayed.

Further, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), a reduced effect symbol display area 361 and a hold number display area 367 are also displayed. Of these, in the reduced effect symbol display area 361, an effect symbol (mini symbol) that is extremely small compared to the display mode of the effect symbols 190a to 190c is provided so as to ensure visibility related to the display state of the effect symbols 190a to 190. It is displayed.

The display of the mini symbol is performed according to the state of the variable display or the stop display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c. By displaying such a mini symbol, for example, the effect symbols 190a to 190c are changing even in a situation where the effect symbols 190a to 190c are transparent and cannot be visually recognized due to the effect during the change. It makes it possible for the player to recognize that.

Further, in the hold number display area 367, two extremely small one-digit numerical values are displayed side by side so as to ensure the visibility of the hold number display according to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the examples shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), the numerical value on the left side indicates the number of holdings related to the special figure 1 (here, 0), and the numerical value on the left side shows the number of holdings related to the special figure 2 (here, 0). 0) is shown. By displaying the number of holds in the hold number display area 367 in this way, for example, the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 can be transparently displayed and visually recognized during fluctuations. Even in a situation where the game has disappeared, the player can recognize the number of reservations related to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Here, FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) exemplify the state of waiting for fluctuation, and the hold has not occurred, and the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 are shown. Not visible. However, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), in order to facilitate the understanding of the following description as much as possible, the first reserved number display unit 196 and the second reserved number display are virtually indicated by the alternate long and short dash line. Part 197 is shown.

In the display examples shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, the display on the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197, and the characters whose illustrations are omitted are omitted. The display, etc. has a function to enhance the taste of the production. Depending on the situation of the production, these displays may be made transparent or reduced so that the player cannot see them.

On the other hand, the display in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 and the hold number display area 367 relates to the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the display of the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197. It is intended to ensure visibility. The display of the reduced effect symbol display area 361 and the display of the hold number display area 367 are the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, the display of the first hold number display unit 196, the display of the second hold number display unit 197, and the like. It is functionally different.

Then, based on these distinctions, the effect symbols 190a to 190c can be referred to as, for example, a "first decorative symbol", and the display in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 can be referred to as, for example, a "second decorative symbol". be. In the following, the terms "first decorative pattern" and "second decorative pattern" will be used as necessary.

The above-mentioned first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol can be described in more detail as follows. For example, the first decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed so that the player can easily see it. Then, by providing the first decorative pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect during the change. In addition, the result of the game can be notified by displaying the first decorative symbol as a fixed stop display.

Then, the first decorative symbol makes it easier for the player to recognize that the player is changing, waiting for the change, the result of the winning / losing lottery, and the like. In addition, the first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the changing production. Further, by displaying the first decorative symbol as a fixed stop display, the result of the game can be notified.

Subsequently, the second decorative symbol can be made capable of, for example, always displaying the display state of the first decorative symbol (whether it is still being displayed in a variable manner or has been fixedly stopped). In other words, it has the role of indicating whether the special symbol is changing or stopped. Further, unlike this, the second decorative symbol can be displayed only when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative symbol or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. It is a thing. Then, by constantly displaying the second decorative symbol, the result of the game can be notified by the fixed stop display.

If the first decorative symbol is difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the first decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop display, the second decorative symbol is also displayed as a fixed stop display. It is possible to do.

Further, the second decorative pattern can be described as follows. For example, the area of each display area of the second decorative symbol (here, the reduced effect symbol display area 361) is the total area of the display area of the first decorative symbol (here, the individual display areas of the effect symbols 190a to 190c). Is smaller than.

In addition, when SP reach or the like is executed, the first decorative pattern is hidden or superimposed on the moving image in order to show the player a moving image such as an image showing story development. In some cases (moving images have a higher display priority and are displayed in the foreground), they may not be visible or may be difficult to see. And even in such a case, in order to show that the special symbol is changing (the current fluctuation has not ended yet), the second decorative symbol that continues to change is the corner of the display screen, etc. Is displayed in. In addition, the second decorative symbol does not have a specification that is constantly changing except for the fixed stop, so that the player can recognize information such as which effect symbols 190a to 190c are reach. , The second decorative symbol is displayed in the corner of the display screen in the reach state (the right symbol and the left symbol of the second decorative symbol are the same symbol and only the middle symbol continues to change). It may be configured as follows.

Here, the display area for displaying the first decorative symbol can be referred to as, for example, a "main area". Further, the display area for displaying the second decorative symbol can be referred to as, for example, a "sub-area". When the name is given in this way, it is possible to explain that, for example, the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed in the sub-region.

Subsequently, the relationship between these first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols and the above-mentioned volume control effect and light amount adjustment effect will be described. First, in the examples of FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect are displayed superimposed on the first decorative pattern. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), layers such as a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, and a story image and a character image displayed on the rear surface of the first decorative symbol (not shown). Is semi-transparent, and layers for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are superimposed.

Here, unless there are circumstances such as insufficient visibility of the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect, it is not necessary to make the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the like semi-transparent. In addition, since it is not desirable that the visibility is reduced due to semi-transparency, considering the realization, the layer is not made translucent and the volume is increased regardless of whether the fluctuation is stopped, the fluctuation is in progress, or the customer waiting demo is in progress. The display priority (display priority) of the adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect is relatively high (at least, the story image and the character image displayed on the back surface of the first decorative pattern and the first decorative pattern whose illustration is omitted). It is conceivable to display it in the foreground. Further, in this case, it is conceivable to further raise the display priority of the mini symbol (second decorative symbol) so that the player can always see it.

Further, it is not always necessary to display only one of the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect on the screen, and it is possible to display both at the same time. In this case, it is possible to consider the mode and arrangement of each effect so that the volume control effect and the light amount adjustment effect do not conflict with each other on the display (so that they are not superimposed and displayed). Specifically, for example, the volume control effect is displayed by operating the left arrow key 96c or the right arrow key 96d, and the upper cross key 96a or the lower cross is displayed during display (for example, from the start of display to the lapse of a predetermined time). By operating the key 96b, the light amount adjustment effect is displayed at the same time as the volume adjustment effect. Then, it is conceivable that the volume control effect displayed earlier is hidden first unless the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d is operated again.

In addition, the image of the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect is simplified and drawn in a single color (for example, a vivid fluorescent color) or a color less than the color used in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, resulting in a variety of colors. It is also possible to emphasize the contrast (contrast) with the colored first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the like to secure the discriminating power of the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect.

Further, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect may be displayed so as not to be superimposed on a part of the images of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. For example, it is conceivable to display the volume adjustment effect (or the light amount adjustment effect) in a positional relationship such that the first decorative symbol is superimposed but the second decorative symbol is not superimposed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a display that allows superimposition with other displays, except for a display for which visibility is particularly desired (here, a second decorative pattern).

In addition, although not shown, the same mode (same size, coloring, etc.) can be used in any situation regardless of the difference in situations such as changing, waiting for change (stopping change), and demonstrating waiting for customers. It is possible to display a volume adjustment effect (or a light amount adjustment effect). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display the volume adjustment effect (or the light amount adjustment effect) in a smaller size than during the change standby (during the change stop) during the change. Here, as a specific embodiment for reducing the display, for example, the entire volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) may be simply reduced by a predetermined magnification while maintaining a similar relationship. can.

In the case of the volume control effect, for example, the speaker mark 406, the volume level mark 407, the cross key mark 408, the characters of "volume control", and the like are reduced by a predetermined magnification. Further, in the case of the light amount adjustment effect, the above-mentioned light amount level mark 411, the cross key mark 412, the characters of "light amount adjustment" and the like are reduced by a predetermined magnification.

Further, the reduction of the display is not limited to the above example, and for example, the volume control effect may be performed only by displaying the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407, or by adding only the cross key mark 408 to the speaker mark 406. It is also possible to do. Further, it is also possible to perform the light amount adjustment effect only by displaying the light amount level mark 411, or to add only the cross key mark 412 to the display.

Also, when reducing the display, make sure that each figure that is changing and each figure that is waiting for change are not similar figures, in other words, each figure that is changing and each figure that is waiting for change are not similar. It can also be shaped. Further, it is conceivable to arrange the reduced volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern even during the fluctuation. It is also conceivable to arrange the reduced volume control effect during fluctuation so as not to be superimposed on the second decorative symbol but to be superimposed on the first decorative symbol.

Further, it is possible to make the reduced volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) appear on the screen when the corresponding cross key 96 is operated in a situation where it is not displayed during the fluctuation.
<<< Relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the effect related to the environment setting >>>

Subsequently, in the volume adjustment effect (or the light amount adjustment effect), it is conceivable not to perform the indicator effect indicating the remaining time. For example, the display of the button image 401, the normal continuous striking effect, the automatic continuous striking effect, and the like are accompanied by an indicator display for indicating the operation validity period (displayed together), but the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect are also displayed. It is conceivable that the indicator display indicating the remaining time is not attached to such cases. In this case, while the indicator images (reference numerals 407 and 411 in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b)) showing the volume level and the light amount level are displayed, the remaining time (adjustable time) related to the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect. The indicator image indicating is not displayed.

Further, in the volume adjustment effect (or the light amount adjustment effect), it is conceivable that the indicator images (reference numerals 407 and 411 in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b)) indicating the volume level and the light amount level are not displayed. That is, the display of the volume level mark 407 of the volume control effect and the display of the light amount level mark 411 of the light amount adjustment effect described so far have a function of indicating an increase or decrease in the amount. Therefore, the display of the volume level mark 407 and the display of the light amount level mark 411 are a kind of indicator effect (environment setting-related indicator effect) as in the above-mentioned lottery result notification-related indicator effect. Then, it is possible to determine the relationship between the indicator effect related to the environment setting and the automatic continuous hit effect.

For example, in the automatic continuous striking effect, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 33 (a), the button image 401 and the indicator image 402 are displayed in combination, whereas in the volume control effect, the auto is displayed. It is conceivable that the display is performed except for the image corresponding to the indicator image of the continuous striking effect. In the volume control effect, as a display corresponding to the indicator image of the automatic continuous striking effect, a volume level mark image which is an image of the volume level mark 407 can be exemplified.

FIG. 33B shows an example of a volume control effect omitting such a volume level mark image. In the example of FIG. 33 (b), the volume control effect is performed during the fluctuation. The cross key mark 408, the speaker mark 406, the characters "volume control" and the like are displayed, but the image of the volume level mark 407 shown in FIG. 34 (a) is not displayed. By doing so, the display area hidden by the volume control effect can be reduced, and the visibility of displays other than the volume control effect can be improved. In the example of FIG. 33 (a), the display of the operation button mark 409 and the like in FIG. 34 (a) is also omitted. This makes it possible to further improve the visibility of displays other than the volume control effect.

Further, for example, when the volume control effect is displayed during the fluctuation in which the automatic continuous striking effect can be performed (during the change of the first decorative symbol or the like), the volume level mark image (volume level mark 407) is displayed as described above. While the volume control effect is performed without including the image) etc., the volume control effect including the volume level mark image (image of the volume level mark 407) etc. is displayed while the effect is stopped (fixed stop). It is also possible to consider a production mode such as

It can be said that the light amount level mark 411 in the above-mentioned light amount adjustment effect (FIG. 34 (b)) is also an indicator showing the light amount level by the brightness. Further, it is possible to determine the relationship between the light amount adjustment effect (FIG. 34 (b)) and the indicator effect as well as the volume adjustment effect.

Further, it is conceivable that the light intensity level mark 411 is not displayed and only other images (operation button mark 409, etc.) are displayed. Then, in this case, for example, normally, as a level meter display related to the light intensity adjustment, an image similar to the indicator image 402 (FIGS. 32 (b) to (d)) of the button effect is displayed, but in a specific case. It is conceivable that the level mark 411 of the amount of light as illustrated in FIG. 34 (b) is displayed.
<<< Display priority related to production related to environment settings and other basic display images >>>

In addition, it is possible to set the display priority (display priority) for the volume control effect, each display in the above-mentioned first decorative symbol (each display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c), and the above-mentioned second decorative symbol. Is. For example, in descending order of display priority, 2nd decorative symbol> volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect)> 1st decorative symbol> 1st hold number display unit 196 display (and 2 hold number display unit 197 display and The display of the fluctuation information display unit 195). Regarding the above-mentioned reserved number display area 367, the display priority can be the same as that of the second decorative symbol, next to the second decorative symbol, or the like. Further, since the second decorative pattern, the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect), and the hold number display area 367 are not superimposed and displayed, they may have the same display priority (in that case, these display priorities may be set). , May be the highest display priority).

Here, the display priority indicates the priority of superimposition (order of display from the front side of the screen) for each layer for displaying the image and the moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60. By setting such a display priority, it becomes easy to configure the player to easily visually recognize the image or the moving image when a plurality of images or moving images are superimposed and displayed. Here, the magnitude relationship of the display priority is indicated by an inequality sign or an equal sign.

Further, the above-mentioned display priority is replaced so that the first decorative symbol <the display of the first hold number display unit 196 (and the display of the second hold number display unit 197 and the display of the variation information display unit 195). It is possible. Further, it is possible to set the display priority for the light amount adjustment effect as well as the volume adjustment effect.

Up to this point, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect in the normal gaming state have been described. However, it is possible to perform volume adjustment effect and light intensity adjustment effect even in a specific game situation such as during a short time (during an electric support state) (similar to the normal game state, the fluctuation is stopped or is fluctuating in the specific game state. It is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light even during the customer waiting demonstration). For example, in the case of a short time (during an electric support state), a right-handed effect that encourages right-handedness is performed as described above, but this right-handed effect, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the first hold are performed. It is possible to perform volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) together with the display of the number display unit 196, the display of the second hold number display unit 197, the display of the fluctuation information display unit 195, the hold number display area 367, and the like. .. In the normal gaming state, the display of the first reserved number display unit 196 (holding display related to the first special symbol) is performed, while the display of the second reserved number display unit 197 (holding display related to the second special symbol) is performed. In the specific game state, the second hold number display unit 197 is displayed (hold display related to the second special symbol), while the first hold number display unit 196 is displayed (hold display related to the first special symbol). May be configured not to do. In such a configuration, the hold number display area 367 (display area showing the hold number related to the first special symbol and the display area showing the hold number related to the second special symbol) in both the normal game state and the specific game state). May be configured to always be displayed.

The right-handed effect as described above can also be referred to as a "right-handed instruction display" or a "right-handed warning display". Further, unlike this right-handed effect, it is possible to perform an effect that encourages the player to left-handed. Such an effect of urging a left-handed strike can be displayed in a situation where the right-handed strike should be returned to the left-handed strike, for example, at the end of a reduced working hours (at the end of a non-electric support state). Such a left-handed effect can be referred to as a "left-handed effect", a "left-handed instruction display", a "left-handed warning display", or the like.

The right-handed effect (right-handed warning display) and the left-handed effect (left-handed warning display) can be collectively referred to as, for example, "striking effect" or "striking warning display". By performing the striking method effect (striking method warning display) as described above, it is possible to urge the player to execute the striking method recommended in the game state at that time.

Then, the display priority when the volume control effect is performed during the time reduction (non-electric support state) is set to the right-handed instruction display> 2nd decorative symbol> volume control effect (and light amount adjustment effect)> 1st decorative symbol> 1st. (1) The display of the reserved number display unit 196 (and the display of the second reserved number display unit 197 and the display of the fluctuation information display unit 195) can be used. Further, since the second decorative pattern, the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect), and the hold number display area 367 are not superimposed and displayed, they may have the same display priority (in that case, as the highest display priority). May be good).

Further, the above-mentioned display priority is replaced so that the first decorative symbol <the display of the first hold number display unit 196 (and the display of the second hold number display unit 197 and the display of the variation information display unit 195). It is possible. Further, it is possible to set the display priority for the light amount adjustment effect as well as the volume adjustment effect.
<< Hiding the volume button image >>

10. Subsequently, regarding the relationship between the button effect and the volume control effect, it is possible to make the relationship between the appearance timings of the effects different. For example, except for a specific button effect such as a back button effect, a button operation (operation of the operation button 22) is performed after the button image 401 or the like appears, and the effect pattern determined at that time is used. , There is an execution of the effect (change of the effect) triggered by the button operation.

In contrast to such a button effect, in the volume control effect, the volume control effect is displayed only when the operation button (here, the operation of the left arrow key 96c or the right arrow key 96d) that functions as the volume button is performed. Is to be started. In other words, in the button effect, the button operation is performed in the situation where the button image 401 is displayed, except in the case of the back button effect, but in the volume control effect, the button image (here, the cross key). The relationship between the button effect and the volume control effect is determined so that the button operation is performed in the situation where the mark 408) is not displayed.

Furthermore, in other words, in the button effect, the button image 401 is already displayed at the timing of the button operation start except in the case of the back button effect, but in the volume control effect, the timing of the button operation start (immediately before). The button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is not yet displayed. In other words, the display timing of the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is the display of the button image 401 in the button effect in the volume control effect. It can be said that it is executed in a production mode that is relatively slower than that.

By doing so, for example, a menu screen for making it possible to select volume control from a plurality of environment setting items, a display indicating that the volume control is valid, and the like (valid period display), etc. It is possible to immediately display the volume control effect without performing the previous stage effect of the volume control (volume control pre-stage effect). Then, it is possible to increase the speed of the operation for adjusting the volume.

Further, in determining the relationship as described here, it is possible to adopt different production modes for the fluctuation state and the fluctuation stop state. For example, as for the volume control effect during fluctuation, as described above, an effect mode is adopted in which the display timing of the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is relatively slower than the display of the button image 401 in the button effect. However, for the volume control effect while the fluctuation is stopped, the display of the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is before the button operation (here, the operation of the left arrow key 96c or the right arrow key 96d). It is also possible to adopt a production mode that is started.

Up to now, the environment setting has been explained mainly for the volume control effect, but this is due to the following reasons. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the cross keys 96, the left direction key 96c and the right direction key 96d are provided exclusively for volume control. On the other hand, the up arrow key 96a and the down arrow key 96b may be used to select an effect stage (also referred to as "effect stage" or "effect mode") in addition to the above-mentioned light amount adjustment. It has become.

Specifically, although not shown, when the up arrow key 96a or the down arrow key 96b is pressed in a predetermined situation related to the variation effect, a plurality of icon images indicating the type of the effect stage are displayed (for example, 4). One etc.) is displayed. Then, each time the up arrow key 96a or the down arrow key 96b is pressed, the icon image is highlighted in order by a technique such as reverse display.

Then, with the icon preferred by the player highlighted, for example, when the operation button 22 is pressed, the effect stage is determined, and the effect defined for the determined effect stage is developed during the game. .. Such a change in the production stage is sometimes called "stage change" or "stechen". Further, the effect stage can be changed both during the fluctuation and during the fluctuation stop, or can be performed only at one of them (for example, only during the fluctuation stop).

The effect stage as described above can be an effect mode shown by the background image. For example, the first background image A corresponding to the production stage A, the background image B corresponding to the production stage B, and the like, the background image corresponding to the selected production stage is displayed, and the first stage corresponds to the selected production stage. Decorative symbols (for example, in the case of production stage A, it is a decorative design in which character A and numbers are combined, and in the case of production stage B, it is a decorative design in which character B and numbers are combined) and the type of notice (for example, production stage). If it is A, a dialogue notice can be generated, but a step-up notice cannot be generated, and if it is a production stage B, a step-up notice can be generated, but a dialogue notice cannot be generated). Various effects can be performed.

In other words, among the environment setting items such as volume control and light intensity control, volume control is not affected by other selectable items (selectable items) and has a high degree of freedom regarding the usable situation. There is. Then, the environment setting items having such a high degree of freedom are defined as having high operation speed for adjustment, and before the operation of the assigned cross key 96 (here, the left arrow key 96c and the right arrow key 96d). The volume control effect is not displayed.

On the other hand, regarding the amount of light adjustment, by using the cross key 96 together with other selectable items (in this case, the production stage), the time when the amount of light can be adjusted is restricted, and the degree of freedom in adjusting the amount of light is low. .. Here, it is also possible to distinguish by terms such as "first environment setting item" and "second environment setting item" based on the difference in the degree of freedom of the environment setting item. For example, here, the volume adjustment having a high degree of freedom can be referred to as a first environment setting item, and the light amount adjustment having a relatively low degree of freedom can be referred to as a second environment setting item. In addition, although the case where the stage of the effect is selected by the up arrow key 96a and the down arrow key 96b is shown here, other than that, the effect custom setting (for example, the effect custom setting by the up arrow key 96a and the down arrow key 96b) is shown. You may set whether to have the look-ahead effect or not, to increase or decrease the appearance rate of the dialogue notice, or to set it in the middle, etc.), or use the up arrow key 96a or the down arrow key. BGM may be selected at 96b.

In addition, in the processing when the power is turned off (power off processing) when the degree of freedom of volume adjustment is higher than that of the light amount adjustment, the information related to the volume setting (volume level before the power off) is provided. It is possible to temporarily store the information, whereas the information related to the light amount setting (light amount level before the power is turned off) is not temporarily stored. Further, not limited to this, it is also possible to temporarily store any information.

Further, the degree of freedom of adjusting the volume is not limited to the relative increase, and the degree of freedom of adjusting the amount of light can be increased more than the degree of freedom of adjusting the volume. For example, for adjusting the amount of light, the cross key 96 (here, the up key 96a and the down key 96b) is dedicated, and the other cross keys 96 (here, the left key 96c and the right key 96d) are used for volume control and others. It may be used in combination with the function of (here, the stage change function of the production). In this way, by making it possible to adjust the amount of light at all times without limiting the timing of adjusting the amount of light, it becomes possible to optimize the light stimulus at all times. Then, the epilepsy prevention effect can be further improved.

In addition, in the processing when the power is turned off (power off processing) when the degree of freedom of light amount adjustment is higher than that of the volume control, the information related to the setting of the light amount at that time (light amount level before the power off) is provided. It is possible to temporarily store the information and not to temporarily store the information related to the volume setting (volume level before the power is turned off). Further, not limited to this, it is also possible to temporarily store any information.

Further, here, the production stage is illustrated as a selectable item (selectable item) in which the cross key is also used for adjusting the amount of light (or adjusting the volume), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a song or the like is selected. It is also possible to make it a possible item.
<< Diversification of the relationship between the automatic continuous hit function and the single-shot function >>

11. Next, it is possible to consider the diversification of the relationship between the automatic continuous striking function and the single-shot function. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the period of the final stage of the automatic continuous striking valid period during which the auto continuous striking operation can be accepted is considered. The reference timing T1 (final timing) is set to N seconds before the end of the automatic continuous striking valid period, and the operation of pressing the operation button 22 is detected after the reference timing T1. Even if the operation satisfying (0.5 seconds related to the second condition + continuation of pressing according to the second condition) is started, it is considered that it is not determined that the automatic continuous hitting operation has been performed. More specifically, when the operation satisfying the temporal condition of the automatic continuous striking operation (for example, pressing continuation for more than 0.5 seconds) is started from the reference timing T1 or later when N = 0.45 (FIG. 36). Even if the pressing continuation is started from the timing of the arrow of "button pressing (more than 0.5 seconds)" in (a)), at the time of starting the operation, the subsequent effect (for example) according to the operation (single operation) is performed. , The above-mentioned effect display, etc.) is performed, but the automatic repeated hits related to the subsequent pressing continuation are not performed. This can be applied to both the front button effect and the back button effect, but in the front button effect, the time of the "front button effect" in the period during which the front button effect is performed (FIG. 36 (a)). In the block), a button image is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the button not only before the button operation but also during the button operation and after the button operation.

However, even after the above-mentioned reference timing T1, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), a single operation (here, pressing is continued for less than 0.5 seconds) until the end of the automatic continuous striking valid period ends. If it is detected that the player keeps pressing the button to the extent that it is not considered to be intentionally long-pressed, that is, it is an operation of pressing and immediately releasing the button), a single operation is performed in the control process of the CPU 521. Judgment to the effect that it has been done is made. More specifically, when a single operation is performed after the reference timing T1 when N = 0.45, for example, when the single operation is at 0.2 second intervals, the single operation can be performed three times. (Because it is possible to perform 3 times, 0.45 seconds ago, 0.25 seconds ago, and 0.05 seconds ago), the subsequent production according to the 3 single-shot operations (for example, 3 times of the effect display mentioned above) Is done. This can be applied to both the front button effect and the back button effect, but in the front button effect, the time of the "front button effect" in the period during which the front button effect is performed (FIG. 36 (b)). In the block), a button image is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the button not only before the button operation but also during the button operation and after the button operation.

It is also possible to consider the case where the pressing operation of the operation button 22 is detected before the reference timing T1. As shown in FIG. 36 (c), for example, for a button operation started before the reference timing T1, the period from the button operation timing started before the reference timing T1 to the end of the automatic continuous hitting valid period. During N + M seconds (M = time from the button operation timing started before the reference timing T1 to the reference timing T1), the temporal condition of the automatic continuous striking operation (for example, pressing for more than 0.5 seconds). It is assumed that the operation satisfies (continuation) (in this case as well, N = 0.45 as in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b)). Therefore, based on the button operation start timing, it is treated as a one-shot operation at each timing when the press continuation reaches 0.5 seconds from there and at each timing when the press continuation continues for another 0.2 seconds. Repeated hits are made (here, in FIG. 36 (c), 0.5 seconds after the start of the time block of "button pressing (more than 0.5 seconds after T)", that is, 0.5 seconds from the start of continuous pressing. Later, it is shown that the time block of "automatic continuous hitting effect" is started). More specifically, for example, when the button operation start timing is 1.0 second before the end of the automatic continuous hit effective period, the button operation start timing corresponds to the first single operation (actual single operation) (at this point). Then, the timing when the continuous pressing reaches 0.5 seconds is the second single-shot operation (although it is not actually a single-shot operation, it is a single-shot operation). (At this point, it is 0.5 seconds until the end of the automatic continuous hitting valid period), and the timing when the continuous pressing continues for 0.2 seconds is the third single-shot operation (actually single-shot). It is not operated, but it is considered to be a one-shot operation) (at this point, 0.3 seconds until the end of the automatic continuous hitting validity period), and the pressing continuation is further 0.2 from there. The timing when the second has passed corresponds to the 4th single-shot operation (although it is not actually performed as a single-shot operation, it is considered to have been performed as a single-shot operation) (at this point, until the end of the automatic continuous hitting valid period is 0. 3 seconds), after that, there is only 0.1 seconds until the end of the automatic continuous hitting valid period, so even if the pressing continuation continues for another 0.2 seconds, it will not be an automatic continuous hitting because it is outside the automatic continuous hitting valid period. (Not considered to be a one-shot operation). This can be applied to both the front button effect and the back button effect, but in the front button effect, the time of the "front button effect" in the period during which the front button effect is performed (FIG. 36 (c)). In the block), a button image is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the button not only before the button operation but also during the button operation and after the button operation.

Further, it is assumed that during the final period of this automatic continuous striking operation, the button press is once completed, and then the button is pressed again (here, referred to as "subsequent button press"). If the subsequent button press is started during the final period, which is the remaining period of the automatic continuous hit operation, it is determined that the subsequent button press is a one-shot operation, and as described above, the subsequent button press is performed. Subsequent production is performed according to the one-shot operation.

Here, regarding the relationship between the auto-continuous striking function and the single-shot function, for example, within a predetermined period before the end of the auto-continuous striking valid period (here, the period N seconds before), the long press of the operation button 22 is started. Even so, it can be said that it is not detected as an automatic continuous hit (it is a one-shot operation at the start of button operation, but it is not regarded as a continuous hit by continuous pressing after that, that is, It is not considered to be a one-shot operation cumulatively with the passage of time for continuous pressing). On the other hand, if two single pushes are performed within a predetermined period (here, the period N seconds before) before the end of the automatic continuous hit effective period, it may be detected as an actual repeated hit. It can be said that there is.

In other words, if two single pushes are performed within a predetermined period before the end of the automatic continuous hit valid period (here, the period N seconds before), it may be detected as an actual repeated hit. However, it can be said that when the operation button 22 is pressed and held for a long time, it is not detected as a continuous hit.
<< Relationship between auto-striking function and error >>

12. Next, we can think about the relationship between the automatic repeated hit function and the error. For example, if a predetermined type of error (first error) occurs during the automatic continuous striking effect, the automatic continuous striking effect is not interrupted. However, when another predetermined type of error (second error) occurs, the automatic continuous striking effect is interrupted.

More specifically, an error when the gaming machine frame 11 (for example, the front frame 13) is opened and the above-mentioned opening signal is detected while the pachinko gaming machine 10 is operating, or a lower ball Regarding the plate 19, the "full tank detection error" detected based on the signal of the above-mentioned saucer full tank switch is set as the first error, and when these first errors occur, the automatic continuous striking effect is continued. do. Here, the first error may be, for example, an error (recoverable error) that returns to a state in which the game can be played without turning off the power if the cause of the error is cleared.

On the other hand, the "magnetic detection error", which is an error when the above-mentioned magnetic detection signal is detected by a magnetic sensor or the like, is set as the second error, and when these second errors occur, the automatic continuous striking effect is performed. It is assumed that the interruption is performed and the notification that an error has occurred (full-screen error notification) is performed using the entire screen of the effect display device 60.

Here, as the second error, "radio wave detection error" which is an error when the above-mentioned radio wave detection signal is detected by the radio wave sensor, and "error when disconnection or short circuit of various winning openings is detected". It is also possible to include "winning opening disconnection / short circuit error" and "excess payout detection error" which is an error when the number of balls entered is abnormal or detected in the second error. Further, the second error may be, for example, an error in which the game cannot be restored unless the power is turned off and then turned on again (unrecoverable error).

In this way, by interrupting the automatic continuous striking effect when the second error occurs, it is possible to perform a large-scale error notification that makes the best use of the screen of the effect display device 60. As a large-scale error notification at this time, a black background may be displayed on the entire screen, and only characters or figures for notifying that an error has occurred may be displayed. The error classification is not limited to the above, and for example, a predetermined error such as a door opening error may be included in the second error, and if it occurs, the automatic repeated hitting effect may be interrupted and the error notification may be performed. ..

In addition, the automatic continuous striking effect is not limited to being completely interrupted, and the error notification image is superimposed on the effect image while the auto continuous striking effect is continued (without interruption), or the auto continuous striking effect is performed. It is also possible to increase the transparency of the image to make it semi-transparent and display an image of error notification. In addition, using a screen different from the screen of the display body (display device) on which the automatic continuous hitting effect is performed, error notification can be performed while continuing the automatic continuous hitting effect, and voice can be used while continuing the automatic continuous hitting effect. It is also possible to notify an error. In particular, regardless of whether it is the first error or the second error, repeated hits while performing error notification (output of error sound and / or display of error screen) so as not to interfere with the effect during execution. It is also possible to continuously display the button image in the effect (automatic repeated hit effect) (if the error sound corresponding to the difference in the error state (or depending on the type of error) is output as an error notification, the error sound is output. If a button image is displayed inside and an error screen is displayed as an error notification, the error screen and the button image are displayed at the same time). If it is, the button image is displayed and the button operation is effective (the automatic repeated hitting function is activated by long pressing) (the subsequent effect is executed by the repeated hitting operation), and if it is the second error. , While displaying the button image, the button operation is disabled (the auto continuous hitting function by long press does not work) (the subsequent effect is not executed even if the continuous hitting operation is performed).
<< Parallel handling of auto-striking function and environment setting function >>

13. Next, it is conceivable to have a parallel relationship between the automatic repeated hits and the environment setting. For example, if there is a button operation related to the volume control effect (here, the operation of the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d) during the automatic continuous striking effect, the volume control effect is started. In this case, it is conceivable that the volume control effect is superimposed and displayed on the image of the automatic continuous striking effect (button image, the effect executed after that by the continuous striking operation, the effect display, etc.). Furthermore, it is also conceivable to increase the transparency (semi-transparency) of the image of the automatic continuous striking effect and highlight the volume control effect. Regardless of which configuration is adopted, the display priority of the volume control effect is configured to be higher than the display priority of the image of the automatic continuous striking effect.

Then, if an operation for the button operation related to the volume control effect (here, the operation of the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d) is detected in this situation, the display mode of the volume level mark 407 according to the operation content is detected. It is possible to change the volume level and change the volume level. By doing so, it is possible to display an effect that respects both the automatic continuous hit effect and the volume control effect. Further, it is possible to give priority to the volume control while respecting both the automatic continuous hitting effect and the volume control effect in the effect display.

In the automatic continuous striking effect, the same effect as that of the continuous striking operation is executed without actually performing the continuous striking operation. Therefore, it is considered that at least the left hand, which is the side of the player who has not operated the firing handle 20 (handle operation), is free during the automatic continuous striking effect, unlike during the normal continuous striking effect. Then, the left arrow key 96c or the right arrow key 96d can be operated by using the free finger, and in preparation for such a situation, the volume control effect is immediately displayed in parallel during the automatic continuous striking effect. Be able to do it. By doing so, it is possible to optimize the control related to the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume control effect. The light amount adjusting effect may have the same configuration as the volume adjusting effect, that is, the above-mentioned relationship and configuration may be applied to the light amount adjusting effect.

14. Subsequently, as described above, in the situation where the volume adjustment effect (and / or the light amount adjustment effect) is executed in parallel during the auto-repeated striking effect, the progress of the moving image related to the auto-repeated striking effect is continued (not interrupted or interrupted). , It is possible not to be interrupted). In other words, even if the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is displayed, it does not affect the progress of the auto-repeated hit effect, and while emphasizing the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect), the auto-repeated hit effect is performed. It is possible to make full use of the effect display.

Here, during the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect), it is possible to increase the transparency of the auto-repeated striking effect as described above, but such a change in the auto-repeated striking effect has an apparent effect. It can be said that it does not affect the progress of the production.

15. Subsequently, even if a button operation (here, the operation of the operation button 22) is further detected in the situation where the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) are advanced in parallel as described above, even if the button operation (here, the operation of the operation button 22) is detected. It is conceivable that the display of the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is continued as it is, and the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is not erased. By doing so, the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) can be prevented from being erased by the operation for repeatedly hitting the operation button 22. Further, even if the operation for repeatedly hitting the operation button 22 is performed while the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is displayed, the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is performed for the volume adjustment (and the light amount adjustment effect). If there is no operation of), it will be erased (hidden) after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the display is started.

Further, if there is no volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation in this state, the volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect) is set to be erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the display is started (non-). (Display) is conceivable. Also, even if there is a volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation after the volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect) is displayed, if there is no volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation after that, the volume adjustment is finally performed. It is conceivable that the light is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation (and the amount of light adjustment) is performed.

In order to allow the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) to proceed in parallel with each other, for example, in the above-mentioned sub-main timer interrupt process (FIG. 24) in the sub-main CPU 521, an operation button is used. It is conceivable to perform both the process related to the operation of 22 and the process related to the operation of the cross key 96. More specifically, the process related to the operation of the operation button 22 is performed by the push button monitoring control process (S266) described above, and the process related to the operation of the cross key 96 is performed by the device control data output process (S263). Can be considered.

The sub-main timer interrupt process is repeated every predetermined cycle (here, 1 ms) unless the interrupt disable process is performed in the previous stage. Therefore, by arranging each of the module of the process related to the operation of the operation button 22 and the module of the process related to the operation of the cross key 96 in series in the sub-main timer interrupt process, the process related to the automatic continuous hitting effect can be obtained. , Both the processes related to the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) can be reliably executed independently.

16. Subsequently, it is possible to consider a situation in which the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is displayed first, and then the automatic continuous striking effect is performed. In such a situation, the display of the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is continued, and the display of the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is erased even if the auto continuous striking operation is performed and the auto continuous striking effect is executed. It is possible to continue without doing so. Also, in this case as well, the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is predetermined after the display is started if there is no volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation, or after the volume adjustment operation is performed at the end. It is possible to make it erased after an hour (eg 3 seconds).

17. Subsequently, it is conceivable that the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) has a higher display priority than the button image 401 and the automatic continuous striking effect (the subsequent effect generated by pressing the button). That is, the layer related to the display of the volume control effect is superimposed on the layer related to the display of the button image 401 and the automatic continuous striking effect to display the effect.

Here, some examples of the volume control effect, each display in the above-mentioned first decorative symbol (each display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c), and the display priority between the above-mentioned second decorative symbols have been described above, but auto. When the continuous striking effect is taken into consideration, for example, the second decorative symbol> the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect)> the automatic continuous striking effect> the first decorative symbol> the display of the first hold number display unit 196 (and the second hold number display unit). 197 display and display of the fluctuation information display unit 195).

By doing so, even when the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) compete with each other, the volume adjustment effect can be displayed without impairing the visibility.

When there are a plurality of layers constituting the display of the volume control effect, it is conceivable that the display priority of all the layers related to the display of the volume control effect is higher than that of the layer related to the automatic continuous striking effect. Further, not limited to this, the display priority of only a part of the layers related to the display of the volume control effect (for example, only the layer related to the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407) is set to the layer related to the automatic continuous striking effect. It is possible to make it higher than.

Further, in this case, it is conceivable to display only a part of the layers related to the display of the volume control effect (for example, only the layer related to the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407).

Here, the relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume control effect was explained as a parallel handling of the auto continuous striking function and the environment setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect and the light amount adjustment effect can be the same as the relationship between the auto continuous striking effect and the volume adjustment effect.
<< Specific aspects of straddling fluctuations in automatic continuous striking effect and volume effect >>

18. Next, it is possible to consider a specific mode relating to the fluctuation straddling of the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume control effect. For example, it is conceivable that the automatic continuous striking effect does not straddle fluctuations. More specifically, when the button image 401 at the time of the automatic continuous hitting effect is displayed in the table button effect, this button image 401 is deleted during the fluctuation at that time (until the next fluctuation is started at the latest). To be done. In addition, even in the case of the back button effect, it is not configured to enable continuous striking operation (normal continuous striking or automatic continuous striking) across fluctuations, and the effect display as the back button effect as described above is not performed. Is not executed across fluctuations.

On the other hand, regarding the volume control effect, if the volume control effect is displayed during the fluctuation, the display of the volume control effect continues even if the fluctuation at that time is fixedly stopped and the next fluctuation is started. If it is within the time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), it will not be erased and will remain on the screen. In other words, the volume adjustment effect is displayed even when the fluctuation is stopped (including the above-mentioned fixed time of the symbol and the standby for fluctuation) so that the volume can be adjusted. In this way, by allowing the volume control effect to straddle fluctuations, it is possible to control the volume in more various situations.

Regarding the volume control effect, even if the display of the volume control effect continues within a predetermined time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start or the last button operation of the display), the pattern is fixed and (or "or") fluctuates. It is also possible to erase once during standby (that is, if the symbol is fixed or waiting for fluctuation within 3 seconds from the start of display, it is temporarily hidden), and then the display is restarted. .. In this case, it is conceivable to restart the display only for the remaining time (remaining time) of the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation) in which the display of the volume control effect continues. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the display duration after resumption is set to a time longer than the remaining time (for example, 3 seconds as the predetermined time for the display of the volume control effect to continue). In addition, regarding the volume control effect, even if the display of the volume control effect continues within a predetermined time (for example, within 3 seconds from the display start or the last button operation), it fluctuates during the fixed time of the symbol and (or "or"). It is configured so that it will be erased when it is in standby (that is, it will be forcibly hidden if the symbol is fixed or in variable standby within 3 seconds from the start of display), and it will not be displayed until the button operation is performed again. May be good.

In addition, the relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume control effect has been described, but the relationship is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect and the light amount adjustment effect should be the same as the relationship described here. Is also possible.
<< 19. Specific aspects of the big hit straddle of the automatic continuous hitting effect and the volume control effect >>

Next, it is possible to consider a specific mode relating to the jackpot straddling of the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume control effect. For example, when the automatic continuous hitting effect is performed in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) that becomes a big hit, it is conceivable that the automatic continuous hitting effect does not straddle the big hit fluctuation and the big hit game. More specifically, when the button image 401 at the time of the automatic continuous hitting effect is displayed in the table button effect, even if the change at that time is a big hit change, this button image 401 is changing (at the latest for a big hit game). It should be erased by the time the start demo is started). Further, even in the case of the back button effect, the back button effect is not configured so that the continuous hit operation (normal continuous hit or automatic continuous hit) can be performed across the big hit fluctuation and the big hit game. The effect display as is not executed across the jackpot fluctuation and the jackpot game.

On the other hand, regarding the volume control effect, if the volume control effect is displayed during the jackpot fluctuation, the display of the volume control effect continues even if the fluctuation at that time is fixedly stopped and the jackpot game is started. If it is within the time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), it will not be erased and will remain on the screen. In other words, the volume control effect is displayed even when the fluctuation related to the jackpot fluctuation is stopped (including during the fixed time of the symbol and while waiting for the jackpot game), so that the volume can be adjusted. In this way, by allowing the volume control effect to straddle between the jackpot fluctuation and the jackpot game, the volume can be adjusted in more various situations.

Regarding the volume control effect, even if the display of the volume control effect continues within a predetermined time (for example, within 3 seconds from the display start or the last button operation), the symbol is fixed for a fixed time and (or "or") a big hit. When the game is waiting, it will be erased once (that is, if the symbol is fixed or the jackpot game is waiting in less than 3 seconds from the start of display, it will be hidden once), and then the display will be restarted. Is also possible. In this case, it is conceivable to restart the display only for the remaining time (remaining time) of the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation) in which the display of the volume control effect continues. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the display duration after resumption is set to a time longer than the remaining time (for example, 3 seconds as the predetermined time for the display of the volume control effect to continue). In addition, regarding the volume control effect, even if the display of the volume control effect continues within a predetermined time (for example, within 3 seconds from the display start or the last button operation), the symbol is fixed for a fixed time and (or "or") a big hit. It is erased when the game is waiting (that is, it is forcibly hidden if the symbol is fixed or the jackpot game is waiting in less than 3 seconds from the start of display), and it is not displayed until the button operation is performed again. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect and the volume control effect has been described, but the relationship is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect and the light amount adjustment effect should be the same as the relationship described here. Is also possible.
<< Relationship between auto-hit production and power failure when winning a big hit >>

20. Next, it is possible to think about the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the power failure at the time of winning the big hit. For example, during the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) that becomes a big hit, a power failure occurred when the remaining time of the fluctuation was, for example, about 10 seconds, and then the power was turned on within 10 seconds to recover the power failure. Consider such a case. In this case, even if the effect related to the jackpot fluctuation at that time is such that the automatic continuous hitting effect can be executed if there is no power interruption (normally), the remaining fluctuation after the power supply is restored is the automatic continuous hitting. It is conceivable not to perform the production.

In order to do so, for example, when it is determined by the state of the flag that the power failure has been restored from the fluctuating power failure, even if there is an auto continuous hit operation, the process proceeds to the automatic continuous hit effect. It is conceivable not to let it. Further, in terms of control on the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub board 302, the automatic continuous hitting effect is selected and the processing for the automatic continuous hitting effect is performed, but a method such as making the layer related to the display of the automatic continuous hitting effect transparent. Therefore, it is conceivable that the display of the automatic continuous hitting effect is not performed.

Then, by not displaying the automatic continuous striking effect as described above, the display at the time of recovery from power failure can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to differentiate the display from the case where there is no power failure, and it is possible to make the player perceive that the power failure is being restored. Further, when, for example, a screen display dedicated to the time of recovery from power failure is performed during recovery from power failure, the visibility of the dedicated screen display is not hindered by the automatic continuous striking effect. Here, as the screen display dedicated to the recovery from the power failure, a black background may be displayed on the entire screen, and only characters and figures for notifying that the power failure is being restored may be displayed.

In addition, the period of the jackpot game (for example, from the start of the jackpot start demo to the end of the jackpot end demo) in which the process at the time of power failure recovery shifts after the fluctuation after the power failure recovery (here, the fluctuation of the remaining 10 seconds described above) is completed. It is possible that it will extend within the period until. Then, if promotion to probabilistic change (probability change promotion) or production of determining the number of rounds is performed within the period of the big hit game, it is also possible to execute a continuous hitting effect as a button effect. ..

Further, in such a case, even if there is an auto continuous striking operation, it is possible to prevent the auto continuous striking effect from being displayed (the auto continuous striking effect is not performed). In other words, if the power is not cut off during the big hit fluctuation, it is possible to execute the continuous hitting effect as a button effect in the big hit game after the big hit change that resumes after the power is turned off, but when the power is cut off during the big hit fluctuation. In the big hit game after the big hit fluctuation, which is restarted after the power is turned off and restored, it is possible not to execute the continuous hitting effect as the button effect. In this way, when the power failure is restored due to the big hit fluctuation, the auto continuous hitting effect is not displayed during the big hit game (the auto continuous hitting effect is not performed). It is possible to simplify the display and differentiate the display from the case where there is no power failure. Furthermore, a screen display dedicated to when the power is restored is displayed (even if the power is turned off during the jackpot fluctuation, not during the jackpot game, the screen display of the jackpot game dedicated to when the power is restored is used during the jackpot game). In this case, the auto-striking effect does not interfere with the visibility of the dedicated screen display.

It should be noted that the fluctuation when the power failure occurs is the fluctuation before the fluctuation (target fluctuation) that was the target of the look-ahead, and the fluctuation before that causes the power to recover from the power-off and is the target of the look-ahead. When the fluctuation that has become a big hit fluctuation as described above, it is possible to generate an automatic continuous hitting effect by the fluctuation that was the target of the look-ahead that arrived after the power failure was restored, and the big hit after that. It is also possible to generate an automatic continuous hitting effect even in a game. In addition, the information related to the number of holds when a power failure occurs is determined to be a power failure recovery, and if the number of holds is a predetermined number or more (for example, one or more), the automatic continuous striking effect is performed as in the case where there is no power failure. It is also possible to display it.

21. Next, we can think about the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the power failure during the big hit (here, during the big hit game). It should be noted that the same matters as in the case of returning the power supply from the power failure during the jackpot fluctuation described above will be omitted as appropriate.

For example, a power failure occurs when a notification that a big hit has occurred and the start demonstration of the big hit game has started (including during the big hit round), and then the power is turned on and the power is cut off. When the return is performed, even if the continuous hitting effect performed during the big hit game can execute the automatic continuous hitting effect (normally) if there is no power interruption, the automatic continuous hitting effect is not executed. do.

By doing so, as in the case of power recovery from the power failure during the jackpot fluctuation described above, the display at the time of power failure recovery is simplified and the display is differentiated from the case where there is no power failure. be able to. Further, in the case of performing the dedicated screen display at the time of recovery from the power failure, the visibility of the dedicated screen display is not hindered by the automatic continuous striking effect.

It should be noted that the fluctuation when the power failure occurs is the fluctuation before the fluctuation (target fluctuation) that was the target of the look-ahead, and the fluctuation before that causes the power to recover from the power-off and is the target of the look-ahead. If the fluctuation that has become is a jackpot fluctuation as described above, it is also possible to generate an automatic continuous hitting effect even in the jackpot game after the fluctuation that was the target of the look-ahead that arrived after the power failure was restored. It is possible. In addition, among multiple types of pre-reading notice effects, only when the pre-reading notice effects in a predetermined mode (giraffe pattern, rainbow color, etc.) are performed, the auto-repeated hit effect may be generated after the power failure is restored. It is possible.
<< Relationship between power-on and volume control >>

22. Next, regarding power-on, it is possible to consider the relationship with volume control. For example, as described above, in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on, the volume level can always be set to the same value (for example, level 1, level 3, or level 5). In addition to this, even when the power is turned on while pressing the volume button (here, the left arrow key 96c of the cross key 96 or the right arrow key 96d), the initial volume level is maintained and the volume is maintained. It is conceivable to prevent the increase or decrease of.

That is, for example, when the volume level at the initial stage is set to level 3 and the volume level is always set to level 3 in normal power-on, the power is turned on while pressing the right arrow key 96d. Even if it is done, the volume control effect that is changed from level 3 to level 4 is not displayed, but the volume control effect of level 3 is displayed, or the volume control effect is not displayed in the first place. do. Also, unlike this, when the volume level at the initial stage is set to level 5, even if the power is turned on while pressing the left arrow key 96c, the volume adjustment effect is changed from level 5 to level 4. Instead of displaying, the level 5 volume control effect is displayed, or the volume control screen is not displayed in the first place. By doing so, the degree of freedom regarding the volume level at the time of turning on the power can be limited, and the volume level at the time of turning on the power can be stabilized.

In order to do so, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (b1), the volume button (here, the left arrow key 96c of the cross key 96 or the right arrow 96d) is pressed when the power is turned on. think of. In FIG. 20 (b1), the volume button is continuously pressed even before the power is turned on.

Then, as the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 20 (b2), a signal pulse P (rectangular wave) is generated, and the generation timing of the previously generated edge (here, the rising edge) E1 of this signal pulse P is generated. It is possible to detect that the operation of the volume button is valid at the generation timing T3 of the edge (here, the falling edge) E2 that occurs later instead of T2, and change the volume level based on the detection result. ..

If such stability of the volume level is not prioritized, the volume button operation should be enabled at the timing when the rising edge that occurs earlier is detected, and the volume level should be changed from the beginning. You may do it. Further, although the relationship between the power-on and the volume control has been described, the relationship is not limited to this, and the relationship between the power-on and the light intensity control can be the same as the relationship described here. ..
<< Relationship between long press of volume button and automatic continuous hitting function >>

23. Next, we can think about the relationship between the long press of the volume button and the automatic repeated hit function. For example, in a situation where the volume button (here, the left arrow key 96c of the cross key 96 or the right arrow key 96d) is held down, it is considered that the volume button has been operated multiple times, unlike the case of the operation button 22. It is conceivable that such control is not performed.

That is, even if the left arrow key 96c (or the right arrow key 96d), which is a volume button, is pressed and held for a long time, the volume level is not controlled to be a multi-step phenomenon (or increase) while the volume button is pressed and held. In such control, a long press of the volume button is treated as one operation. And, it can be said that such a control does not enable the automatic continuous striking function even if it is pressed and held for a long time.

If the control that treats such a long press of the volume button as one operation is not adopted, the volume level may be increased or decreased by a plurality of steps by the long press of the volume button. Further, the relationship as described here can be applied not only to the volume control but also to the light intensity control.

24. Subsequently, it is possible to consider a situation in which the volume button operations are combined with respect to the case where the volume button is pressed and held as described above. For example, in a situation where the volume button (here, the left arrow key 96c) for lowering the volume level is held down, the other volume button (here, the right arrow key 96d) is operated for some reason. ..

By the operation of pressing and holding the left arrow key 96c, the volume level is lowered by one step. In this situation, the right arrow key 96d, which is the other volume button, is pressed once (single press or long press) to increase the volume level by one step, and the volume level is the left arrow key. Return to the value before pressing and holding 96c. That is, it is conceivable that a plurality of volume buttons related to increasing / decreasing the volume level function independently. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the volume with good responsiveness to the button operation.
<< Relationship between the button operation validity period of the automatic continuous hitting effect and the display time of the volume control effect >>

25. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the button operation valid period of the automatic continuous striking effect and the display time of the volume control effect. For example, after the volume control effect is displayed during the fluctuation and the final operation effect related to the volume control is displayed, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without a new volume control operation as described above, and the volume is increased. Consider the case where the adjustment effect is erased. Alternatively, consider a case where the volume control effect is displayed during the fluctuation, the volume control operation is not performed as it is, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, and the volume control effect is deleted.

As described above, the button operation of the automatic continuous striking effect is effective for the period (here, 3 seconds) from the end of the operation of the volume button to the disappearance of the volume control effect (or without operation). The period of time is, for example, about 6 to 10 seconds. The period during which the button operation of this automatic continuous striking effect is valid corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous striking operation valid period (the period during which at least one of the automatic continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period). be.

By doing so, the button operation valid period (here, about 6 to 10 seconds) of the automatic continuous hitting effect is longer than the display time of the volume control effect during fluctuation (here, about 3 seconds). Even if the volume control effect can be superimposed on the auto-repeated effect and displayed, the volume control effect will be erased during the button operation valid period, and the visibility of the auto-repeated effect can be ensured. Will be.
<< Relationship between the fixed design time and the display time of the volume control effect >>

26. Further, it is possible to consider the relationship between the above-mentioned symbol fixing time and the above-mentioned display time (here, 3 seconds) of the volume control effect. For example, the symbol fixed time is a time during which the fluctuation effect is fixedly stopped, and the time is, for example, about 0.3 to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the display time of the volume control effect is longer than the fixed design time.
<< Relationship between volume customization means and back volume control means for gaming machines >>

27. Next, the relationship between the volume customizing means and the management volume adjusting means can be considered. First, as the volume customizing means referred to here, as described above, an operation input means such as a volume button (here, the left direction key 96c of the cross keys 96 or the right direction key 96d) is used. , It is a means composed of each device that realizes a function that allows a player to set an environment related to volume.

On the other hand, the game machine back volume adjusting means uses the game machine back volume volume 416 arranged on the back side (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko game machine 10 to realize a function that allows the game hall clerk to set the basic volume. It is a means composed of each device. Further, the pachinko / pachislot machine back volume adjusting means can shift the volume adjusted by the above-mentioned volume customizing means so that the volume becomes louder or quieter.

More specifically, to explain by giving an example, there is a correlation between the pachinko / pachislot machine back volume adjusting means and the above-mentioned volume customizing means, and the actual volume (absolute volume) of the volume levels 1 to 5 by the volume customizing means is , It is designed to change depending on the adjustment value of the volume adjusting means behind the gaming machine. For example, it is assumed that the gaming machine back volume volume 416 of the gaming machine back volume adjusting means can be set in three stages of "large", "medium", and "small". In this case, the volume (composite volume) due to the interaction between the pachinko / pachislot machine back volume adjusting means and the volume customizing means is 5 levels when the volume customizing means is "large" and 5 levels when the volume customizing means is "medium". It is possible to distinguish between the volume of and the volume of 5 levels in the case of "low".

Furthermore, when the combined volume is evenly divided from the minimum level to the maximum level and distinguished by the numerical values of 1 to 95, the combined volume at the volume levels 1 to 5 when the back volume adjusting means of the gaming machine is "large". The volume shall be represented by the values of "85", "89", "92", "95", and "95", respectively (the unit is a decibel). Further, the default volume level (volume level when the power is turned on) in the volume customization means in this case is set to "5".

On the other hand, when the back volume adjusting means of the gaming machine is "medium", the combined volumes at the volume levels 1 to 5 are "85", "89", "92", "95", and "95", respectively. do. Further, the default volume level in the volume customization means in this case is set to "1". Further, when the back volume adjusting means of the gaming machine is "low", the combined volume at the volume levels 1 to 5 is "1", "1", "78", "82", and "95", respectively. Further, the default volume level in the volume customization means in this case is set to "4".

Furthermore, only when the back volume control means of the gaming machine is "Large", regardless of the currently set volume level, when the gaming standby continues for a predetermined time or longer (for example, when the customer waiting demonstration is in progress). It is conceivable to forcibly change to "5", which is the default volume level (volume level when the power is turned on) in the volume customization means.
<< Relationship between long press from before the valid period of continuous striking operation and the automatic continuous striking function >>

28. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the long press from before the effective period of the continuous striking operation and the automatic continuous striking function. For example, the button operation valid period (the above-mentioned continuous hit operation valid period) related to the continuous hit operation is set to about 6 seconds to 10 seconds. As described above, the continuous striking operation valid period can be at least one of the auto continuous striking valid period and the button continuous striking valid period, but here, it coincides with the button continuous striking valid period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30B, the operation button 22 is pressed at the timing before the start of the continuous hitting operation valid period, and this pressing operation starts the continuous hitting operation valid period and the continuous hitting operation valid period is continuing. Even in the situation where it is, it is assumed that it continues in the form of long press. In such a situation, the valid period of the automatic continuous striking (the above-mentioned automatic continuous striking valid period) is started after the start of the continuous striking operation valid period.

Then, when a long press for a time longer than the condition for satisfying the automatic continuous striking condition is detected after the automatic continuous striking valid period is reached, the auto continuous striking operation becomes effective, and for example, the auto continuous striking effect is started. Here, since FIG. 30 (b) is based on a specific example at the time of the automatic continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 28 (a), the description of the same portion will be omitted as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 30 (b), the button continuous striking valid period is started earlier than the auto continuous striking valid period, and FIG. 30 (b) is an example in which a non-common continuous striking valid period is provided. It has become. In such a case, the automatic continuous hitting determination becomes effective by continuing the pressing for a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds as described above), but the button pressing is continued from a predetermined time or more before the automatic continuous hitting valid period. If this is the case, after the automatic continuous hitting valid period is reached, the automatic continuous hitting is performed at a specific interval (here, 0.2 second interval as described above). If you start pressing continuously within the valid period of automatic continuous hitting, it will be automatic continuous hitting at specific intervals after a predetermined time elapses, but unlike that, smooth and even automatic continuous hitting (at 0.2 second intervals) should be possible. Can be done.

By doing so, the automatic continuous striking function can be optimized. Further, for example, even if the player assumes a back button function and starts a long press in a situation where there is no front button effect, and then a front button effect related to repeated hits is started during the long press, the automatic continuous hit is performed. The production can be started at an appropriate timing, and can be smoothly connected to the automatic continuous striking production. Not limited to this, the automatic continuous striking valid period may be started at the same time as the continuous striking operation valid period.

29. Further, as described above, when the long press is started before the start of the continuous striking operation valid period, it is possible to prevent the automatic continuous striking function from being activated without setting the auto continuous striking valid period. Further, in this case, the normal continuous striking operation is valid, and the normal continuous striking effect can be performed, but the auto continuous striking effect period does not occur, and the auto continuous striking effect can be prevented from being performed.
<< Relationship between SP reach and back button function (a mode in which repeated hitting effect is not executed) >>

30. Next, we can think about the relationship between SP reach and the back button function. For example, during SP reach, a continuous hitting effect as a back button effect may be performed. Furthermore, in the back button effect, the auto repeated hit function is not applied (does not operate). As a result, the normal continuous striking function may be exerted during SP reach, but the auto continuous striking function is not exerted.

Further, the timing of performing the back button effect (the time when the back button function is exerted) is the first half of the SP reach (the early stage or the middle stage of the effect performed in the state of the SP reach). Further, in the first half of the SP reach, the guide display such as the button image does not appear (it becomes the back button effect in which the front button effect is not performed). While the player is performing the normal continuous striking operation during the back button effect, the guide display does not appear, but the continuous striking effect (such as the effect display mentioned above) is performed, but when the auto continuous striking operation is performed, the continuous striking operation is performed. Medium production is not performed.

In addition, the production pattern that develops from the first half to the second half of the SP reach has a higher expectation of big hits than the production that does not develop. Further, when the degree of expectation related to the development of the effect and the effect develop according to the difference in the mode (color) related to the result of the back button effect (the effect appearing triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 and the effect display described above). In the above, what kind of production will be developed (whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation such as the above-mentioned production C) will be different. Further, in the latter half of the SP reach, the continuous hitting effect as the back button effect is not performed even if the player operates it, regardless of whether it is related to the normal continuous hitting or the automatic continuous hitting. (That is, in the latter half of the SP reach, the back button effect as the continuous hit effect is not performed, but the continuous hit effect and the single operation effect as the front button effect are feasible).

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function and improve the taste of the pachinko gaming machine 10. As a modification, the back button in the first half of the SP reach may also be able to execute automatic continuous striking.
<< Relationship between SP reach and back button function (mode to execute repeated hitting effect) >>

31. Regarding the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function, the automatic continuous striking effect is not limited to the execution of the automatic continuous striking effect as described above, and the auto continuous striking effect may be executed. For example, as in the above case, during the SP reach, a continuous hitting effect as a back button effect may be performed. Further, unlike the above-mentioned case, the auto continuous striking function is applied (operated) even in the back button effect. As a result, both the normal continuous striking function and the auto continuous striking function can be exerted during SP reach.

Further, in the case of the continuous hitting effect as the back button effect, the guide display (front button effect) related to the button effect of other types (single press, long press, etc.) may be performed. Further, when the operation button 22 is long-pressed in a situation where a continuous hitting effect is performed as a back button effect, other types of button effects (single-shot press, long-press, etc.) are related to the above-mentioned automatic button operation. Allow control to take place. Here, as described above, the automatic button operation can be set in advance by the player so that the same effect as that operated by the player without operating the operation button 22 proceeds. It is a function that was done.

Further, the back button effect may proceed at a predetermined stage. In that case, it is assumed that the back button effect proceeds in three stages of A, B, and C (A is the first stage). In the stages A to C, when it is determined that there are button operations more than a predetermined number of times (for example, multiple times) and there are repeated hit operations (here, both normal repeated hits and automatic repeated hits), the jackpot expectation is the highest. The higher one is the A stage. That is, if the stage is not raised at all from the stage A even though the repeated hitting operation is performed a predetermined number of times, on the contrary, it is possible to realize a novel playability of maximizing the expectation of a big hit.

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function and improve the interest of the pachinko gaming machine 10.
<< Relationship between the automatic continuous striking function and the electric support function >>

32. Next, we can think about the relationship between the automatic continuous striking function and the electric support function. For example, the automatic continuous striking function is exhibited in any of the non-electric support state, the electric support state, and the big hit state (during the big hit). Then, when the automatic continuous striking operation is performed, the auto continuous striking effect is performed.

For example, a plurality of types of continuous striking effects having different modes are provided as an effect (continuous striking effect) when a continuous striking operation is requested by displaying characters such as "Continuous striking". Further, as the automatic continuous striking effect, a plurality of types of automatic continuous striking effects having different display modes and the above-mentioned continuous striking operation valid period are provided. And, in the non-electric support state, there are relatively many types of continuous hitting effects (hereinafter referred to as "continuous hitting possible effects") that can be selected, compared to the case of the electric support state, but among them, it is more than a specific time. The selection ratio of the continuous hitting effect in the non-electric support state is determined so that the ratio of the long effect having the automatic continuous hitting valid period (for example, 10 seconds or more) is relatively small.

In the electric support state, the types of effects that can be repeatedly hit are relatively small, and among them, the proportion of long effects that have an automatic continuous hit effective period of a specific time or more (for example, 10 seconds or more) is also relatively small. , Determine the selection ratio. Furthermore, in the big hit state (during big hit), there are relatively few types of effects that can be repeatedly hit, and among them, the ratio of the effects that have an automatic continuous hit effective period of a specific time or more (for example, 10 seconds or more) is relatively small. Set the selection ratio so that it increases.

Further, as a continuous hitting effect, it is possible to perform an effect in which a predetermined mission is successful (or failed) or a battle is won (or defeated). Then, in the electric support state, the expectation of a big hit can be higher when the mission is successful or the battle is won in the continuous hitting possible production than in the non-electric support state.

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the automatic continuous striking function and the electric support function, and to improve the interest of the pachinko gaming machine 10.
<< Relationship between touch detection and production >>

33. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the touch detection of the firing handle 20 and the effect. For example, in the non-gaming state in which the game is not performed, if the player touches the firing handle 20 and the touch is detected, the predetermined effect can be executed. Various things can be adopted as the predetermined effect. For example, some are displayed as images, while others are output as audio.

Further, there are a plurality of types of predetermined effects, and it is possible to execute the predetermined effects in the non-electric support state, but it is possible not to execute the predetermined effects in the electric support state. This predetermined effect is not normally executed at the same time as the continuous hitting effect or the automatic continuous hitting effect, but can be executed in parallel with the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect (in parallel with the variable waiting or customer waiting demo). Is feasible). Furthermore, a specific effect that is a different category from the predetermined effect can also be executed, and the specific effect is not executed in the non-electric support state, but can be executed in the electric support state, and is the above-mentioned right-handed effect. It is possible to make a guidance effect (right-handed effect). Further, the specific effect can be executed in parallel with the normal continuous hitting effect or the automatic continuous hitting effect (it can be executed during the fluctuation), or can be executed in parallel with the volume adjustment effect or the light amount adjustment effect (it can be executed during the fluctuation). It can be executed in parallel during the variable waiting or customer waiting demo). As described above, this right-handed effect as a specific effect is also displayed during the customer waiting demonstration (during the waiting movie) in the electric support state.

34. Next, as the relationship between the touch detection and the effect, the relationship between the touch detection and the standby movie (standby demo effect), which is the effect of the standby demo, can be considered. For example, when the period of the variable stop (fixed stop) state and the touch non-detection state of the firing handle 20 reaches a predetermined period, it is conceivable to display a standby demo effect. The standby demo effect here is the above-mentioned standby movie.

In addition, the volume during the standby demo effect is silent or lower (lower) than the volume up to that point (before the start of the standby demo effect such as when the symbol is changing). Further, the period (display period) of the standby demo effect is longer than the above-mentioned predetermined period (time until the standby demo effect is started in the state where the touch is not detected) before the standby demo effect display. In addition, during the display period of the standby demo effect (during the display period of the standby demo effect), there is no entry into any of the starting ports (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63). In any case, if there is a touch detection on the launch handle 20, the display shifts from the standby demo effect to the variable stop display.

The standby demo effect display is performed in both the non-electric support state and the electric support state, but as a modification, only the sound output at a low (low) volume is performed in the electric support state, and the standby demo effect display is performed. It may be configured so that it does not exist. In addition, in the case of a specific game state (here, a game state in which right-handed should be hit), if there is a predetermined situation (here, when the standby demo effect is displayed) and there is a touch detection to the firing handle 20, there are a plurality of cases. Of the types of right-handed guidance effects, a specific right-handed guidance effect display or a specific voice output may be performed.

Further, during the standby demonstration effect, when the operation button 22 or the cross key 96 is operated, the screen shifts to the above-mentioned menu screen for environment setting. On the other hand, if there is a touch detection on the launch handle 20 during the standby demo production, the screen shifts to the variable stop screen, but during the standby demo production, the standby demo effect is maintained (the display of the standby movie is displayed). By operating the cross key 96 (triggered by the operation of the player), it is possible to adjust the volume and display the volume adjustment effect, and it is also possible to display the light amount adjustment and the light amount adjustment effect.
<< Relationship between environment setting function and error volume >>

35. Next, we can think about the relationship between the environment setting function and the error volume. For example, as explained above, it is possible to adjust the volume related to the production in the environment settings, but the error volume cannot be set by the player (unless it depends on the back volume control means of the gaming machine). If it is not possible to set), etc. The error volume can be set at the factory shipment stage of the pachinko gaming machine 10, but cannot be changed by the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the volume is set excessively low when an abnormality occurs and the player or the game hall clerk cannot detect the abnormality. However, for the above-mentioned second error, the volume cannot be set according to the volume level set by the player, but for the above-mentioned first error, the volume is set according to the volume level set by the player. It may be configured so that it can be done.
<< Relationship between environment settings and variable display >>

36. Next, we can consider a modified example of the relationship between the environment setting and the variable display. For example, when the fluctuation is started while adjusting the volume or the amount of light, the volume selected at the time when the fluctuation is started even if the operation for determining the volume or the amount of light (here, the operation button 22 is pressed) is not performed. Or, make it reflect the setting of the amount of light. By doing so, the player can quickly pay attention to the variable effect.
<< Relationship between environment settings and production mode changes >>

37. Next, we can think about the relationship between the environment setting and the effect mode change. For example, the volume buttons (here, left arrow keys 96c and right arrow keys 96d) can be used only for volume adjustment, and the light amount buttons (here, up arrow keys 96a and down arrow keys 96b) can be used for light intensity adjustment. It shall also be used to switch the production mode. Then, regarding the light intensity button, the function is made different between the fluctuation state and the fluctuation stop state.

Further, regarding the switching of the effect mode, the effect mode can be switched by operating the light amount button both during the change and when the change is stopped. Then, during the fluctuation, the volume can be adjusted and the effect mode can be switched, but the amount of light cannot be adjusted. However, while the fluctuation is stopped (including during the standby demo), the volume can be adjusted, the amount of light can be adjusted, and the effect mode can be switched.

In order to enable both the light amount adjustment and the switching of the effect mode while the fluctuation is stopped, it is conceivable that the selection function is insufficient only with the cross key 96. Therefore, it is conceivable to use other buttons together, or to use a button device capable of selecting in more directions by changing to the cross key 96 having four directions of up, down, left, and right.
<< About the timer value that is the transition condition to the standby demo production >>

38. Next, regarding the above-mentioned standby demo effect, it is possible to consider a timer value that is a condition for shifting to the standby demo effect. For example, the period from the fluctuation stop in the situation where there is no hold to the transition to the standby demo production (predetermined timer value) has been shifted from the above-mentioned menu screen for environment setting to the display during fluctuation stop (normal screen). Starting from the timing, the period (predetermined timer value) until the transition to the standby demo effect can be made the same as each other.

Further, if a specific condition is satisfied during the increment (or decrement) of the timer value, the timer value can be cleared. As a specific condition in this case, for example, a start winning prize (general drawing winning) related to a normal symbol can be exemplified. Further, when the timer value is cleared, it is possible that no change occurs on the effect display screen triggered by the timer clear.

In addition, the timer value increment (or decrement) related to the period from the suspension of fluctuation to the transition to the standby demo effect in the situation where there is no hold reaches a predetermined value, the process shifts to the standby demo effect, and the above-mentioned is performed during the execution of the standby demo effect. Even if the specific condition of is satisfied, the standby demo production can be not interrupted.

Further, when a predetermined condition different from the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied, the timer value can be cleared, and a change can occur on the effect display screen triggered by the timer clear. As the predetermined condition in this case, for example, the starting prize (special figure winning) according to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be exemplified. Further, as the change on the screen, the start of the variation effect can be exemplified.

Further, if the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are satisfied during the standby demo production after shifting to the standby demo production after the timer value has elapsed, the demo movie can be interrupted during the standby demo production. Is.
<Summary of Examples>

As described above, various aspects of the production of the pachinko gaming machine 10 have been illustrated, and these can be summarized as follows.
<Summary 1>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Equipped with operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: one-shot operation effects that can accept a single player operation and continuous hit operation effects that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) to encourage the player's operation.
When the player operation is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the multiple player operations (normal continuous striking effect, etc.).
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, if the single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.), the game is performed a plurality of times. It is possible to display an effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to the fact that a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, which is considered to have been performed by a person.
The continuous striking operation valid period in which the player operation can be accepted in the continuous striking operation effect is relatively larger than the single-shot operation valid period (button continuous striking valid period, etc.) in which the player operation can be accepted in the single-shot operation effect. long,
A first effect pattern (front button effect, etc.) that displays the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed, and a second effect pattern (back button effect, etc.) that does not display the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed. And have
The continuous striking operation valid period during which the player operation can be accepted in the continuous striking operation effect in the second effect pattern is the continuous striking operation valid period during which the player operation can be accepted in the continuous striking operation effect in the first effect pattern. Relatively longer than
It has a plurality of types of effects displayed by performing a plurality of player operations in the continuous hit operation effect in the second effect pattern.
A predetermined effect (display of a brilliant image related to the continuous stroke effect, etc.) displayed in parallel when the continuous hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is executed, and a predetermined effect are displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed. In some cases, it has a specific effect (such as the effect of the latter half of SP reach),
The type (color difference, etc.) of the effect (effect element, etc.) displayed by performing the player operation a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect in the second effect pattern when the predetermined effect is displayed. ), The possibility that the specific effect is displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed is different.
Within one symbol variation, it is possible to display the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and a pre-effect that can be displayed before the predetermined effect (such as the variation notice effect).
It has a plurality of types of the above-mentioned pre-production, and has
When the predetermined effect is displayed after the pre-effect is displayed within one symbol variation, the pre-effect is described according to the type of the mode of the pre-effect (color accompanying the character display of the dialogue, etc.). The tendency of which type of effect is displayed by performing a plurality of player operations in the continuous striking operation effect in the second effect pattern when a predetermined effect is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized by being different.
<Summary 2>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Equipped with operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: one-shot operation effects that can accept a single player operation and continuous hit operation effects that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) to encourage the player's operation.
When the player operation is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the multiple player operations (normal continuous striking effect, etc.).
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, if the single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.), the game is performed a plurality of times. It is possible to display an effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to the fact that a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, which is considered to have been performed by a person.
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and the error state has at least a first error state (recoverable error state, etc.) and a second error state (recoverable error state, etc.). ,
If a first error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer in the continuous striking operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the first error state. If the above (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.) is continuously performed, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the continuous operation of the single player for a predetermined time or longer.
If a second error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer in the continuous striking operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the second error state. A game characterized in that even if the above (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.) is continuously performed, the effect corresponding to the single player operation being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is not displayed. It is a machine.
<Summary 3>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
The types of operation effects include a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
It is considered that the player operation of the first operating means is performed a plurality of times by continuously performing the player operation of the first operating means for a predetermined time or more in the continuous striking operation effect. , An effect triggered by the player operation of the second operating means in a situation where the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is displayed. The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.
<Summary 4>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means, and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
While the promotion effect displayed by a certain symbol variation is not continuously displayed across the next variation of the certain symbol variation, it is not displayed continuously.
The volume display displayed by a certain symbol variation is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be continuously displayed over the next variation of the certain symbol variation.
<Summary 5>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means, and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
It is considered that the player operation of the first operating means is performed a plurality of times by continuously performing the player operation of the first operating means for a predetermined time or more in the continuous striking operation effect. , An effect triggered by the player operation of the second operating means in a situation where the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is displayed. The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel. And
When the power was cut off and then recovered from the power cut, the player operation of the second operating means was started during the power cut, and the player operation was continued even after the power was turned off. However, the gaming machine is characterized in that the volume level is not adjusted by the player's operation after the power is turned off.
<Summary 6>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means, and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
It is considered that the player operation of the first operating means is performed a plurality of times by continuously performing the player operation of the first operating means for a predetermined time or more in the continuous striking operation effect. , An effect triggered by the player operation of the second operating means in a situation where the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is displayed. The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel. And
Even if a single player operation of the second operating means is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, it is not considered that the player operation of the second operating means is performed a plurality of times. It is a gaming machine.
<Summary 7>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Equipped with operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: one-shot operation effects that can accept a single player operation and continuous hit operation effects that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) to encourage the player's operation.
When the player operation is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the multiple player operations (normal continuous striking effect, etc.).
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, if the single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), the game is performed a plurality of times. It is possible to display an effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to the fact that a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, assuming that the user operation has been performed.
The continuous striking operation valid period in which the player operation can be accepted in the continuous striking operation effect is relatively larger than the single-shot operation valid period (button continuous striking valid period, etc.) in which the player operation can be accepted in the single-shot operation effect. long,
A first effect pattern (front button effect, etc.) that displays the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed, and a second effect pattern (back button effect, etc.) that does not display the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed. And have
The continuous striking operation valid period during which the player operation can be accepted in the continuous striking operation effect in the second effect pattern is the continuous striking operation valid period during which the player operation can be accepted in the continuous striking operation effect in the first effect pattern. Relatively longer than
It has a plurality of types of effects displayed by performing a plurality of player operations in the continuous hit operation effect in the second effect pattern.
A predetermined effect (display of a brilliant image related to the continuous stroke effect, etc.) displayed in parallel when the continuous hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is executed, and a predetermined effect are displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed. In some cases, it has a specific effect (such as the effect of the latter half of SP reach),
The type (color difference, etc.) of the effect (effect element, etc.) displayed by performing the player operation a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect in the second effect pattern when the predetermined effect is displayed. ), The possibility that the specific effect is displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed is different.
Within one symbol variation, it is possible to display the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and a pre-effect that can be displayed before the predetermined effect (such as the variation notice effect).
It has a plurality of types of the above-mentioned pre-production, and has
When the predetermined effect is displayed after the pre-effect is displayed within one symbol variation, the pre-effect is described according to the type of the mode of the pre-effect (color accompanying the character display of the dialogue, etc.). The tendency of which type of effect is displayed by performing a plurality of player operations in the continuous striking operation effect in the second effect pattern when a predetermined effect is displayed. Is different,
In the continuous striking operation effect in the first effect pattern, a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.) within the continuous striking operation valid period during which the player operation can be accepted. Even if this is the case, if the player's operation of the first operating means has been performed a single number of times before the start of the continuous striking operation valid period, the player's operation has been performed a plurality of times. It is a gaming machine characterized by not being regarded as a thing.
<Summary 8>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
Equipped with operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: one-shot operation effects that can accept a single player operation and continuous hit operation effects that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) to encourage the player's operation.
When a player operation is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the multiple player operations (normal continuous striking effect, etc.).
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, if the single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), the game is performed a plurality of times. It is possible to display an effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to the fact that a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, assuming that the user operation has been performed.
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and the error state has at least a first error state (recoverable error state, etc.) and a second error state (recoverable error state, etc.). ,
If a first error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer in the continuous striking operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the first error state. If the above (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.) is continuously performed, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the continuous operation of the single player for a predetermined time or longer.
If a second error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer in the continuous striking operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the second error state. Even if the above (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.) is continuously performed, the effect corresponding to the single player operation being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is not displayed.
It has a plurality of types of the modes of the continuous striking operation effect.
The first game state (one of the non-electric support state, the electric support state, the big hit state (during the big hit), etc.) and the second game state (non-electric support state, electric support state) with different ease of transition to the special game , A big hit state (during a big hit) that is different from the first game state, etc.)
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of types of the continuous striking operation effect is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
<Summary 9>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means, and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
It is considered that the player operation of the first operating means is performed a plurality of times by continuously performing the player operation of the first operating means for a predetermined time or more in the continuous striking operation effect. , An effect triggered by the player operation of the second operating means in a situation where the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is displayed. The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel. And
In the continuous striking operation effect in the first effect pattern, a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.) within the continuous striking operation valid period during which the player operation can be accepted. Even if this is the case, if the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single number of times before the start of the continuous striking operation valid period, the player operation has been performed a plurality of times. Not considered to be a thing,
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and there are multiple types of error states (first error state, second error state, etc.) as error states.
At least in a specific error state among a plurality of types of error states, it is possible to output a specific error notification sound for notifying the specific error state.
The specific error notification sound is characterized in that it is output at a predetermined volume (such as a volume adjusted by a gaming machine back volume adjusting means) regardless of the adjustment content of the volume level of the current effect sound. It is a gaming machine.
<Summary 10>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means, and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
While the promotion effect displayed by a certain symbol variation is not continuously displayed across the next variation of the certain symbol variation, it is not displayed continuously.
The volume display displayed by a certain symbol variation can be continuously displayed over the next variation of the certain symbol variation.
A third operating means (such as a gaming machine back volume adjusting means), which is an operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means, is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted not only by the second operating means but also by the third operating means.
<Summary 11>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means, and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
It is considered that the player operation of the first operating means is performed a plurality of times by continuously performing the player operation of the first operating means for a predetermined time or more in the continuous striking operation effect. , An effect triggered by the player operation of the second operating means in a situation where the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is displayed. The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel. And
When the power was cut off and then recovered from the power off, the player operation of the second operating means was started during the power off and the player operation was continued even after the power was turned off. Even so, the volume level is not adjusted by the player's operation after the power is turned off.
A third operating means (such as a gaming machine back volume adjusting means), which is an operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means, is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted not only by the second operating means but also by the third operating means.
<Summary 12>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium (game ball, etc.), and it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display the symbol as an effect related to the game. It is a gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to the player when the display mode is
The main control means (main board, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control means (sub-main board, etc.) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means (such as an effect display device) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and
An effect sound output means (speaker, etc.) that outputs an effect sound under the control of the sub-control means, and
The first operation means (operation buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
It is equipped with a second operating means (such as a cross key) that can be operated by the player and is an operating means different from the first operating means.
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the first operation means.
The types of operation effects include a single-shot operation effect that can accept a single player operation of the first operation means and a continuous hit operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations of the first operation means.
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for encouraging the player operation of the first operation means.
When the player operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operation means a plurality of times (normal continuous striking effect, etc.). ,
Even if the player operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, the player operation of the first operation means a single time is a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is considered that the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a plurality of times, and the player operation of the first operating means has been performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (automatic continuous hit effect, etc.) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operation means.
When adjusting the volume level of the production sound, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the volume level of the current production sound.
It is considered that the player operation of the first operating means is performed a plurality of times by continuously performing the player operation of the first operating means for a predetermined time or more in the continuous striking operation effect. , An effect triggered by the player operation of the second operating means in a situation where the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer is displayed. The volume level of the sound can be adjusted, and the effect corresponding to the player operation of the first operating means performed a single time for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display can be displayed in parallel. And
Even if a single player operation of the second operating means is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, it is not considered that the player operation of the second operating means is performed a plurality of times.
If a specific time elapses without any new symbol change after the symbol is stopped, a predetermined standby demo effect can be displayed.
During the display of the predetermined standby demo effect, the volume of the effect sound is reduced or the effect sound is muted (such as being silent) as compared with the case where the symbol is changing.
Even when the predetermined standby demo effect is being displayed and the volume of the effect sound is reduced or the effect sound is muted as compared with the case where the symbol is changing, the predetermined standby demo effect is displayed. The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted by the player operation of the second operating means while maintaining the above, and the volume level display is also displayed in parallel while maintaining the display of the predetermined standby demo effect. It is a gaming machine characterized by being possible.
<Other embodiments>

The present invention is not limited to the various embodiments described above, and can be variously modified. For example, in the explanations so far, it was avoided to supplement the explanations one by one so as not to make the explanation redundant, but as long as there is no problem in application, the matters related to the volume control effect may be applied to the light amount adjustment effect, or the automatic continuous hit effect may be applied. It is possible to apply the matter to the production during normal repeated hits. Further, as long as there is no particular problem, it is possible to combine various effects such as volume adjustment effect, light amount adjustment effect, right-handed effect, and standby demo effect, centering on the automatic continuous hit effect. Further, as long as there is no particular problem, each of the various embodiments relating to the front button effect and the back button effect can be applied to each other.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, for example, it stands by on a relatively large display body (here, referred to as a "first effect display device"). While displaying the demo effect, the display related to the environment setting (set volume adjustment effect, light amount adjustment effect, etc.) is displayed on the other small display body (here, referred to as "second effect display device"). , Is also possible. In this case, since the standby demo effect is displayed, it is possible not to perform the hold display.

Further, the display related to the environment setting may be constantly displayed on the second effect display device. Further, during the symbol change, it is also possible to display the hold on the second effect display device together with the display related to the environment setting. It is also possible to constantly display both the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect on the second effect display device.

Further, it is also possible to provide a plurality of second effect display devices and display the volume control effect and the light amount adjustment effect related to the environment setting on separate second effect display devices. It is also possible to perform the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect on one second effect display device, and perform another display (notice effect, etc.) on the other second effect display device.

Further, it is possible to display the effect symbol (decorative symbol) 190 on the first effect display device and display the environment setting on the second effect display device during the fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the display that is highly important for the progress of the game.

Further, it is possible to adopt the display of the number of game balls as an item that the player can change by his / her own operation. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 that displays the number of game balls acquired by the player on the effect display device 60 during the special game, the meaning indicated by the number of game balls displayed can be selected. Then, whether the number of game balls displayed by the player operating the cross key 96 or the operation button 22 is the number of game balls (total number) paid out by winning the prize in the grand prize opening, or whether the player wins the prize. It is now possible to change whether the number of game balls increased during the special game (subtraction number) is obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player during the special game from the number of game balls paid out by winning the prize in the mouth. do.

The time when such a selectable item can be determined includes a time when the environment can be set, a big hit start, a big hit, a specific symbol change (for example, a symbol change in a time-reduced game state), a change stop, and the like. Various times can be mentioned. Further, the person who can make a decision regarding the selectable items is not limited to the player, but may be the manager of the game field (game field clerk, etc.). Also, both the player and the manager may be able to make a decision.

Further, the gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as described above. For example, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine that directly pays out a game ball as a game medium acquired by a player to the player so that the player can touch the prize ball. The present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) in which a gaming ball is circulated and used inside the gaming machine. Further, as the enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine, an example capable of electromagnetically recording the entry and exit of the gaming medium can be exemplified.

Further, the present invention includes a plurality of reels in which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, controls the rotation start and rotation stop of the reels based on the operation of the player, and plays a game such as a game medal according to the winning winning combination. It can also be applied to a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that dispenses a medium (including storage in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of the handle operation detection, the detection of a bet button operation that may be operated by the player at the time of betting setting, or the detection of the operation of the bet button that may be performed by the player at the time of betting setting may be performed by the player. Based on the detection of the insertion of the game medal, it is possible to apply the effect output according to the state of the game machine. Further, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.
<Other additional considerations>

Furthermore, the inventor has examined other matters (additional consideration matters) regarding various button effects as described above. In the following, these additional considerations will be described in order. Unless there is a particular problem, each additional study item described here is an appropriate form among the embodiments and modifications described so far, each additional study item, and technical items in each additional study item. It is possible to combine with. Further, in the following explanations, regarding the high / low probability, high / low ratio, high / low frequency (easiness of execution) related to the execution and display of the effect, 100% is relatively high and 0% is low. It is possible to consider including. This point is the same for the high / low probability, high / low ratio, high / low frequency (easiness of execution), etc. regarding the execution and display of various effects described above.
<< Additional consideration 1 (Expansion of variety of productions associated with the type of auto-striking production 1) >>

First, regarding the automatic continuous striking function, which is an automatic continuous striking function, it is considered to provide a plurality of types of auto continuous striking effects and expand the variety of the effects in relation to the types of the auto continuous striking effects.

Regarding the provision of a plurality of types of automatic continuous striking effects, in the above section << Various aspects relating to the back button effect >> (paragraphs 0520 to 0525 of the present specification), the auto continuous striking effect A as the back button effect and the auto continuous striking effect are performed. An example in which the effect B is provided and the blinking cycles in the effect are different from each other has been described (paragraph 0523 of the present specification, etc.). Further, with respect to the automatic continuous hitting effect C and the automatic continuous hitting effect D as the table button effect, an example in which the blinking cycles in the effect are different from each other has been described in the same manner (same paragraph 0523 of the present specification).

In addition, in the section << Relationship between the automatic continuous striking effect as the back button effect and the subsequent effect >> (paragraphs 0505-0519 of the present specification), a series of reach effects are described from the normal reach to the first half of the SP reach. In the first half of this SP reach, "automatic continuous hitting effect as a back button effect" is executed, and further, it is possible to develop from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. Paragraph 0511, etc.).

Further, it has been described that when a plurality of types of automatic continuous hitting effects are provided, the degree of expectation of a big hit for the subsequent effects is different depending on the mode of the automatic continuous hitting effects (paragraph 0517 of the present specification, etc.). Furthermore, it is also explained that the term "SP reach second half production" refers to the production of the latter part when the SP reach is divided into the first half and the second half based on the predetermined timing and the situation of the production. (Paragraph 0519 of the present specification, etc.).

And here, the effect control related to the auto-repeated effect as the back button effect in the first half of the SP reach, the auto-repeated effect as the front button effect in the second half of the SP reach, and the jackpot expectation for the effect after the auto-reach effect. Will be explained. In the following, in order to distinguish from the above-mentioned auto-repeated hits A to D, the auto-repeated hitting effect as the back button effect is referred to as "auto-continuous hitting effect A1" or "fifth auto-repeated hitting effect", and the auto as the front button effect. The continuous striking effect will be referred to as "auto continuous striking effect C1", "sixth auto continuous striking effect", or the like. As for these continuous hitting effects (automatic continuous hitting effect), as explained earlier in paragraphs 0481 and 0482, not only automatic continuous hitting but also normal continuous hitting is possible, and continuous hitting is being performed by automatic continuous hitting or normal continuous hitting. Directing occurs. The continuous hitting effect is an effect that can be generated by automatic continuous hitting or normal continuous hitting (effect when continuous hitting is performed), and is common to both the automatic continuous hitting effect and the normal continuous hitting effect. It should be added that the production can be executed (in other words, the production content and the production candidates generated by the continuous striking are the same regardless of whether it is an automatic continuous striking or a normal continuous striking). Since the "repeated hitting effect" is a production based on the continuous striking, it may be referred to as "a production triggered by the continuous striking" or "a production based on the continuous striking".

First, the fluctuation effect related to one fluctuation is the auto-continuous hitting effect A1 as the "back button effect" in the "SP reach first half" and the auto-continuous hitting effect C1 as the "front button effect" in the "SP reach second half". One or both of them may be performed.

The above-mentioned "SP reach first half" and "SP reach second half" are expressed by dividing the SP reach into the first half and the second half based on a predetermined timing and the situation of the production, as in the above description. Regarding the "SP reach first half" and "SP reach second half", for example, the point at which the progress of the production shifts (branches) to one of a plurality of types of productions that may appear at that time (branching) ( It is also possible to refer to the period before the turning point) as the "SP reach first half" and the later period as the "SP reach second half". Regarding the first half of the SP reach and the second half of the SP reach, for example, the "first half of the SP reach" is the SP reach for a predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a big hit is relatively lower than that of the "second half of the SP reach". It is a production that expects the player to shift to the "SP reach second half" rather than hoping that the player will be notified of the winning of the big hit in the "SP reach first half", and the "SP reach second half" is the "SP reach first half". It is a reach production for a predetermined time (about 60 seconds, etc.) longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a big hit is relatively higher than that of the "SP reach first half", and the player wins the big hit. It can be assumed that the production is expected to be notified.

Further, the "SP reach first half" and "SP reach second half" can be expressed as shifting (or transitioning) from the "SP reach first half" to the "SP reach second half" through a branch point.

Further, the branch point can be considered to be included in either "SP reach first half" or "SP reach second half". Further, shifting to any of the effects at the branch point can be referred to as "effect branch" or the like. Then, the turning point when it is possible to shift to either a production that is relatively advantageous to the player or a production that is relatively disadvantageous is a "winning branch" related to winning (big hit) or losing (missing). It is also possible to call it. In addition, as a big hit pattern when it develops into SP reach, (1) a pattern to notify the winning in "SP reach first half" without shifting from "SP reach first half" to "SP reach second half", (2) " After shifting from "SP reach first half" to "SP reach second half", a pattern to notify the winner in "SP reach second half", (3) "SP reach first half" does not occur and suddenly develops into "SP reach second half" There is a pattern to notify the winner in the "second half of SP reach", and (1) is a rare production pattern with a lower probability of being selected than (2) and (3). In addition, as a big hit pattern when developing into SP reach, (4) a pattern that notifies the loss in "SP reach first half" without shifting from "SP reach first half" to "SP reach second half", (5) " After shifting from "SP reach first half" to "SP reach second half", a pattern that notifies the loss in "SP reach second half", (6) "SP reach first half" does not occur and suddenly develops into "SP reach second half" There is a pattern to notify the loss in the "second half of SP reach", and (5) and (6) are production patterns with a relatively low probability of being selected as compared with (4).

Further, the production of "SP reach first half" and the production of "SP reach second half" do not necessarily have to be included in both one fluctuation (during one fluctuation production). Then, at least one of the "SP reach first half" effect and the "SP reach second half" effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations. In such a case, at least in the production of "SP reach first half", it is conceivable to utilize the deviation variation in which the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order.

Furthermore, even when multiple fluctuations are used for the production of the "SP reach first half" and the production of the "SP reach second half", the above-mentioned branch point (execution point of the production branch) is the production of the "SP reach first half" and the production. , It is possible to include it in one of the productions of "SP reach second half".

It is also conceivable to use one variation (or a plurality of variation) for the effect representing the effect branch. In this case, at least one variation is used for the production of the "SP reach first half", the production representing the production branch, and the production of the "SP reach second half". Then, from the production of "SP reach first half" to the production of "SP reach second half", at least three fluctuations are used, including the fluctuation times (variation times for the production branch) in which the production representing the production branch is performed. Will be done.

On the premise of the above, in one embodiment of the additional study item 1, each of the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) and auto continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect). Regarding the operation valid period (auto continuous striking valid period), the relationship between the respective operation valid periods is determined so that the automatic continuous striking effect A1 has a longer operation valid period (auto continuous striking valid period) than the auto continuous striking effect C1. .. As a specific example, for example, the operation valid period (auto continuous hit valid period) in the auto continuous hit effect A1 is a period that starts 1 second after the start of the first half of the SP reach and ends 9 seconds before the end of the first half of the SP reach. The operation valid period (auto continuous hit valid period) in the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 is a period that starts 30 seconds after the start of the latter half of the SP reach and ends 10 seconds before the end of the latter half of the SP reach. 5 seconds, and so on. By doing so, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the back button effect in the first half of SP reach. As a modification, in the latter half of the SP reach, a single-shot operation effect may be performed instead of the automatic continuous striking effect, and in the latter half of the SP reach, the button effect may not be provided.

Here, the auto-continuous striking valid period is basically determined to match during the button operation valid period (paragraph 0470, FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (a) of the present specification, (B), FIG. 30 (a), etc.). However, depending on the situation, the automatic continuous hitting valid period may be shorter than the button operation valid period (FIG. 28 (b), FIG. 30 (b), etc.).

Further, in the present additional consideration item 1, a random number value is assigned to each of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1 and C1) so as to be a big hit at a rate close to 100%. Although it is referred to as "repeated hitting effect", it may be referred to as "repeated hitting effect" which is "the display mode with the highest expectation of big hit", and since the display mode does not change any more, the "final display mode" as described later. It is conceivable that it includes (may be referred to as a continuous hitting production). In other words, in any of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1), the arrangement (number of places) of the corresponding random number values is determined so that the jackpot expectation is almost 100% (this). Is also a "repeated hitting effect of the jackpot confirmation mode", but may be referred to as a "repeated hitting effect" which is a "display mode with the highest expectation of a big hit", and since the display mode does not change any more, it will be described later. It is conceivable that it has a "final display mode", which may be referred to as a continuous striking effect). As a modification, any of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1) may be configured to include a continuous hitting effect to which a random number value is assigned so as to be a big hit at a rate of 100%.

Further, for example, in the automatic continuous striking effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect), as a continuous striking effect of the big hit confirmation mode, an effect of a mode in which a predetermined image object in the effect image emits light in rainbow color (rainbow emission) is performed. Will be executed. More specifically, with respect to the automatic continuous hitting effect A1, as the automatic continuous hitting progresses in the situation where the button image is not displayed (as the effect indicating one pressing is repeated), the continuous hitting effect related to the automatic continuous hitting effect is produced. The coloring of the effect display is white (effect display in the first stage) → blue (effect display in the next stage, big hit expectation 1%) → yellow (big hit expectation 5%) → green (big hit expectation 15%) → Red (big hit expectation 35%) → Rainbow color (big hit expectation 100%) It is a production that may change (so-called rise), and it emits light in rainbow color (rainbow emission) in the variable display that becomes a big hit. It is possible to exemplify those that are configured to be used in some cases. On the other hand, in the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect), as a continuous hitting effect of the big hit confirmation mode, a predetermined character fights against a large number of enemies and defeats all the enemies (enemy). It is possible to exemplify the production of annihilation).

Then, in the present additional examination item 1, regarding the execution ratio of the continuous hitting effect of the big hit confirmation mode in both automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1), the mutual relationship is defined as follows. For example, in the variable display that becomes a big hit, the execution ratio of the continuous hitting effect in the big hit confirmation mode in the automatic continuous hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) is the big hit in the auto continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect). It is relatively low (small, small) compared to the execution rate of the effect during repeated hits in the definite mode. Conversely, the execution ratio of the continuous hitting effect in the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) is the effect of the big hit confirmation mode in the automatic continuous hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect). It is relatively high (large and large) compared to the execution rate of. As a specific example, in the variable display that is a big hit, the execution ratio of the continuous hitting effect in the automatic continuous hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) is 20% (the remaining 80% is the big hit confirmation mode). The execution rate of the continuous hitting effect of the big hit confirmation mode in the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) is 90% (the remaining 10% is during the continuous hitting of the big hit confirmation mode). It will not be a production). In addition, in the variable display that becomes a big hit, if the continuous hitting effect of the big hit confirmation mode in the auto continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) is not executed, 3% of the remaining 10% is in the SP reach second half. (That is, it is a surprising effect that the winning is notified even though the effect during repeated hits in the big hit confirmation mode was not executed), and 2% of the remaining 10% is SP. After the fake defeat is notified in the latter half of the reach and the second half of the SP reach is completed, the winning is notified by displaying the characters "Actually ... big hit!" On the screen (that is, the big hit confirmation mode). Even though the production during repeated hits was not executed and the winning was not notified in the latter half of the SP reach, the winning is notified after that, which is a more surprising production). Here, the execution ratio of the continuous hitting effect of the big hit confirmation mode of the automatic continuous hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) in the variable display that becomes a big hit, and the big hit of the auto continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect). The execution ratio of the effect during continuous striking in the definite mode is the ratio when at least a predetermined number of continuous striking is performed in each operation valid period (auto continuous striking valid period) (for example, 50 times in the case of the auto continuous striking effect A1). , If it is the automatic continuous hitting effect C1, it is the ratio when 10 times are performed).

In any of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1), when the big hit confirmation mode is adopted, an unexpected effect such as the display of the characters "actually ... big hit!" As described above ("unexpected"). It is configured so that "sexual production", "special production", etc.) do not occur. Therefore, when the big hit confirmation mode is adopted in the auto continuous hitting effect (A1, C1), the unexpectedness effect is not generated after the big hit confirmation mode is not obtained in the auto continuous hitting effect (A1, C1). Is not executed, so it becomes a big hit in a short time (in other words, the fluctuation time becomes shorter). In addition to the above-mentioned display of the characters "Actually ... a big hit!", For example, the characters are likely to be defeated by the enemy once, but they are revived with some chance. However, it may be a production in which the spirit is regained. Depending on the type of SP reach (any of SP reach second half productions A to C), the production mode (characters and stories) of SP reach differs, and the production when notifying the winner and the effect when notifying the defeat are different. Although different, the unexpected effect is a common effect regardless of the type of SP reach (any of SP reach second half effects A to C) in which a false defeat was notified. As a modification, it is possible to consider a production mode in which the battle is always won after the unexpected production, and a production mode in which the battle is finally defeated after the unexpected production. In addition, the case where the winning is notified via the unexpected effect is more for the player than the case where the winning is notified without going through the unexpected effect (the winning is notified in the latter half of the SP reach). It is configured so that there are many cases where it is an advantageous jackpot (a jackpot that is a probable change, a jackpot with a large number of rounds).

According to the embodiment of the invention according to the additional study item 1 as described above, the tendency of the continuous striking effect (effect change tendency) that sequentially changes can be made different according to the type of the automatic continuous striking effect. Then, after forming a special condition of the type of automatic continuous hitting effect, it is possible to create a difference in the effecting tendency by relating various game-like components such as the operation validity period and the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode. ..

As a result, it is possible to diversify the development of subsequent effects with respect to a plurality of types of automatic continuous hit effects, and it is possible to effectively utilize the button function. Then, the button function can be further optimized, and it becomes possible to create a new and diverse game.

For this reason, it is possible to make various production changes without making uniform production changes, and the final production content (big hit production) corresponding to the production after the change (post-change production). By leading (shifting) to an out-of-order effect, etc., it is basically a natural effect, but in some rare situations (a situation in which a big hit confirmation mode is executed), it is surprising. It can lead (shift) to a production (production of enemy annihilation). Then, while diversifying the button production itself, it is possible to give a certain degree of appropriate diversity while not complicating the flow of the production accompanying it more than necessary.

In the above-mentioned example, the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode (for example, rainbow light emission) according to the automatic continuous hit effect A1 has been described. However, the auto-continuous hitting effect A1 is an effect that can be executed before the auto-continuous hitting effect C1. It will be determined by the product of the execution ratio of the effect of the aspect.

The execution ratio of the effect of the big hit confirmation mode of the auto continuous hit effect A1 is affected by the execution ratio of the effect of the big hit confirmation mode related to the auto continuous hit effect C1, so that the jackpot expectation is almost 100%. It can be difficult to design. Therefore, the invention is not defined by comparing the jackpot confirmation modes of both auto-continuous hitting effects (A1, C1), but by comparing, for example, the final display mode of the auto-continuous hitting effect A1 with the jackpot confirmation mode of the auto-continuous hitting effect C1. , The invention may be specified.

For example, the automatic continuous hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) is difficult to be the final display mode, but the auto continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) is likely to be the big hit confirmation mode. , It is possible to determine the relationship of the execution ratio of the high expectation (the degree to which it is possible to expect the player to be in a suitable gaming state) in both automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1). .. The final display mode of the auto-continuous hitting effect A1 cannot be said to be a big hit confirmation mode, but it can be said that the effect can be expected to develop thereafter.

To give a more specific example, for example, regarding the auto-repeated effect A1, the back button effect in the first half of the SP reach is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of development in the second half of the SP reach, and the auto-repeated effect is performed in the situation where the button image is not displayed. As it progresses (as the effect representing one press is repeated), the coloring of the effect display, which is the effect during repeated hits related to the automatic continuous hit effect, is white (effect display in the first stage) → blue (effect in the next stage). Display) → Yellow (Low development expectation in the latter half of SP reach) → Green (Medium development expectation in the latter half of SP reach) → Red (Development confirmed in the latter half of SP reach) may change (so-called rise) To be there. However, in this automatic continuous hitting effect A1, it is preferable that there is no change to the effect display that can be recognized as an effect of the jackpot confirmation mode by many players, such as rainbow light emission and a predetermined pattern. .. It should be noted that the high expectation of development in the latter half of the SP reach means that there is a high possibility that the production with a higher expectation will be executed than in the first half of the SP reach. It should be added that it can be said that the coloring of the effect display, which is the effect during repeated hits related to the effect, suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. As a modification of the continuous striking effect in the automatic continuous striking effect A1 in such a configuration, there may be a change to the effect display such as rainbow light emission or a predetermined pattern, and in that case, even if the big hit is confirmed. Good (may be the role of notifying the winner).

On the other hand, regarding the automatic continuous hitting effect C1, for example, as a front button effect in the latter half of the SP reach, a button image (for example, FIG. 31 (a)) is displayed after the command "Destroy the enemy by repeatedly hitting!" Is displayed. (As shown by the code 401) and the characters "Continuous hit!" Are displayed, and the initial display of the characters "1000 people" is displayed. It is possible to exemplify such things as subtraction, and when the number reaches "0", the big hit is confirmed. In addition, the meter display is started in an empty (or full) mode, and as the automatic continuous striking progresses, the indicated amount of the meter display increases (or decreases), and the meter display becomes full (or empty). It is also possible to exemplify the fact that a big hit is confirmed by becoming a big hit.

In addition to this, as the automatic continuous striking effect, an example showing an effect change leading to a final display mode that cannot be said to be an effect of a big hit confirmation mode can be exemplified as follows. For example, as a notice effect that occurs before the development of SP reach, "Hit repeatedly to open the shutter and get" NEXT "! Character display such as "is performed. Then, as the automatic continuous striking progresses, the door provided as a movable effect member gradually opens, and the door is fully opened and the player acquires the "NEXT" logo (logotype) that can be seen in front of the door. If the production is performed, the execution of the so-called pseudo-ream is confirmed. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the front button effect (for example, the automatic continuous striking effect A1) is used instead of the back button effect.

On the other hand, as an automatic continuous striking effect, for example, a character display such as "Destroy as many panels as possible by repeatedly striking!" Is displayed, and as the automatic continuous striking progresses, the final panel (5 sheets) out of the 5 panels is displayed. When it reaches the eye panel), the full rotation reach (full rotation effect), which is the effect of the big hit confirmation mode, is executed (note that the first sheet is always destroyed, and when the second sheet is reached, the SP reach second half effect A is performed. When the third piece is reached, the SP reach second half effect B is executed, and when the fourth piece is reached, the SP reach second half effect C is executed). In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the front button effect (for example, the automatic continuous striking effect A1) is used instead of the back button effect. Further, the jackpot confirmation mode in the continuous striking effect of each auto continuous striking effect described above can also be referred to as a final display mode of the auto continuous striking effect. Then, it can be explained that the final display mode is the display mode (effect mode) having the highest expectation of big hit in each automatic continuous hitting effect. As a matter of course, if the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is not confirmed (the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is relatively high but the jackpot is not confirmed) is not confirmed in the continuous hitting effect of the auto continuous hit effect, the display with the highest jackpot expectation. It is preferable to refer to the aspect (effect mode) as the final display mode. That is, the display mode (effect mode) having the highest expectation of big hit is referred to as the final display mode regardless of whether or not the display mode in which the jackpot is confirmed is continuously hit.

The automatic continuous striking effect A1 includes, for example, an effect performed so as to be relatively inconspicuous (the same applies to an auto continuous striking effect other than the effect display), such as the above-mentioned white or blue effect display. Therefore, as the automatic continuous striking effect A1, it is possible to adopt various effects that are generally inconspicuous as compared with the automatic continuous striking effect C1. Then, as long as there is no particular problem in relation to the automatic continuous striking effect C1, various automatic continuous striking effects described above can be adopted for the auto continuous striking effect A1.

Further, also in the invention of the present additional study item 1, it is possible to perform the automatic continuous hitting determination in the same manner as described above. Then, for example, in the case of controlling in the same manner as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the first pressing operation of the operation button 22 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and is related to the automatic continuous striking operation. Even after the condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the automatic continuous striking operation by maintaining the pressing continuation which is the second condition.

Further, regarding the automatic continuous hit determination, as described in paragraph 0454, the single-shot operation is actually performed once at the time when the long press operation (press continuation) is started (long press operation start timing). .. This situation is the situation of the first single-shot operation and the first continuous hitting operation, but the situation has not yet reached the automatic continuous hitting. Then, 0.5 seconds after the start of the long press operation is the timing at which the second single operation is considered to be performed, that is, the timing at which the second continuous hit operation is considered to be performed. The pressing operation at this time is controlled to be an automatic continuous hitting operation (first automatic continuous hitting operation). Then, the long press operation for more than 0.5 seconds is considered to have been performed once every 0.2 seconds (although the actual single-shot operation has not been performed, 0.5 seconds have elapsed. It is considered that a single operation was performed every 0.2 seconds thereafter), and this "deemed single operation" is performed multiple times, which means that automatic continuous hitting (automatic continuous hitting effect, auto continuous hitting function) It is equivalent to being executed.

Further, the time required for the effect related to the automatic continuous striking operation as described above (here, the time of more than 0.5 seconds required to satisfy the second condition) is referred to as "auto continuous striking determination time" or the like. Although it is possible, the relationship between this "automatic continuous hit determination time" and the above-mentioned single-shot button effect (also referred to as "single-shot operation effect", "single-shot push effect", or "single-shot effect") It is also possible to set it. For example, in the single-shot button effect, the time until the effect triggered by the button operation by the player is executed (started) is set to, for example, 0.1 to 0.5 seconds, and the above-mentioned automatic continuous hit determination time (second condition) is set. It is conceivable to make it shorter than the time required to meet (more than 0.5 seconds).

Here, the time until the effect triggered by the button operation by the player is executed can be expressed as the time until the effect appears to be changed by the button operation, the time until the effect is switched, and the like. Yes, these times can be referred to as, for example, "effect switching time".

Further, in the single-shot button effect, it is conceivable that after the effect is switched, the time during which the effect after the change is continued (effect display continuation time) is longer than the auto continuous hit determination time.

Further, as the button effect, various examples of displaying a button image (for example, those shown by reference numeral 401 in FIG. 31A) have been described above, but the time before such a button image 401 appears (appearance). It is conceivable to determine the relationship between the previous time) and the automatic continuous hit judgment time. Then, the time before the appearance of the button image can be made longer than the auto continuous hit determination time. Here, the "time before appearance" of the button image can be determined as follows.

For example, the "pre-appearance time" of the button image is a so-called effect set effect (a plurality of translucent button images 401a are gathered from four sides of the top, bottom, left, and right to finally form one non-transparent button image. ) Can be the time required. Then, as the "effect set" related to this button image, for example, as shown in FIG. 37A by extracting only the main part, after a plurality of translucent button images 401a appear on the screen, As shown virtually by the arrow of the two-dot chain line, they are gathered and overlapped in one place, and changed to one button image (one opaque button) as shown in FIG. 37 (b) as well. It is possible to exemplify what forms an image). The time before appearance here is set to 2 seconds. Alternatively, although not shown, an example may be made in which images of parts (each part) related to a button image are displayed on the screen and then aggregated to form one button image (for example, "PUSH"). The part image of the pressed part written as, the part image of the decorative body around it, the part image imitating the screw, spring, operation button motor etc. built in the operation button are gathered from the top, bottom, left and right and finally One button image is formed).

Further, when performing an effect set related to such a button image, the start timing of the effect set is set as the start timing of the "pre-appearance time", and the end timing of the effect set is set as the end timing of the "pre-appearance time". Is possible. Further, the end timing of the effect set can be set as the completion timing of the button image.

In addition, the effect set is produced until the button operation valid period described above is started, and the relationship between the effect set and the button operation valid period is determined so that the button operation valid period is started when the button image is completed. It is possible. In other words, since the button operation is not valid during the effect set, even if the button operation (single-shot operation, normal continuous hit, automatic continuous hit, etc.) is performed, the effect associated with the button operation does not occur. It should be noted that the button image appears without the effect set in the continuous striking operation effect, but the button image may appear with the effect set in the single-shot operation effect, or the single-shot operation rather than the continuous striking operation effect. The production is configured so that the button image often appears with the effect set. Further, when the button image appears with the effect set, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the button image appears without the effect set. As a modification, in addition to the effect set in which the semi-transparent button images are gathered from all sides, an effect set in which the semi-transparent button images are gathered from all sides is provided, and the effect set in which the semi-transparent button images are gathered from all sides is better than the effect set. An effect set in which translucent button images are gathered from all sides has a longer time until a non-transparent button image is formed (the effect set's production time, which is the pre-appearance time described above) (for example, 2 seconds). It may be configured so that the expectation of a big hit is also high. In the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, the operation validity period in the continuous striking operation effect varies depending on the type of effect (for example, 5 seconds or 20 seconds), but in the single-shot operation effect. The operation validity period is uniformly set to 3 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of operation valid periods may be provided in the one-shot operation effect, but it is preferably less than the number of types of operation effective periods in the continuous striking operation effect.
<< Additional consideration 2 (Expansion of variety of productions associated with the type of auto-striking production 2) >>

Next, we will consider other measures to expand the variety of productions in relation to the types of auto-striking effects. It is possible to apply the same items as the above-mentioned additional items to be examined, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the embodiment according to the invention of the additional study item 2, the auto continuous hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) and the auto continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button) are the same as the above-mentioned additional study item 1. (Direction) and can be used. Further, as in the case of additional consideration 1, the relationship between the operation valid periods is determined so that the automatic continuous hitting effect A1 has a longer operation valid period (auto continuous hitting effective period) than the auto continuous hitting effect C1. ..

Further, each of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1) includes the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode with the highest expectation of the jackpot), as in the case of the additional consideration 1. Then, in the automatic continuous striking effect A1, as an effect of the jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode having the highest expectation of the jackpot), for example, a mode in which a predetermined image object in the effect image emits rainbow light is produced. In the automatic continuous hitting effect C1, the effect of annihilating the enemy is performed as the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode with the highest expectation of the jackpot). This jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode with the highest expectation of a big hit) (especially for the auto continuous hitting effect A1) can be considered as the above-mentioned final display mode as in the additional consideration 1. It is possible.

Each of the above items is the same as the invention according to the additional examination item 1, but as a characteristic item of the additional examination item 2, the remaining time of the automatic continuous hitting valid period is the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting determination time (here, 0.5 seconds). Consider the case where the long press operation is started in a situation where it is less than 0.55 to 0.6 seconds, which is super. Then, in this case, unlike the above-mentioned examples of FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), the automatic continuous striking effect can be executed. Further, the auto-continuous hitting effect A1 does not (or is unlikely) to be a big hit confirmation mode (or final display mode), but the auto-continuous hitting effect C1 is (or is likely to be) a big hit confirmation mode (or final display mode). ), The relationship between the previous effect (single-shot operation effect) and the auto-continuous hit effect C1 and the jackpot confirmation mode (or final display mode) is determined.

For example, if a long press is started at a timing such as when the operation valid period is less than 0.5 seconds remaining, the start of the long press is a single-shot operation (in the case of repeated hits from now on, the single-shot operation will be treated as the first repeated hit). Therefore, the effect is generated by this one-shot operation, and it is the auto continuous hit effect C1 that the generated effect tends to be the final display mode (in other words, the final display mode from the beginning). .. As another aspect, (1) When the same effect as the continuous hitting effect is automatically generated once at the end of the operation valid period, the auto continuous hit effect C1 is the final display effect at the end of the operation valid period. (2) Only in the automatic continuous hitting effect C1, the final display effect may be forcibly generated at the end of the operation valid period (automatic continuous hitting effect A1 is anything even if the operation valid period ends. Does not occur), etc.

By doing so, even in the situation where the automatic continuous hitting operation (long press) that does not meet the conditions for the automatic continuous hitting determination is performed, the jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode) is set according to the type of the automatic continuous hitting effect. It is possible to produce the effect in such a way that the rate of change (execution rate) is different. Then, even if the button operation is in a situation where the automatic repeated hits are not in time, it is possible to surely cause a change (movement) in the production. Further, on the other hand, the effect is finally performed in a different manner from the automatic continuous hitting effect, and as a result, the difference in the effect for the difference in the button operation can be shown to the player, and the player can press the button. It becomes possible to raise awareness of.

Then, it is possible to add a condition of the type of automatic continuous hitting effect to the special condition that the automatic continuous hitting operation (long press) that does not meet the condition of the automatic continuous hitting determination is performed to create a difference in the effect tendency. .. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

It should be noted that the automatic continuous hitting effect (here, A1 and C1) is less than the initial time when the button operation is detected (for example, the automatic continuous hitting determination time (here, about 0.55 to 0.6 seconds, which is 0.5 seconds)). (In time, etc.), for example, the effect display indicating the button operation is performed only once, and it is conceivable that the effect is produced by a single operation as described above. Then, it is conceivable to prevent the production in a high expectation mode (such as a rainbow or a production of a predetermined pattern) from being performed by the production by this one-shot operation (here, the first effect display). Further, as described above, at this time, the effect of the single-shot operation tends to be the final display mode (in other words, the final display mode from the beginning) in the automatic continuous striking effect C1. Alternatively, it is conceivable to use another aspect (1) or (2) described above.
<< Additional consideration 3 (Expanding the variety of button vibe production) >>

Next, the diversification of the vibration effect (button vibration effect) of the operation button 22 described above will be examined. Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional consideration item 3, for example, it is assumed that there are at least the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B as the effects related to the button vibe effect. Of these, the effect pattern A is a button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution. That is, in the effect pattern A, the operation button 22 vibrates when the player does not operate the operation button 22 (that is, the operation button 22 automatically vibrates even if the player does not operate the operation button 22). Production).

Then, as this effect pattern A, the appearance of the button image 401, which is executed as the above-mentioned look-ahead effect (preliminary effect related to the special symbol) (pre-reading button vibe effect suggesting that the target fluctuation has a high degree of expectation). What is executed at times (button vibe effect when a button image appears that suggests that there is a high possibility that a high expectation effect will occur by pressing the button), and what is executed almost at the same time as the start of the variable display (the variable display is A button vibe effect at the start of fluctuation that suggests a high degree of expectation), and one that is executed in a situation where the above-mentioned "Actually ... big hit!" Character is displayed on the screen (button at the time of unexpected effect) Vibe production), etc. can be exemplified.

On the other hand, the effect pattern B is a button vibe effect triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player. That is, it is assumed that the effect pattern B is an effect in which the operation button 22 vibrates when the player operates the operation button 22. It can be said that the effect pattern B has a higher degree of involvement (degree of involvement) of the player in the button vibe effect than the effect pattern A.

Then, as this effect pattern B, in the above-mentioned winning branch situation, the characters "Determine!" Are displayed together with the button image, and then the operation button 22 is operated, so that the current fluctuation display is a big hit. If it is a variable display, an effect of notifying the winning is executed (for example, the character "win!" Is displayed), and the operation button 22 is vibrated. The characters "decide!" Are a promotion effect that indirectly encourages the player to operate the operation button 22, but are displayed in a normal button image (a button image that appears in the situation before the winning branch). It is a promotion effect that is not done (in a normal button image, the promotion effect is only a button image in the first place, or if it is a one-shot operation effect, "press!", If it is a continuous hit operation effect, "press!" Only the display is attached). In addition, if the current fluctuation display is not a jackpot fluctuation display (if it is an out-of-order fluctuation display), an effect of notifying the loss is executed (for example, the characters "defeat!" Are displayed), but at that time, the operation button is executed. 22 is not vibrated. It is possible to exemplify an effect of vibrating the operation button 22 (a vibrating effect of a winning branch button) or the like. For example, the winning branch effect is also the winning branch button vibe effect, in which the lever L is projected (FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c)), the operation button 22 is raised, and the operation button 22 is vibrated. Can be included. In addition to the winning branch button vibe effect, it is not executed when the button image 401 appears before it develops into SP reach, but it is executed at the same time as the button image 401 is deleted when the button is pressed. It also has a "button vibe effect when a notice occurs" (for example, a button image 401 appears after the reach is established, the button image 401 is deleted by pressing the button, a button vibe effect occurs, and a big hit is not confirmed, but a big hit. "Next notice (notice production that informs the type of SP reach production)" which is a notice production with high expectation, rainbow-colored dialogue notice which is a big hit confirmation, and a predetermined pattern dialogue which is not a big hit confirmation but has a high expectation of a big hit Notice etc. will occur). Further, the button effect in the effect pattern B is preferably a single-shot operation effect which is a table button effect, but in addition to the effect pattern B as a single-shot operation effect which is a table button effect, a continuous hit which is a table button effect. An effect pattern B as an operation effect may be provided. In such a configuration, the effect pattern B as the one-shot operation effect is, for example, the winning branch button vibe effect of the SP reach second half effect A, the winning branch button vibe effect of the SP reach second half effect C, and the above-mentioned two types of button images. It is a button vibe effect when a notice occurs after erasure (next notice and dialogue notice), and the effect pattern B as a continuous hit operation effect is, for example, only the winning branch button vibe effect of the SP reach second half effect B, as a one-shot operation effect. It is desirable to configure the effect pattern B so that the number of types is relatively large.

Further, as a more specific example of the combination of the effect patterns A and B, for example, the effect pattern A is a look-ahead button vibe effect, and the hold that was the target of the look-ahead becomes the digestion target due to the occurrence of the effect. It is assumed that the jackpot expectation of fluctuation (target fluctuation) is 50%. On the other hand, the effect pattern B can be exemplified as a winning branch button vibe effect in which the occurrence of the effect is a big hit confirmation mode.

3-1. Embodiment 1 according to additional consideration item 3 (relationship between execution ratios of production patterns A and B)
The above-mentioned effect pattern A (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution) and effect pattern B (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player triggers the execution). ), It is assumed that the ratio of execution is different in a predetermined gaming situation.

For example, based on the target variation that is the target of pre-reading, in the variation before the target variation (pre-target variation), the rate at which the effect pattern A is executed is the rate at which the effect pattern B is executed (0%). Set the number of random values so that it is higher than (including).

Further, as another aspect, in a situation where the look-ahead effect related to a certain reserved storage information is executed, the fluctuation is before the fluctuation display (variation display of the target fluctuation, etc.) corresponding to the certain reserved storage information. Moreover, in the variation display in which the look-ahead effect is performed (such as the variation display of the pre-target variation in which the look-ahead effect is performed), the effect pattern A is executed at a higher rate than the effect pattern B, in other words, the effect pattern A. It is possible to set the number of random values so that the ratio of execution of the effect pattern B is lower than that of the effect pattern B (including 0%).

Further, after the look-ahead effect related to a certain hold storage information is executed, the look-ahead effect is executed in the change display (variation display of target change, etc.) when the change display corresponding to the hold storage information is started. The number of random values is determined so that the ratio of the effect pattern B being executed is higher than that of the variation display when the variation display is started without being executed (the variation display is started without the look-ahead effect being executed). In the case of this variation display, it is possible to determine the number of random values so that the effect pattern B is not executed).

Further, although the effect patterns A and B can be executed at their respective predetermined timings in the variation display, the effect pattern A is not executed at the above-mentioned predetermined timing in a certain variation display. Even so, the number of random values is determined so that the effect pattern B may be executed at a timing (here, referred to as "specific timing") after the above-mentioned predetermined timing in the certain variation display. Is possible.

Here, among the pre-target fluctuations, the pre-target variation in which the look-ahead effect is executed can be referred to as “pre-reading target pre-variation” or the like.

By using any of these or combining them as appropriate, the degree of involvement of the player in the button vibe effect can be associated with the target fluctuation. Then, it is possible to bring out a difference in the subsequent production tendency due to the difference in the degree of involvement of the player in the button vibe production. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

3-2. Embodiment 2 according to additional consideration item 3 (relationship between the execution ratio of the effect pattern A and the look-ahead effect)
In addition, regarding the effect pattern A (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution), the execution ratio of the effect pattern A is set to the look-ahead effect other than the effect pattern B (here, the effect pattern B). It is conceivable to determine in relation to the presence or absence of execution of the look-ahead effect D). The sign of the look-ahead effect described here is "D", because the codes "A" to "C" are used for the look-ahead effect described in other additional study items (additional study items 6 and later) described later. Because.

Further, when the above-mentioned effect pattern A (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution) is also executed as the look-ahead effect, it is the same as the look-ahead effects A to C described later. , It becomes a kind of look-ahead production. In that case, the above-mentioned effect pattern A can be distinguished from the look-ahead effects A to C by, for example, calling it "look-ahead effect α" or the like. It should be noted that the effect patterns A and the look-ahead effects A to D are names for distinguishing each effect so that the explanation is not complicated, and the effect pattern A (the operation of the operation button 22 by the player triggers the execution). In the relationship between the effect patterns A and the look-ahead effects A to D when the pre-reading effect) is executed as a look-ahead effect, the specific effect contents of the effect patterns A to D overlap each other as long as there is no particular problem. May be included. That is, it is also possible to perform the effect pattern A (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution) as the look-ahead effect, and in the look-ahead effects A to D, the operation button 22 by the player. It is also possible to perform a button vibe effect that is not triggered by the operation of.

As an example of the relationship between the effect pattern A and the look-ahead effect D, for example, the look-ahead effect D is executed in a variation before a target variation corresponding to a certain reserved storage information (a certain pre-target variation), and then a target. The number of random values is determined so that the effect pattern B may or may not be executed in the fluctuation. Further, when the pre-reading effect D is executed in the pre-target variation, the random number is determined so that the effect pattern A may or may not be executed in the subsequent target variation. Further, when the pre-reading effect D is executed in the pre-target variation, both the effect patterns A and B may be executed in the subsequent target variation, one may be executed, or both may not be executed. It is conceivable to have it.

Further, for example, when the look-ahead effect D is executed in the pre-target variation, the effect pattern A is executed rather than the effect pattern B in the target variation which is the target of the look-ahead, as compared with the case where the look-ahead effect D is not executed. It is also conceivable to make it easy (including the fact that the effect pattern B is not executed).

Further, the look-ahead effect D is not limited to the button vibe effect, but various look-ahead effects (including those using a movable effect member) such as the above-mentioned various hold look-ahead notices and various look-ahead continuous notices can also be adopted. Is.

By doing so, it is possible to give a sign regarding the effect pattern A in which the degree of involvement of the player in the button vibe effect is relatively low by the look-ahead effect. Even if the player's involvement in the button vibe effect is relatively low, it can be used more effectively by combining it with the look-ahead effect. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

3-3. Embodiment 3 according to the additional consideration item 3 (execution ratio of the effect pattern B relating to the presence / absence of the execution of the effect pattern A)
Further, the effect pattern A (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution) and the effect pattern B (button vibe in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player triggers the execution). Regarding the interrelationship between the effects), the execution ratio of the effect pattern B in the subsequent variation is different depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed. For example, in a situation where the effect pattern A is executed (executed situation) before the change (the change) at that time, the effect is produced by the change before the change (the change) at that time. The effect pattern B is more likely to be executed in the variation than in the situation where the pattern A is not executed (non-execution situation) (the effect pattern A is executed in the variation before the variation at that time (the variation). In the situation where it is not executed (non-execution situation), the effect pattern B is not executed due to the fluctuation).

Here, as a situation in which the effect pattern A has been executed in the variation before the variation, for example, the effect pattern A is at least within three consecutive variations before the variation without including the variation. It is possible to exemplify a situation in which it is executed once. It is desirable that the range within three consecutive fluctuations prior to the fluctuation is the pre-reading target fluctuation during the pre-reading effect targeting the fluctuation.

Further, as a control mode for facilitating the execution of the effect pattern B in such a situation, for example, the sub-main CPU 521 sets a flag when the effect pattern A is executed and stores information indicating that fact. To. Then, whether or not the above flag indicating that the effect pattern A has been executed is set by the sub-main CPU 521 in the subsequent numerical fluctuations (for example, each of the four fluctuations) including the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation). Judgment is made. Then, if it is determined that the above flag is set, a table is selected so that the proportion of the effect pattern B is relatively larger than that of other effects, and the table is used to draw a lottery for the effects. I do.

By doing so, it becomes possible to more effectively utilize the button vibe effect depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed and the time-series combination of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

3-4. Embodiment 4 according to the additional consideration item 3 (execution ratio of the effect of the combination of the effect patterns A and B relating to the presence / absence of the execution of the effect pattern A)
Similarly, the effect pattern A (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution) and the effect pattern B (button in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player triggers the execution). Regarding the interrelationship of the vibe effect), the execution ratio of the combination of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B in the subsequent variation is different depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed before the change. It is also possible.

That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment (3-3. Embodiment 3 according to the additional consideration item 3), the "execution ratio of the effect pattern B" with respect to the effect pattern A prior to the change is specified. In the embodiment, the execution ratio of "the effect of the combination of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B" to the effect pattern A before the fluctuation is defined. In other words, the relationship between the execution ratio of the effect pattern A prior to the fluctuation and the "effect of the combination of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B" is defined.

For example, it is assumed that both the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B can be executed in the variation. In that case, the execution timing of the effect pattern B is set after the execution timing of the effect pattern A (for example, the timing is 3 seconds after the start of the variation display, and the effect pattern A is the timing before the reach is established. Is executed, and then the effect pattern B is executed at the winning branch timing in the latter half of the SP reach after the reach is established). Then, in the variation, even if the effect pattern A is not executed, the effect pattern B may be executed after that, and such a time series in the variation (effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B execution). The execution expectation degree (the degree of expectation that the effect pattern is executed) related to the effect pattern is the variation before the fluctuation (in the previous variation, before the look-ahead target during the pre-reading effect targeting the variation). (It is desirable that it is variable), so that it differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern A has been executed. That is, when the effect pattern A is executed in the change before the change, the effect pattern A is not executed in the change before the change, but in the change. The time-series effect pattern of effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B execution is facilitated. In addition to that, when the effect pattern A has been executed in the variation before the variation, the effect pattern A has not been executed in the variation before the variation. The time-series effect pattern of the effect pattern A execution → the effect pattern B execution may be easily executed due to the fluctuation.

More specifically, for example, it is assumed that the effect pattern A is executed when the button image 401 appears (vibe effect when the button image appears). To explain the vibe effect at the time of appearance of the button image in more detail, the vibe effect at the time of appearance of the button image is such that the operation button 22 vibrates at the time of the appearance of the button image which is the timing before the button operation by the player. Is.

As an example of the vibe effect when this button image appears, for example, a notice effect related to some (arbitrary) game state (for example, the above-mentioned next notice, a rainbow color or a line notice of a predetermined pattern, etc. may be used, or other notices. A button image that triggers the start of the rainbow color that is the production or the step-up notice of the predetermined pattern appears. At this time, the button vibration effect is rarely performed at a predetermined ratio even before the player operates the operation button 22. Then, when a vibe effect is performed when the button image appears, the expectation of a big hit related to the change (and the effect in the change) is about 33% due to the occurrence of the effect.

On the other hand, the effect pattern B (button vibe effect triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) is a winning branch button vibe effect, and is a big hit confirmation mode when the effect occurs. And.

When the effect patterns A and B in the variation are combined in this way, it can be said that the above-mentioned "effect pattern A non-execution" is the effect mode of "no button vibration effect when the button image appears" in the variation. .. Further, in the "effect pattern A non-execution", the effect of the previous stage (here, the button image is displayed) related to the effect pattern A is performed, but the effect pattern A (here, the button vibe effect when the button image appears) is performed. It means that the button image is not displayed at the timing when the button image related to the effect pattern A can be displayed (for example, the timing 3 seconds after the start of the variable display and the timing before the reach is established). It can be said that there is.

Further, since the effect pattern B is a winning branch button vibe effect, it is performed relatively at the end (late stage) of the fluctuation, and the effect pattern A is executed (or the effect pattern A is executed). It will be executed after the period (which did not exist).

As for the relationship between the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B, the following types (1) to (3) can be considered as time-series effect patterns. Here, in both the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B, the time series of "effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B non-execution" will be omitted.
Type (1) Production pattern A execution → Production pattern B execution Specific example: Button vibe production execution when a button image appears 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation display → Reach establishment → Winning branch button vibration production execution type (2) production in the latter half of SP reach Pattern A non-execution → Effect pattern B execution Specific example: A button image appears 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation display, but at that time, when the button image appears, there is no button vibe effect execution → Reach is established → Winning branch button vibe in the latter half of SP reach Production execution type (3) Execution of production pattern B only Specific example: No button image appears 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation display (No button vibration effect is executed when the button image appears at the same timing) → Reach is established → In the latter half of SP reach Winning branch button vibe production execution

Further, in this "3-4. Embodiment 4 according to the additional consideration item 3", the above-mentioned type (1) and type (2) are described depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed before the change. The degree of execution expectation related to the time-series production pattern is different. That is, when the effect pattern A is executed before the change, the time series of the above type (1) and the type (2) is executed more than when the effect pattern A is not executed before the change. It is configured so that the execution expectation related to the production pattern is high. Then, when the effect pattern A is executed before the fluctuation, it is possible to execute more time-series effect patterns than when the effect pattern A is not executed. Further, not limited to this, when the effect pattern A is executed before the fluctuation, it is possible to execute less time-series effect patterns than when the effect pattern A is not executed. Is. It should be noted that the time-series of the above-mentioned type (1) and type (2) when the effect pattern A is executed before the change is more than when the effect pattern A is not executed before the change. It may be configured so that the execution expectation related to the effect pattern is low.

Here, the "execution expectation degree" can be expressed as the degree of expectation that the effect pattern is executed, as well as the probability that the effect pattern is executed. Further, the execution expectation for each of the above types (1) or (2) is not limited to be determined, and the total execution expectation of the above types (1) and (2) is before the fluctuation. It may be determined so as to differ depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed.

Furthermore, in order to more effectively produce the effect by executing the effect pattern A in the variation before the variation and the time-series effect pattern in the variation, the variation display before the variation (targeting the variation). In the pre-reading target fluctuation during execution of the look-ahead effect), the effect is based on the time-series effect pattern (that is, the effect pattern A is executed → the effect pattern B is executed, the effect pattern A is not executed → the effect pattern B is executed, and the effect is produced. It is desirable that only pattern B is executed). However, in the variation display prior to the variation, it is a problem that the effect pattern B is not executed (that is, the effect pattern A is executed → the effect pattern B is not executed, or only the effect pattern A is executed). No.

Then, in order to do so, for example, the sub-main CPU 521 sets a flag when the effect pattern B is executed, and determines the state of this flag for each change. Further, referring to this flag, if it is determined in the variation that the effect pattern B has been executed within three consecutive variations prior to the variation without including the variation, the variation , It is conceivable not to execute the time-series production pattern.

In addition, in order to prevent the time-series production pattern from being performed, the production lottery is performed without using the table containing the numerical values corresponding to the time-series production pattern, and the time-series production pattern is drawn. Even if it is, it is possible to cancel and change other productions.

By doing so, it becomes possible to more effectively utilize the button vibe effect by a series of connections between the effect pattern A and the effect of the combination of the effect patterns A and B. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

In addition, the relationship between the button vibe effect without the player operation (effect pattern A) and the button vibe effect with the player operation (effect pattern B) is defined for a plurality of variations (the variation and the variation before that). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the button vibration effect occurs and whether or not the player needs to operate the button himself / herself. Then, it becomes possible to make the occurrence of the button vibe effect even more unpredictable (or difficult to predict).

It should be noted that, when the effect pattern A is executed before the change, the change is made so that the ratio of the time-series effect pattern is different from that when the effect pattern A is not executed. It is also possible to define the relationship with "effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B non-execution".

Such an effect pattern of "effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B non-execution" can be considered as one of the types of time-series effect patterns (for example, type (4)). More specifically, in the variation, neither the effect pattern A nor the effect pattern B is executed, and other effects are executed.

Here, in the effect pattern of this "effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B non-execution", a button image initially appears as in the specific example of (2) above, but at that time, when the button image appears. It is possible to include an effect pattern in which the button vibe effect is not executed and the winning branch button vibe effect is not executed after that. Further, it is also possible to include an effect pattern (4) such that none of the appearance of the button image, the button vibe effect at the time of the appearance of the button image, and the winning branch button vibe effect is executed.

Further, the effect pattern A (button vibe effect in which the operation of the operation button 22 by the player does not trigger the execution) that can be executed in the variation prior to the variation is not limited to the one exemplified here, and is various. It is possible to apply the effect of (look-ahead effect). Further, as a time-series effect pattern, it is possible to apply various combinations of effect patterns. Further, the appearance of the button image and various button vibration effects described here may be executed as the back button effect.

Regarding the various embodiments 1 to 4 according to the additional study item 3, the vibration in the button vibration effect is not limited to a relatively short period such as several times or more per second, and is less than once per second, for example. It may have a relatively long cycle such as. Further, the operation is not limited to the operation repeated at a fixed cycle, and may be an operation in which the cycle changes.

Further, unlike the operation button 22, the movable effect member constituting the effect gimmick is arranged in the game area so that the player cannot touch it, but the movable effect member vibrates (reciprocates) during operation. In the case of performing gimmick), it is conceivable to make the cycle of the vibration operation of the operation button 22 shorter (smaller) than the operation cycle of the movable effect member. Further, it is conceivable to make the amplitude of the vibration operation of the operation button 22 that the player can touch smaller than the amplitude of the movable effect member.
<< Additional consideration 4 (Expansion of diversity of auto-striking effect C1 1) >>

Next, consider the diversification of the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, table button effect). Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional study item 4, for example, in the situation where the automatic continuous striking effect C1 is executed, a button image as described above (for example, the one shown by reference numeral 401 in FIG. 31A) appears. Then, the effect and effect corresponding to the continuous striking operation are executed. In other words, the condition of automatic continuous hitting (here, long press for more than 0.5 seconds) is satisfied, and the player's hand keeps pressing and holding (or is released from the operation button), as explained so far. The automatic continuous hitting effect and the effect display related to the automatic continuous hitting effect are performed.

Here, regarding the effect display, in addition to the image production performed on the screen, the light emitting member (LED or the like) mounted on the gaming machine frame 11 (including the operation button 22) or the gaming board 50 (particularly the gaming area 52) is used. The effect of the operation mode of the light emitter) is also included in the "effect display". The effect of the operation mode by these light emitting members can be referred to as an "effect" by the light emitting member, an "illumination effect", or the like.

Further, as an effect display (illumination effect) by the light emitting member, for example, in the case of automatic continuous striking, the light emitting body may be white or red at specific intervals (here, the 0.2 second interval described above). It blinks in a specific color (it may blink not only in one color but also in two colors), and the effect display started in white changes to red, which suggests high reliability (first when auto continuous hitting is continued). Blinks white at 0.2 second intervals, then blinks blue at 0.2 second intervals, yellow blinks at 0.2 second intervals, and green blinks at 0.2 second intervals. (It gradually changes so as to blink in red at 0.2 second intervals) (so-called upstart) can be exemplified. In the case of normal continuous striking instead of automatic continuous striking, the effect is displayed (the illuminant blinks in a specific color) at the timing when the player actually presses the operation button 22.

Further, it is assumed that the light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) can be performed in parallel among the above-mentioned environment settings during the execution of the automatic continuous striking effect C1. Then, in this case, the image of the light amount adjustment effect as illustrated in FIG. 34 (b) is the above-mentioned auto-continuous striking effect C1 image (here, the button) as illustrated in FIG. 38 by extracting only the main part. It is displayed together with the image 401). When the image of the light amount adjustment effect is superimposed on the auto-repeated effect C1 image in this way, various displays as described in the above-mentioned << Parallel handling of the auto-repeated function and the environment setting function >>. It is possible to adopt an aspect or a control mode.

Here, it is possible to make the image for adjusting the amount of light have a higher display priority (the layer is in the foreground) than the automatic continuous striking effect C1 image (which may include both the button image and the effect image based on the operation). Further, it is also possible to determine the positional relationship between the two images so that at least a part of the image of the light amount adjustment effect is superimposed on at least a part of the auto continuous striking effect C1 image.

Further, by adjusting the amount of light, the amount of light of the light emitting body for the operation button (not shown) provided on the operation button 22 of the gaming machine frame 11 is changed. The light emitter for the operation button emits light in white during the operation valid period in the table button effect to notify the player that the operation valid period is in effect, but the operation button is not in the valid period. Does not emit light or emits light in blue to notify the player that the operation is not in the valid period. Then, the button image (for example, the button image of reference numeral 401) related to the automatic continuous striking effect C1 is displayed, and the light emitting body for the operation button is emitted in white, and the light amount is adjusted as described above while the button image is displayed. The light intensity (brightness) of the above-mentioned light emitting body for operation buttons (LED, not shown) is changed, but the light intensity (brightness) of the button image is not changed (does not change).

In order to prevent the light amount (brightness) of the button image from being changed, for example, it is conceivable not to change the light amount (brightness) of the backlight (not shown) built in the effect display device 60. .. As the backlight (not shown) of the effect display device 60, the same one as that normally provided in a liquid crystal display device or the like is applied.

In this case, for example, if the sub-main CPU 521 is at least executing the automatic continuous striking effect C1, the function of adjusting the amount of light related to the light emitter for operation buttons (not shown) and the function of adjusting the amount of light related to the above-mentioned backlight. It is conceivable to perform control separately from. Then, when there is an operation of adjusting the light amount by the player, the sub-main CPU 521 determines whether or not the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 is being executed, and if the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 is being executed, the light amount related to the backlight is being executed. It is possible to change the amount of light (brightness) related to the light emitter for operation buttons (not shown) without changing (brightness).

If the sub-main CPU 521 is at least executing the automatic continuous striking effect C1, the amount of light (brightness) related to the light emitter for operation buttons (not shown) is changed, and the CPU 531 of the sub-sub board 302 is transferred from the sub-main CPU 521. It is also possible to adopt a control mode such as changing the amount of light (brightness) related to the backlight based on the command (sub-main command) of.

Further, as another method for preventing the light amount (brightness) of the button image from being changed, the following can be considered. For example, when the player adjusts the light amount, the light amount (brightness) of the portion other than the button image changes on the screen of the effect display device 60, but only the button image on the screen does not seem to change the light amount. Selectively control the layers of the image. More specifically, the CPU 531 of the sub-sub board 302 performs image processing so that the brightness of the layer of the button image looks the same as before the light amount adjustment.

Further, when the operation button 22 is pressed in a situation where the light amount is adjusted (a situation in which an image of the light amount adjustment effect is displayed and the light amount can be adjusted) during the execution of the automatic continuous striking effect C1, the button is pressed. It is also conceivable to change the light emitting mode (effect of the light emitting body for operation buttons (not shown)) of the light emitting body for operation buttons (not shown) accordingly. For example, in a normal continuous striking, the light emitting mode is configured to change from white to red (changes to red only for 0.1 seconds and then returns to white) in response to a single press, and the automatic continuous striking effect is in progress. If there is, it changes from white to red at 0.2 second intervals (changes from white to red for 0.1 seconds, then returns to white for 0.1 seconds, and then changes to red again for 0.1 seconds. (Repeat during production).

Further, when the operation button 22 is pressed, it is conceivable that the display mode of the button image (effect display of the button image, etc.) changes according to the pressing (the indicator image shows the decrease in the operation validity period). Since it changes, it is excluded here). For example, if the button image is an image that imitates a white button, it is configured so that the button image blinks or trembles in response to a single press in a normal repeated hit, and the automatic repeated hits are made. If the effect is being produced, the effect that the button image blinks or trembles is generated, which is configured to be repeated at 0.2 second intervals during the automatic continuous striking effect.

Further, as another aspect, the display of the button image related to the automatic continuous striking effect is started (button image generation), and almost at the same time as the timing of the button image generation, the operation button 22 also emits white light (white issuance). Will be done. Subsequently, in the automatic continuous striking effect executed by pressing and holding the operation button 22, the display mode of the button image, the light emission mode of the operation button 22, and the light emission mode of various light emitting members are displayed at 0.2 second intervals as described above. It changes to a repeating mode (a mode in which an effect of blinking or trembling is generated in the case of a button image, and an effect of blinking or color change is generated in the case of an operation button 22 or other light emitting member). Further, during the automatic continuous striking operation (during long press), the light amount can be adjusted in parallel by operating the cross key 96. Further, by executing the automatic continuous striking and the light amount adjustment in parallel, the brightness of the light emitting mode of the operation button 22 and the light emitting mode of the light emitting member is changed while changing the mode at intervals of 0.2 seconds. (For example, the brightness changes while the white flashes, or the brightness changes while the red flashes), but the brightness of the button image (here, the above-mentioned 0.2 second interval mode change related to the button image). Is controlled so that it does not change.

By making these various production modes, the button image on the screen can be shown to the player that the light amount is adjusted by the change of the light amount (brightness) of the operation button 22 itself. Can be assumed that the amount of light (brightness) does not change. As a result, it becomes possible to show the player that the amount of light is actually changed without causing a sense of discomfort in the image on the screen.

Further, in a situation where the player operates the cross key 96 or the like to adjust the amount of light, the effect related to the automatic continuous striking effect C1 and the operation of the player can be smoothly advanced. Then, the player can quickly operate the cross key 96 or the like or the operation button 22 (operation in the order of the cross key 96, the operation button 22, the cross key 96, etc.) with one hand (for example, the left hand).

Further, in the continuous striking operation effect, the effect is performed in response to the player's operation a plurality of times or a single time, so that the player may feel that the screen or the light decoration is too bright. In such a case, if the specifications are such that the volume level cannot be adjusted until the player is actually operating the player or the continuous striking operation effect is completed, the player's hobbies and tastes cannot be immediately reflected. .. However, by setting the additional consideration item 4, the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 and the light amount level display are displayed in parallel, so that the light amount can be adjusted in the situation where the player is actually operating. Therefore, it becomes possible to immediately reflect the hobbies and tastes of the player.

Although the auto continuous striking effect C1 has been described here as an example, it is not limited to the auto continuous striking effect and can be applied to other button effects. It is also possible to examine the relationship between the force required to press the operation button 22 and the cross key 96. For example, the pressing force required to detect the operation button 22 ON and the pressing force required to detect the cross key 96 ON require a large force to detect the former operation button 22 ON. It is conceivable to design each other's spring forces and other mechanical configurations so that they are. By doing so, the device that is relatively frequently used during the production (here, the operation button 22) has a stronger force to operate than the device that is operated for environment setting (here, the cross key 96). Can be required.
<< Additional consideration 5 (Expansion of diversity of auto-striking effect C1 2) >>

Next, we will consider other measures to diversify the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, table button effect). Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional study item 5, as in the case of the additional study item 4 described above, for example, in the situation where the automatic continuous striking effect C1 is executed, the button image as described above (for example, FIG. 31A) is shown. (As shown by reference numeral 401) appears, and the effect and effect corresponding to the continuous striking operation are executed.

Further, it is assumed that the light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) can be performed in parallel among the above-mentioned environment settings during the execution of the automatic continuous striking effect C1. At this time, as in the case of the additional consideration 4 described above, the image of the light amount adjusting effect as illustrated in FIG. 38 is superimposed on the above-mentioned automatic continuous hitting effect C1 image (here, the button image 401). It is done.

Further, in this additional study item 5, unlike the above-mentioned additional study item 4, depending on the light amount adjustment in this case, the light amount of the light emitting body for the operation button (not shown) may be the light amount (brightness) of the button image (entire screen). Also, make sure that neither is changed. However, when the operation button 22 is pressed, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body for the operation button (not shown) (effect of the light emitting body for the operation button (not shown)) is changed according to the pressing.

Further, when the operation button 22 is pressed, it is conceivable that the display mode of the button image (effect display of the button image, etc.) changes according to the pressing.

Further, as another aspect, the display of the button image related to the automatic continuous striking effect is started (button image generation), and almost at the same time as the timing of the button image generation, the operation button 22 also emits white light (white issuance). Will be done. Subsequently, in the automatic continuous striking effect executed by pressing and holding the operation button 22, the display mode of the button image, the light emission mode of the operation button 22, and the light emission mode of various light emitting members are displayed at 0.2 second intervals as described above. It changes to a repeating mode (a mode in which an effect of blinking or trembling is generated in the case of a button image, and an effect of blinking or color change is generated in the case of an operation button 22 or other light emitting member). Further, during the automatic continuous striking operation (during long press), the light amount can be adjusted in parallel by operating the cross key 96. Further, by executing the automatic continuous striking and the light amount adjustment in parallel, the light emitting mode of the button image and various light emitting members excluding the light emitting member of the operation button 22 is set at 0.2 second intervals as described above. The brightness changes while changing the mode (for example, the brightness changes while blinking white or the brightness changes while blinking red), but the light emission mode of the button image or the operation button 22 (button image or , The mode change at intervals of 0.2 seconds in the light emitting member of the operation button 22) is controlled so that the brightness does not change.

By doing so, even if the amount of light is adjusted, the operation button 22 and the button image, which are hidden by the player's fingers and are difficult to see, do not change during the production. As a result, the state of the operation button 22 at the time of button production is not changed. In particular, in the operation button 22, when the light emitting body for the operation button (not shown) is driven in a mode peculiar to, for example, during the promotion effect, the amount of light that does not change the notification mode indicating that the promotion effect is in progress. Can be maintained at (brightness). Then, it is possible to notify that the button effect is being performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Although the auto continuous striking effect C1 has been described here as an example, it is not limited to the auto continuous striking effect and can be applied to other button effects.
<< Additional consideration 6 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 1 (button effect after power failure recovery))>

Next, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the button effect after the power failure is restored will be examined. Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the present additional study item 6, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least two types, a look-ahead effect B and a look-ahead effect C. Of these, the look-ahead effect B is a type of look-ahead effect, and is, for example, a special background image different from the background image A corresponding to the effect stage A and the background image B corresponding to the effect stage B (for example, "chance! "Background image" in which the characters "" and "Intense heat!" Are displayed in large size) suggests that the target fluctuation is lurking and that the target fluctuation is highly expected. It is assumed to be "directing".

This background look-ahead effect is a look-ahead notice in which the background changes when a hold related to the target change occurs (during the change in which the hold occurs) or when the change starts after the next change in the change in which the hold related to the target change occurs. .. The background look-ahead effect is an effect of suggesting or giving a notice regarding the subsequent gaming state due to the difference in the mode of the background in the image displayed on the effect display device 60.

The look-ahead effect B, which is a kind of background look-ahead effect, has a relatively high expectation of a big hit (for example, 80% or more). Such a look-ahead effect B can be referred to as, for example, a "super heat background look-ahead effect", and is, for example, a look-ahead effect that displays a background image in which the characters "super heat!" Are displayed in large size. .. In addition to this, a hold display in the shape of a rainbow-colored star having a jackpot expectation of 100%, which will be described later, may be used as the look-ahead effect B.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect C is an image (button hold display) meaning the operation button 22 as shown in FIG. 39 (a) as a kind of "display mode including a predetermined character image" related to the hold look-ahead effect described above. ) A hold display effect imitating 421 (hereinafter referred to as "button hold effect") shall be performed. The hold display in which the hold look-ahead effect is not performed (hold does not change) is a basic display mode, and the display mode is in the shape of a white star (note that the hold is on the drawing). For the sake of convenience, the shape of a black-painted star is used to indicate the existence of the display), and the hold display in which hold look-ahead is performed (hold change) is a display mode different from the basic mode. The display mode is the shape of a blue star (expected jackpot 5%), the shape of a green star (expected jackpot 15%), the shape of a red star (expected jackpot 30%), and a star with a predetermined pattern in order of expectation. The shape of the star (big hit expectation 50%) and the shape of a rainbow-colored star (big hit expectation 100%). In addition to that, it has a "button hold effect" that is a hold display effect that is changing on hold. For example, by changing to a hold display that imitates the button hold display 421, a color other than white is used. It suggests that the star shape will change to a pending display. By operating the operation button 22 in the situation where this button hold display is displayed, the displayed button hold display is a blue star with a relatively low degree of expectation for a situation suitable for the player. It is configured to change to a hold display in the shape of a red star, which means a relatively high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation differs depending on which hold display the button hold display changes to, but on average, the degree of expectation of a big hit when the button hold display is displayed is 40%.

The look-ahead effect C is not limited to the button hold display 421, and is various as long as it is a hold look-ahead effect in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively lower than that of the above-mentioned "heated background look-ahead effect". Things can be applied. Then, as the look-ahead effect C, a background look-ahead effect that is positioned with a lower expectation than the “heated background look-ahead effect” can be applied. As such a background look-ahead effect, a background image in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed in a large size, and a "chance background look-ahead effect" in which the expectation of a big hit is 30% can be exemplified.

In addition to this, it is also possible to apply a look-ahead effect by a stop combination of the effect symbols 190 (190a to 190c) as the look-ahead effect C. As such a look-ahead effect, for example, a so-called “chance look-ahead effect” can be exemplified. And, as this "chance look-ahead effect", for example, the same symbol is used for the combination of the effect symbols (left and middle effect symbols 190a, 190b) and the middle and right effect symbols (190b, 190c) that do not reach. Something that causes a stop (may include a temporary stop) (for example, "223" or "455"), or a combination of production symbols in which all the production symbols are the same color (for example, even-numbered production symbols are blue and odd). When the effect symbol of is red, examples thereof include "246", "351", etc.), and a combination of forward and reverse order effect symbols (for example, "123", "654", etc.).

In the present additional study item 6, a case where such a look-ahead effect B or a look-ahead effect C is performed in a certain pre-target variation is considered. Since the pre-target variation in this case is the pre-target variation in which the look-ahead effect is performed, it can be referred to as "pre-reading target pre-variation" as described above. Then, in the present additional examination item 6, the ratio of the button effect (here, meaning the overall effect related to the operation button 22) is considered in the corresponding variation (target variation) thereafter.

Further, in the present additional study item 6, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the above-mentioned certain pre-target variation (here, “pre-target variation A” and “pre-target variation B”) is used. A combination of cases where a power failure occurs and the power is restored (also referred to as "power restoration") from the period during which the target is changed to the time when the target change (the change) is performed (until the start). think.

Then, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target variation A is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the power supply is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A in the case is that the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed does not cause a power failure. When the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target fluctuation A in which the look-ahead effect C is executed so as to be higher than the ratio at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target change B of the next change. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is the next variation of the pre-target variation A without power interruption in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. The number of places related to the lottery of the button effect is determined so as to be lower than the ratio at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B (the power is cut off in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. When the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A without the pre-target variation A, or when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is 0%). Further, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target variation A is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the power supply is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. The rate at which the button image appears with the effect set when the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A in the case is executed is the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. When the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is executed without power interruption, the rate is higher than the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set, and the look-ahead effect When the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A in which C is executed is executed, the effect set is accompanied. The rate at which the button image appears is when the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A is executed without the power failure occurring in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. It is lower than the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set (in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A without the power failure occurring in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. The rate at which the button image appears with the effect set when the button effect is executed, and the pre-target variation when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A where the look-ahead effect C is executed. It may be configured such that when the button effect in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of A is executed, the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set is 0%).

Further, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target variation A is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the power supply is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. In this case, the pre-target variation A in which the button effect is executed is higher in the target variation than in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A, and the look-ahead effect C is executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target fluctuation when the power is cut off and the power is restored is the target when the power cut is not generated in the pre-target fluctuation A in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. The number of places related to the lottery of the button effect may be determined so that the ratio of the button effect executed is lower in the target variation than in the pre-variation B (pre-target variation in which the look-ahead effect B is executed). The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target fluctuation B when the power is cut off at A and the power is restored, or the power is cut off at the pre-target fluctuation A where the look-ahead effect C is executed. Including that the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target change when the disconnection is restored is 0%). In other words, the variation display (here, the variation display of the pre-target variation) before the variation display corresponding to the certain hold storage information (here, the variation display of the target variation) is related to the certain hold storage information. 1 When the power is turned off and then the power is restored in the situation where the look-ahead effect (here, the look-ahead effect B) is being executed, the change display before the change display corresponding to a certain hold storage information (pre-target change). The variable display (variable display of target fluctuation) corresponding to the certain reserved storage information has a relatively higher execution rate of the operation effect (button effect) than the variable display), while the certain reserved storage information. The second look-ahead effect (here, look-ahead effect C) related to the certain reserved storage information is executed in the variation display (variation display of pre-target variation) prior to the variation display corresponding to (variation display of target variation). When the power is turned off and then the power is restored in the above situation, the certain hold storage information is more than the change display before the change display (variation display of pre-target fluctuation) corresponding to the certain hold storage information. The variation display corresponding to (variation display of target variation) is configured so that the execution rate of the operation effect is relatively low. Further, when a certain pre-target variation A described above is a pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, a power failure occurs in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed, and the power is restored. In this case, the target variation has a higher rate of appearance of the button image with the effect set when the button effect is executed than the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is executed is the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. If the power is not cut off in, the ratio of the button image appearing with the effect set is lower in the target fluctuation than in the pre-target fluctuation B (look-ahead effect B). The rate at which the button image appears with the effect set when the button effect in the pre-target fluctuation B is executed when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target fluctuation A in which is executed, and the look-ahead. The ratio of the button image appearing with the effect set is 0% when the button effect in the target fluctuation when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target fluctuation A in which the effect C is executed is executed. It may be configured to include). Further, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target variation A is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the pre-target variation A (or the target of the next variation of the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed) is executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power is cut off in the pre-variation B) is the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. Pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) in which the pre-reading effect C is executed so that the button effect is executed at a rate higher than the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power supply is not cut off. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target fluctuation when the power is cut off and the power is restored is the power cutoff in the pre-target fluctuation A (or the pre-target fluctuation B) in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. The number of places related to the lottery of the button effect may be determined so that the ratio of the button effect in the target change when is not generated is lower than the rate (pre-target change A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed). (Or, the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power is not cut off in the pre-target variation B), or the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. ), The ratio of the button effect to the target fluctuation when the power is cut off and the power is restored is 0%). Further, when the above-mentioned pre-target variation A is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, and when the above-mentioned pre-target variation A is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation. A button effect is executed in the target variation when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A) in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. The rate at which the button image appears with the effect set is the target fluctuation when the power supply is not cut off in the pre-target fluctuation A (or the pre-target fluctuation B) in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. When the button effect is executed, the rate is higher than the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set, and in the pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. The rate at which the button image appears with the effect set when the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power is cut off and the power is restored is the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation A) in which the look-ahead effect C is executed. , It is lower than the rate at which the button image appears with the effect set when the button effect in the target variation is executed when the power is not cut off in the pre-target variation B) (look-ahead effect B is executed). The rate at which the button image appears with the effect set when the button effect in the target fluctuation is executed when the power is not cut off in the pre-target fluctuation A (or the pre-target fluctuation B), and the look-ahead. Button with effect set when the button effect in the target variation when the power supply is cut off and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation B) in which the effect C is executed is executed. It may be configured so that the rate at which the image appears is 0%).

Here, FIG. 39B illustrates a situation in which the pre-target variation A is restarted after the power is restored, but the look-ahead effect B (or C) is not restarted. Further, FIG. 39 (b) illustrates a situation in which there is a target variation after the pre-target variation B following the pre-target variation A. Further, the button effect appears in the pre-target fluctuation B.

By doing so, the frequency of occurrence of the button effect after the power is turned off and restored can be different depending on the type of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect B or the look-ahead effect C). Then, by visually observing the state of the button effect after the power is restored by the player (or the game hall clerk), it is possible to infer what the effect was before the power outage occurred (immediately before the power outage occurred). Is possible.

Further, as one of the indexes related to the game performance, it is possible to cause "difference in the tendency of the button effect after the power is restored according to the type of look-ahead". As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Furthermore, from the situation of the look-ahead effect before the power is turned off, it is possible to infer to some extent the difference in the tendency of the button effect after the power is restored, and this also makes it possible to create new and diverse game characteristics. Become.

It should be noted that the sub-main CPU 521 determines that "the look-ahead effect B was executed before the power was turned off" based on the command transmitted again from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 after the power is restored. Can be considered. By doing so, it is possible to determine that "the look-ahead effect B was executed before the power was turned off" without performing data backup on the side of the sub-main board 301.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is conceivable that the effect data is backed up on the side of the sub-main board 301 when the power is turned off, and the sub-main CPU 521 confirms the backed up data when the power is restored. Be done.
<< Additional consideration 7 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 2 (button effect before target change 1)) >>

Next, we will consider the button effect before the target changes. Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional study item 7, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least two types, a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B. Of these, the look-ahead effect A is a type of hold look-ahead effect, and here, it is assumed that the hold look-ahead effect has a relatively low expectation in the whole, as shown in blue. Here, as described above, when the basic display mode related to the hold display is white, for example, it may be colored (for example, blue or red) indicating the degree of expectation of the next stage or the next stage.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect B is a background look-ahead effect as in the above-mentioned additional consideration item 6. Further, here as well, the look-ahead effect B is assumed to be a “heated background look-ahead effect” or the like, which has a relatively high expectation of a big hit (for example, 80% or more).

Then, the look-ahead effect A was performed by comparing the case where the look-ahead effect A (here, the blue hold look-ahead effect) was performed and the case where the look-ahead effect B (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect) was performed. In this case, the button effect (here, the single-shot button effect) is more likely to occur in the subsequent “pre-target variation” than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. For example, when the pre-reading effect A is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, is used. The button effect (here, the single button effect) is more likely to occur in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A than in the case where the pre-reading effect B is performed. Further, when the pre-reading effect A is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, is used. When a button effect (here, a single button effect) occurs in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A, a button image appears with an effect set, rather than when the pre-reading effect B is performed. It may be easier to do. For these, when the pre-reading effect B is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the button is pressed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A. If the effect (here, a single button effect) does not occur, or if the look-ahead effect B is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the next variation of the pre-target variation A. This includes the fact that the button image does not appear with the effect set when the button effect (here, the single-shot button effect) occurs in the pre-target fluctuation B of.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect B is performed, the above-mentioned button effect (here, a single-shot button effect) is more likely to occur in the subsequent "target fluctuation" than when the look-ahead effect A is performed. do. For example, when the pre-reading effect A is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, is used. The button effect (here, the single button effect) is more likely to occur due to the target variation of the successive variation of the pre-target variation A than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. Further, when the pre-reading effect A is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, is used. When a button effect (here, a single button effect) occurs due to the target variation of the pre-target variation A one after another, the button image is more likely to appear with the effect set than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. It may be. Regarding these, when the pre-reading effect B is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the button effect is performed by the target variation of the successive variation of the pre-target variation A ( Here, if the single-shot button effect) does not occur, or if the look-ahead effect B is performed in the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation 2 before the target variation, the target of the successive variation of the pre-target variation A. It also includes the fact that the button image does not appear with the effect set when the button effect (here, the single button effect) occurs due to the fluctuation.

By doing so, depending on the type of look-ahead, whether the button effect (here, the single-shot button effect) is easily executed by the "pre-target fluctuation" or the "target fluctuation" is easily executed. Will make a difference. Then, as one of the indexes related to the game quality, it is possible to generate "difference in the tendency of the button effect according to the type of look-ahead". As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

The above-mentioned "difference in the tendency of the button effect" is a difference in the tendency that the button effect is easily performed by the "pre-target fluctuation" or the button effect is easily performed by the "target fluctuation". Further, the "difference in the tendency of the button effect" referred to here can be expressed as the "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect". More specifically, the following examples can be given for this "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect".

For example, in the target fluctuation for the look-ahead effect A before the target change (here, the blue hold look-ahead effect), the button effect before the reach (here, the single-shot button effect) occurs at a rate of 30%, and the button effect after the reach (here, the button effect after the reach). Here, it is assumed that the automatic continuous hit button effect) occurs at 5% (pattern 1 related to the "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect"). In addition, the button image after the reach is more likely to appear with the effect set than the button effect before the reach. The pre-reach timing may be the timing before the development to the SP reach production, and the post-reach timing may be the timing during the SP reach production (second half of the SP reach). This also applies to the following.

On the other hand, in the target fluctuation for the look-ahead effect B before the target change (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect), the button effect before the reach (here, the single-shot button effect) occurs at a rate of 40%, and the button after the reach. It is assumed that the effect (here, the auto-repeated button effect) occurs at 50% (Pattern 1 related to the "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect"). In addition, the button image after the reach is more likely to appear with the effect set than the button effect before the reach.

In this way, the rate of occurrence of button effects before and after reach in the target change related to the look-ahead effect A (execution rate, 30% and 5%) and before and after the reach in the target change related to the look-ahead effect B. It is possible to provide a difference (difference in the probability of occurrence) from the rate of occurrence of the button effect (execution rate, 40% and 50%).

Here, for example, the rate of occurrence of the pre-reach and post-reach button effects in the target change related to the look-ahead effect A is set to 30% and 5%, and the pre-reach and post-reach button effects in the target change related to the look-ahead effect B are set. It is also possible to set the occurrence rate of 30% and 50%.
<< Additional consideration 8 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 3 (button effect 1 when target changes)) >>

Next, we will consider the button effect when the target changes. Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional study item 8, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least the look-ahead effect B (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect). Then, the "target fluctuation" makes it easier for the button effect to occur than the "look-ahead target pre-variation". This includes the fact that the button effect does not occur in the "pre-reading target pre-variation". Further, it is assumed that the type of the button effect is at least one of the automatic continuous hit effect and the single-shot button effect.

In addition, as an index related to game characteristics, "difference in probability of occurrence of auto-repeated hit effect when comparing look-ahead target pre-variation and target variation" and "single-shot button when comparing look-ahead target pre-variation and target variation". Consider the difference in the probability of occurrence of production. All of these mean the difference in the probability of occurrence of the button effect in "when comparing the look-ahead pre-target variation and the target variation". In the former, the button effect is an "automatic continuous hit effect", and in the latter, the button effect is a "single button effect". The probability of occurrence is set between 0% and 100%.

Then, as the additional consideration item 8, "difference in the probability of occurrence of the automatic continuous hitting effect" and "difference in the probability of occurrence of the single-shot button effect" in "when comparing the pre-reading target variation and the target variation". Make them different from each other.

In other words, as the additional consideration 8, the difference (B1-A1) is the difference between "probability of occurrence of auto-continuous hitting effect in pre-reading target fluctuation A1" and "probability of occurrence of auto-continuous hitting effect in target fluctuation" (B1-A1). ) And the difference (B2-A2), which is the difference between "probability of occurrence of single-shot button effect in pre-reading target variation A2" and "probability of occurrence of single-shot button effect in target variation B2", are made different from each other.

By doing so, the frequency of occurrence of button effects (here, auto-repeated hit effects and single-shot button effects) depends on whether or not pre-reading is in progress (depending on the difference between pre-reading target fluctuation and target fluctuation). (Probability of occurrence) and the tendency of the button effect to be generated can be different. Then, it is possible to improve the diversity of the combination of the presence / absence of the effect display related to the button effect and the display mode. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Here, the above-mentioned "tendency of the generated button effect" is a tendency shown by the auto continuous hit effect or a tendency shown by the single-shot button effect. For example, whether the generated button effect is the auto-continuous hit effect or the single-shot effect. The "tendency of the button effect to be generated" also includes whether it is a button effect and what kind of effect content is generated by pressing the button when the button effect is generated.

It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is four include those with a shorter fluctuation time than the specific special map fluctuation pattern at the time reduction. As described above (eg, paragraph 0168 of the present specification). In this way, it is common practice to allow the fluctuation time to change depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation.

Then, when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), the fluctuation time is relatively small (for example, 2 or 1). Control is generally performed to determine the fluctuation pattern so that The description of each invention of the present application also presupposes the adoption of such control.

Then, the following can be considered as another embodiment according to the present additional consideration item 8. For example, since the fluctuation time can change depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation time also changes (can change) depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation even in the pre-target fluctuation. In order to optimize this, control is performed in which the execution of the single-shot button effect is prioritized over the automatic continuous-hit effect, and the execution rate of the single-shot button effect is higher (larger and more) than the automatic continuous-hit effect. However, in the target fluctuation, since the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation, the execution ratio of the automatic continuous hitting effect and the single button effect does not change even if the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation is different.

Alternatively, only when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively small (for example, in the case of two or one), the automatic continuous hitting effect is executed. Then, when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, in the case of 4 or 3), the execution rate of the automatic continuous striking effect is set to 0% (or less than 5%, etc.). However, in the target fluctuation, since the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation, the execution ratio of the automatic continuous hitting effect and the single button effect does not change even if the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation is different.

By doing so, it is possible to further optimize the button function in response to the fluctuation of the fluctuation time depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation. Then, it becomes possible to create new and diverse game characteristics.
<< Additional consideration 9 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 4 (button effect before target change 2)) >>

Subsequently, in relation to the above-mentioned additional consideration item 7, another example relating to the button effect before the target change will be examined. Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional study item 9, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least two types, a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B. Of these, the look-ahead effect A is a type of hold look-ahead effect, and here, it is assumed that the hold look-ahead effect has a relatively low expectation in the whole, as shown in blue. Here, as described above, when the basic display mode related to the hold display is white, for example, it may be colored (for example, blue or red) indicating the degree of expectation of the next stage or the next stage.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect B is a background look-ahead effect as in the above-mentioned additional consideration item 6. Further, here as well, the look-ahead effect B is assumed to be a “heated background look-ahead effect” or the like, which has a relatively high expectation of a big hit (for example, 80% or more).

Then, the look-ahead effect A was performed by comparing the case where the look-ahead effect A (here, the blue hold look-ahead effect) was performed and the case where the look-ahead effect B (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect) was performed. In this case, the button effect (here, the front button effect) is more likely to occur in the subsequent “pre-target variation” than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. Here, the "table button effect" is a button effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, as described above. Further, when the look-ahead effect A is performed, the button image is more likely to appear with the effect set when the button effect occurs in the subsequent "pre-target fluctuation" than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. (Including the fact that the button image does not appear with the effect set when the look-ahead effect B is performed and the button effect occurs in the subsequent "pre-target fluctuation").

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect B is performed, the above-mentioned button effect (here, the back button effect) is more likely to occur in the subsequent "target fluctuation" than when the look-ahead effect A is performed. do. Here, the "back button effect" is a button effect that does not display a guide such as a button image or limits the guide display, as described above. Further, when the look-ahead effect B is performed, the button image is more likely to appear with the effect set when the button effect is subsequently generated in the "target fluctuation" than when the look-ahead effect A is performed.

By doing so, depending on the type of look-ahead, the button effect (here, the front button effect or the back button effect) is easily executed by the "pre-target variation" or is executed by the "target variation". It will make a difference, such as whether it will be easier. Then, as one of the indexes related to the game quality, it is possible to generate "difference in the tendency of the button effect according to the type of look-ahead". Further, it is possible to create a game property in which the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the back button effect is different depending on the type of look-ahead. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

The above-mentioned "difference in the tendency of the button effect" is a difference in the tendency that the button effect is easily performed by the "pre-target fluctuation" or the button effect is easily performed by the "target fluctuation". Further, the "difference in the tendency of the button effect" referred to here can be expressed as the "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect". More specifically, the following examples can be given for this "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect".

For example, in the target fluctuation for the look-ahead effect A before the target change (here, the blue hold look-ahead effect), the button effect before the reach (here, the front button effect) occurs at a rate of 30%, and the button effect after the reach (here, the button effect after the reach). Here, it is assumed that the back button effect) occurs at 5% (pattern 1 related to the "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect"). In addition, the button image after the reach is more likely to appear with the effect set than the button effect before the reach.

On the other hand, in the target fluctuation for the look-ahead effect B before the target change (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect), the button effect before the reach (here, the front button effect) occurs at a rate of 40%, and the button after the reach. It is assumed that the effect (here, the back button effect) occurs at 50% (Pattern 1 related to the "difference in the probability of occurrence related to the button effect"). In addition, the button image after the reach is more likely to appear with the effect set than the button effect before the reach.

In this way, the rate of occurrence of button effects before and after reach in the target change related to the look-ahead effect A (execution rate, 30% and 5%) and before and after the reach in the target change related to the look-ahead effect B. It is possible to provide a difference (difference in the probability of occurrence) from the rate of occurrence of the button effect (execution rate, 40% and 50%).

Here, for example, the rate of occurrence of the pre-reach and post-reach button effects in the target change related to the look-ahead effect A is set to 30% and 5%, and the pre-reach and post-reach button effects in the target change related to the look-ahead effect B are set. It is also possible to set the occurrence rate of 30% and 50%.
<< Additional consideration 10 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 5 (button effect 2 due to target fluctuation)) >>

Subsequently, in relation to the above-mentioned additional consideration item 8, another example relating to the button effect in the target fluctuation will be examined. Unless there is a particular problem, the same items as those of the above-mentioned additional examination items can be applied, but the description of the same items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional study item 10, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least the look-ahead effect B (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect). Then, the "target fluctuation" makes it easier for the button effect to occur than the "look-ahead target pre-variation". Further, the types of button effects are the back button effect and the front button effect. In addition, "target fluctuation" is more likely to appear a button image with an effect set when a button effect occurs than "look-ahead target pre-variation" (when a button effect occurs in "look-ahead target pre-variation"). Including that the button image does not appear with the effect set).

In addition, as an index related to game characteristics, "difference in probability of occurrence of auto-repeated hit effect when comparing look-ahead target pre-variation and target variation" and "single-shot button when comparing look-ahead target pre-variation and target variation". Consider the difference in the probability of occurrence of production. All of these mean the difference in the probability of occurrence of the button effect in "when comparing the look-ahead pre-target variation and the target variation". The former is a button effect as a "back button effect", and the latter is a button effect as a "back button effect".

Then, as the additional consideration item 10, the "difference in the probability of occurrence of the back button effect" and the "difference in the probability of occurrence of the front button effect" in the "comparison between the pre-reading target variation and the target variation" are taken into consideration. Make them different from each other.

In other words, as the additional consideration 10, the difference between "probability of occurrence of back button effect in look-ahead target pre-variation C1" and "probability of occurrence of back button effect in target variation D1" (D1-C1). ) And the difference (D2-C2), which is the difference between "probability of occurrence of single-shot button effect C2 in pre-reading target variation" and "probability of occurrence probability D2 of single-shot button effect in target variation", are made different from each other.

By doing so, the frequency of occurrence of button effects (here, back button effects and front button effects, respectively) depending on whether or not the look-ahead is in progress (depending on the difference between the look-ahead target pre-variation and the target variation). (Probability of occurrence) and the tendency of the button effect to be generated can be different. Then, it is possible to improve the diversity of the combination of the presence / absence of the effect display related to the button effect and the display mode. As a result, the button function can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Here, the above-mentioned "tendency of the button effect to be generated" is a tendency shown by the back button effect or a tendency shown by the front button effect.

It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is four include those with a shorter fluctuation time than the specific special map fluctuation pattern at the time reduction. As described above (eg, paragraph 0168 of the present specification). In this way, it is common practice to allow the fluctuation time to change depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation.

Then, when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), the fluctuation time is relatively small (for example, 2 or 1). Control is generally performed to determine the fluctuation pattern so that The description of each invention of the present application also presupposes the adoption of such control.

Then, as another embodiment according to the present additional consideration item 10, the following can be considered. For example, since the fluctuation time can change depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation time also changes (can change) depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation even in the pre-target fluctuation. In order to optimize this, control is performed in which the execution of the front button effect is prioritized over the back button effect, and the execution ratio of the front button effect is higher (larger and more) than the back button effect. However, in the target fluctuation, since the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation, the execution ratio of the back button effect and the front button effect does not change even if the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation is different.

Alternatively, the back button effect is executed only when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively small (for example, in the case of two or one). Then, when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, in the case of 4 or 3), the execution ratio of the back button effect is set to 0% (or less than 5%). However, in the target fluctuation, since the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation, the execution ratio of the back button effect and the front button effect does not change even if the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation is different.

By doing so, it is possible to further optimize the button function in response to the fluctuation of the fluctuation time depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation. Then, it becomes possible to create new and diverse game characteristics.

10 Pachinko game machine, 20 launch handle, 50 game board, 52 game area,
53 Main control display device, 62 1st start winning opening, 63 2nd starting winning opening,
70 1st special symbol display unit, 71 2nd special symbol display unit, 90 big prize device,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 113 first hit / fail determination means,
117 2nd hit / fail determination means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub-main board,
302 sub-sub board, 501 main board CPU, 521 sub-main board CPU,
401 button image, 402 indicator image, 404 bright image.

Claims (1)

When a game is played using a game medium and the game medium enters the starting port, it is possible to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stop the symbol as an effect related to the game. A gaming machine that performs special games that can give profits to players in certain cases.
The main control means that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control means.
An effect output means that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means,
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player,
If the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is not satisfied even if the game medium wins the start opening, the reserved storage information related to the variable display is reserved and stored within a predetermined number.
It is possible to perform a look-ahead effect that suggests the execution expectation of the special game related to the reserved storage information between the time when the reserved storage information is stored on hold and the time when the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information is started. can be,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can display the effect triggered by the player operation of the operation means.
There are two types of operation effects: one-shot operation effects that can accept a single player operation and continuous hit operation effects that can accept multiple player operations.
It is possible to display a promotion effect to encourage the player's operation,
When a player operation is performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation a plurality of times.
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the continuous striking operation effect, if the single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, it is considered that the player operation is performed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect according to the fact that a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer.
It has a first effect pattern that displays the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed, and a second effect pattern that does not display the promotion effect when the continuous striking operation effect is executed.
As the type of the look-ahead effect, at least a predetermined look-ahead effect is provided.
Execution ratio of the first effect pattern in the previous variation display and the first effect in the variation display when a predetermined look-ahead effect is executed in the variation display before the variation display corresponding to a certain hold storage information. The difference between the execution rate of the pattern and the execution rate of the second effect pattern in the previous variation display when the predetermined look-ahead effect is executed in the variation display before the variation display corresponding to a certain reserved storage information. A gaming machine characterized in that the difference between the effect and the execution rate of the second effect pattern in the variable display is different.

Images